Dr. Reddy's Laboratories Limited

Manufacturer Details

There are currently no manufacturer details available.

Dr. Reddy's Laboratories Limited Drugs

Ranitidine

Ranitidine

Active Duodenal Ulcer

The current recommended adult oral dosage of ranitidine for duodenal ulcer is 150 mg twice daily. An alternative dosage of 300 mg once daily after the evening meal or at bedtime can be used for patients in whom dosing convenience is important. The advantages of one treatment regimen compared to the other in a particular patient population have yet to be demonstrated (see Clinical Trials: Active Duodenal Ulcer). Smaller doses have been shown to be equally effective in inhibiting gastric acid secretion in US studies, and several foreign trials have shown that 100 mg twice daily is as effective as the 150 mg dose.

Antacid should be given as needed for relief of pain (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Pharmacokinetics).

Maintenance of Healing of Duodenal Ulcers

The current recommended adult oral dosage is 150 mg at bedtime.

Pathological Hypersecretory Conditions (such as Zollinger-Ellison syndrome)

The current recommended adult oral dosage is 150 mg twice a day. In some patients it may be necessary to administer ranitidine 150 mg doses more frequently. Dosages should be adjusted to individual patient needs, and should continue as long as clinically indicated. Dosages up to 6 g/day have been employed in patients with severe disease.

Benign Gastric Ulcer

The current recommended adult oral dosage is 150 mg twice a day.

Maintenance of Healing of Gastric Ulcers

The current recommended adult oral dosage is 150 mg at bedtime.

GERD

The current recommended adult oral dosage is 150 mg twice a day.

Erosive Esophagitis

The current recommended adult oral dosage is 150 mg four times a day.

Maintenance of Healing of Erosive Esophagitis

The current recommended adult oral dosage is 150 mg twice a day.

Pediatric Use

The safety and effectiveness of ranitidine have been established in the age-group of 1 month to 16 years. There is insufficient information about the pharmacokinetics of ranitidine in neonatal patients (less than 1 month of age) to make dosing recommendations.

The following 3 subsections provide dosing information for each of the pediatric indications.

Treatment of Duodenal and Gastric Ulcers

The recommended oral dose for the treatment of active duodenal and gastric ulcers is 2 to 4 mg/kg twice daily to a maximum of 300 mg/day. This recommendation is derived from adult clinical studies and pharmacokinetic data in pediatric patients.

Maintenance of Healing of Duodenal and Gastric Ulcers

The recommended oral dose for the maintenance of healing of duodenal and gastric ulcers is 2 to 4 mg/kg once daily to a maximum of 150 mg/day. This recommendation is derived from adult clinical studies and pharmacokinetic data in pediatric patients.

Treatment of GERD and Erosive Esophagitis

Although limited data exist for these conditions in pediatric patients, published literature supports a dosage of 5 to 10 mg/kg per day, usually given as two divided doses.

Dosage Adjustment for Patients With Impaired Renal Function

On the basis of experience with a group of subjects with severely impaired renal function treated with ranitidine, the recommended dosage in patients with a creatinine clearance <50 mL/min is 150 mg every 24 hours. Should the patient's condition require, the frequency of dosing may be increased to every 12 hours or even further with caution. Hemodialysis reduces the level of circulating ranitidine. Ideally, the dosing schedule should be adjusted so that the timing of a scheduled dose coincides with the end of hemodialysis.

Elderly patients are more likely to have decreased renal function, therefore caution should be exercised in dose selection, and it may be useful to monitor renal function (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Pharmacokinetics: Geriatrics and PRECAUTIONS: Geriatric Use).
Metformin Hydrochloride...

Metformin Hydrochloride

There is no fixed dosage regimen for the management of hyperglycemia in patients with type 2 diabetes with metformin hydrochloride or any other pharmacologic agent. Dosage of metformin hydrochloride must be individualized on the basis of both effectiveness and tolerance, while not exceeding the maximum recommended daily dose. The maximum recommended daily dose of metformin hydrochloride tablets is 2550 mg in adults and 2000 mg in pediatric patients (10-16 years of age).

Metformin hydrochloride tablets should be given in divided doses with meals. Metformin hydrochloride tablets should be started at a low dose, with gradual dose escalation, both to reduce gastrointestinal side effects and to permit identification of the minimum dose required for adequate glycemic control of the patient.

During treatment initiation and dose titration (see Recommended Dosing Schedule), fasting plasma glucose should be used to determine the therapeutic response to metformin hydrochloride and identify the minimum effective dose for the patient. Thereafter, glycosylated hemoglobin should be measured at intervals of approximately three months. The therapeutic goal should be to decrease both fasting plasma glucose and glycosylated hemoglobin levels to normal or near normal by using the lowest effective dose of metformin hydrochloride tablets, either when used as monotherapy or in combination with sulfonylurea or insulin.

Monitoring of blood glucose and glycosylated hemoglobin will also permit detection of primary failure, i.e., inadequate lowering of blood glucose at the maximum recommended dose of medication, and secondary failure, i.e., loss of an adequate blood glucose lowering response after an initial period of effectiveness.

Short-term administration of metformin hydrochloride may be sufficient during periods of transient loss of control in patients usually well-controlled on diet alone.

Recommended Dosing Schedule

Adults

In general, clinically significant responses are not seen at doses below 1500 mg per day. However, a lower recommended starting dose and gradually increased dosage is advised to minimize gastrointestinal symptoms.

The usual starting dose of metformin hydrochloride tablets is 500 mg twice a day or 850 mg once a day, given with meals. Dosage increases should be made in increments of 500 mg weekly or 850 mg every 2 weeks, up to a total of 2000 mg per day, given in divided doses. Patients can also be titrated from 500 mg twice a day to 850 mg twice a day after 2 weeks. For those patients requiring additional glycemic control, metformin hydrochloride tablets may be given to a maximum daily dose of 2550 mg per day. Doses above 2000 mg may be better tolerated given three times a day with meals.

If higher doses of metformin are required, metformin hydrochloride tablet should be used at total daily doses up to 2550 mg administered in divided daily doses, as described above. (See CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Clinical Studies.)

In a randomized trial, patients currently treated with metformin hydrochloride tablet were switched to metformin hydrochloride extended-release tablets. Results of this trial suggest that patients receiving metformin hydrochloride tablets treatment may be safely switched to metformin hydrochloride extended-release tablets once daily at the same total daily dose, up to 2000 mg once daily. Following a switch from metformin hydrochloride tablets to metformin hydrochloride extended-release tablets, glycemic control should be closely monitored and dosage adjustments made accordingly (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Clinical Studies).

Pediatrics

The usual starting dose of metformin hydrochloride tablets is 500 mg twice a day, given with meals. Dosage increases should be made in increments of 500 mg weekly up to a maximum of 2000 mg per day, given in divided doses.

Transfer From Other Antidiabetic Therapy

When transferring patients from standard oral hypoglycemic agents other than chlorpropamide to metformin hydrochloride, no transition period generally is necessary. When transferring patients from chlorpropamide, care should be exercised during the first two weeks because of the prolonged retention of chlorpropamide in the body, leading to overlapping drug effects and possible hypoglycemia.

Concomitant metformin hydrochloride and Oral Sulfonylurea Therapy in Adult Patients

If patients have not responded to four weeks of the maximum dose of metformin hydrochloride monotherapy, consideration should be given to gradual addition of an oral sulfonylurea while continuing metformin hydrochloride at the maximum dose, even if prior primary or secondary failure to a sulfonylurea has occurred. Clinical and pharmacokinetic drug-drug interaction data are currently available only for metformin plus glyburide (glibenclamide).

With concomitant metformin hydrochloride and sulfonylurea therapy, the desired control of blood glucose may be obtained by adjusting the dose of each drug. In a clinical trial of patients with type 2 diabetes and prior failure on glyburide, patients started on metformin hydrochloride 500 mg and glyburide 20 mg were titrated to 1000/20 mg, 1500/20 mg, 2000/20 mg or 2500/20 mg of metformin hydrochloride and glyburide, respectively, to reach the goal of glycemic control as measured by FPG, HbA1c and plasma glucose response (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Clinical Studies). However, attempts should be made to identify the minimum effective dose of each drug to achieve this goal. With concomitant metformin hydrochloride and sulfonylurea therapy, the risk of hypoglycemia associated with sulfonylurea therapy continues and may be increased. Appropriate precautions should be taken. (See Package Insert of the respective sulfonylurea.) If patients have not satisfactorily responded to one to three months of concomitant therapy with the maximum dose of metformin hydrochloride and the maximum dose of an oral sulfonylurea, consider therapeutic alternatives including switching to insulin with or without metformin hydrochloride tablets.

Concomitant Metformin hydrochloride and Insulin Therapy in Adult Patients

The current insulin dose should be continued upon initiation of metformin hydrochloride therapy. Metformin hydrochloride therapy should be initiated at 500 mg once daily in patients on insulin therapy. For patients not responding adequately, the dose of metformin hydrochloride should be increased by 500 mg after approximately 1 week and by 500 mg every week thereafter until adequate glycemic control is achieved. The maximum recommended daily dose is 2500 mg for metformin hydrochloride tablets. It is recommended that the insulin dose be decreased by 10% to 25% when fasting plasma glucose concentrations decrease to less than 120 mg/dL in patients receiving concomitant insulin and metformin hydrochloride. Further adjustment should be individualized based on glucose-lowering response.

Specific Patient Populations

Metformin hydrochloride is not recommended for use in pregnancy. Metformin hydrochloride is not recommended in patients below the age of 10 years.

The initial and maintenance dosing of metformin hydrochloride tablets should be conservative in patients with advanced age, due to the potential for decreased renal function in this population. Any dosage adjustment should be based on a careful assessment of renal function. Generally, elderly, debilitated, and malnourished patients should not be titrated to the maximum dose of metformin hydrochloride tablets.

Monitoring of renal function is necessary to aid in prevention of lactic acidosis, particularly in the elderly. (See WARNINGS.)
Fluoxetine

Fluoxetine

Major Depressive Disorder

Initial Treatment

Adult

IIn controlled trials used to support the efficacy of fluoxetine, patients were administered morning doses ranging from 20 to 80 mg/day. Studies comparing fluoxetine 20, 40, and 60 mg/day to placebo indicate that 20 mg/day is sufficient to obtain a satisfactory response in major depressive disorder in most cases. Consequently, a dose of 20 mg/day administered in the morning, is recommended as the initial dose.

A dose increase may be considered after several weeks if insufficient clinical improvement is observed. Doses above 20 mg/day may be administered on a once a day (morning) or BID schedule (i.e., morning and noon) and should not exceed a maximum dose of 80 mg/day.

Pediatric (children and adolescents)

IIn the short-term (8 to 9 week) controlled clinical trials of fluoxetine supporting its effectiveness in the treatment of major depressive disorder, patients were administered fluoxetine doses of 10 to 20 mg/day (seeCLINICAL TRIALS).Treatment should be initiated with a dose of 10 or 20 mg/day. After 1 week at 10 mg/day, the dose should be increased to 20 mg/day.

However, due to higher plasma levels in lower weight children, the starting and target dose in this group may be 10 mg/day. A dose increase to 20 mg/day may be considered after several weeks if insufficient clinical improvement is observed.

All patients

As with other drugs effective in the treatment of major depressive disorder, the full effect may be delayed until 4 weeks of treatment or longer.

As with many other medications, a lower or less frequent dosage should be used in patients with hepatic impairment. A lower or less frequent dosage should also be considered for the elderly (see Geriatric Use under PRECAUTIONS), and for patients with concurrent disease or on multiple concomitant medications. Dosage adjustments for renal impairment are not routinely necessary (see Liver Disease and Renal Disease under CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, and Use in Patients with Concomitant Illness under PRECAUTIONS).

Maintenance/Continuation/Extended Treatment

It is generally agreed that acute episodes of major depressive disorder require several months or longer of sustained pharmacologic therapy. Whether the dose needed to induce remission is identical to the dose needed to maintain and/or sustain euthymia is unknown.

Daily Dosing

Systematic evaluation of fluoxetine in adult patients has shown that its efficacy in major depressive disorder is maintained for periods of up to 38 weeks following 12 weeks of open-label acute treatment (50 weeks total) at a dose of 20 mg/day (see CLINICAL TRIALS).

Switching Patients to a Tricyclic Antidepressant (TCA)

Dosage of a TCA may need to be reduced, and plasma TCA concentrations may need to be monitored temporarily when fluoxetine is coadministered or has been recently discontinued (see Other drugs effective in the treatment of major depressive disorder under PRECAUTIONS, Drug Interactions).

Switching Patients to or from a Monoamine Oxidase Inhibitor (MAOI)

At least 14 days should elapse between discontinuation of an MAOI and initiation of therapy with fluoxetine. In addition, at least 5 weeks, perhaps longer, should be allowed after stopping fluoxetine before starting an MAOI (see CONTRAINDICATIONS and PRECAUTIONS).

Obsessive-Compulsive Disorder

Initial Treatment

Adult

In the controlled clinical trials of fluoxetine supporting its effectiveness in the treatment of OCD, patients were administered fixed daily doses of 20, 40, or 60 mg of fluoxetine or placebo (see CLINICAL TRIALS). In 1 of these studies, no dose-response relationship for effectiveness was demonstrated. Consequently, a dose of 20 mg/day, administered in the morning, is recommended as the initial dose. Since there was a suggestion of a possible dose- response relationship for effectiveness in the second study, a dose increase may be considered after several weeks if insufficient clinical improvement is observed. The full therapeutic effect may be delayed until 5 weeks of treatment or longer.

Doses above 20 mg/day may be administered on a once-a-day (i.e., morning) or BID schedule (i.e., morning and noon). A dose range of 20 to 60 mg/day is recommended; however, doses of up to 80 mg/day have been well tolerated in open studies of OCD. The maximum fluoxetine dose should not exceed 80 mg/day.

Pediatric (children and adolescents)

In the controlled clinical trial of fluoxetine supporting its effectiveness in the treatment of OCD, patients were administered fluoxetine doses in the range of 10 to 60 mg/day (seeCLINICAL TRIALS).

In adolescents and higher weight children, treatment should be initiated with a dose of 10 mg/day. After 2 weeks, the dose should be increased to 20 mg/day. Additional dose increases may be considered after several more weeks if insufficient clinical improvement is observed. A dose range of 20 to 60 mg/day is recommended.

In lower weight children, treatment should be initiated with a dose of 10 mg/day. Additional dose increases may be considered after several more weeks if insufficient clinical improvement is observed. A dose range of 20 to 30 mg/day is recommended. Experience with daily doses greater than 20 mg is very minimal, and there is no experience with doses greater than 60 mg.

All patients

As with the use of fluoxetine in the treatment of major depressive disorder, a lower or less frequent dosage should be used in patients with hepatic impairment. A lower or less frequent dosage should also be considered for the elderly (see Geriatric Use under PRECAUTIONS), and for patients with concurrent disease or on multiple concomitant medications. Dosage adjustments for renal impairment are not routinely necessary (see Liver Disease and Renal Disease under CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, and Use in Patients with Concomitant Illness under PRECAUTIONS).

Maintenance/Continuation Treatment

While there are no systematic studies that answer the question of how long to continue fluoxetine, OCD is a chronic condition and it is reasonable to consider continuation for a responding patient. Although the efficacy of fluoxetine after 13 weeks has not been documented in controlled trials, adult patients have been continued in therapy under double-blind conditions for up to an additional 6 months without loss of benefit. However, dosage adjustments should be made to maintain the patient on the lowest effective dosage, and patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for treatment.

Bulimia Nervosa

Initial Treatment

In the controlled clinical trials of fluoxetine supporting its effectiveness in the treatment of bulimia nervosa, patients were administered fixed daily fluoxetine doses of 20 or 60 mg, or placebo (see CLINICAL TRIALS). Only the 60-mg dose was statistically significantly superior to placebo in reducing the frequency of binge-eating and vomiting. Consequently, the recommended dose is 60 mg/day, administered in the morning. For some patients it may be advisable to titrate up to this target dose over several days. Fluoxetine doses above 60 mg/day have not been systematically studied in patients with bulimia.

As with the use of fluoxetine in the treatment of major depressive disorder and OCD, a lower or less frequent dosage should be used in patients with hepatic impairment. A lower or less frequent dosage should also be considered for the elderly (see Geriatric Use under PRECAUTIONS), and for patients with concurrent disease or on multiple concomitant medications. Dosage adjustments for renal impairment are not routinely necessary (see Liver disease and Renal disease under CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, and Use in Patients with Concomitant Illness under PRECAUTIONS).

Maintenance/Continuation Treatment

Systematic evaluation of continuing fluoxetine 60 mg/day for periods of up to 52 weeks in patients with bulimia who have responded while taking fluoxetine 60 mg/day during an 8-week acute treatment phase has demonstrated a benefit of such maintenance treatment (see CLINICAL TRIALS). Nevertheless, patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

Panic Disorder

Initial Treatment

In the controlled clinical trials of fluoxetine supporting its effectiveness in the treatment of panic disorder, patients were administered fluoxetine doses in the range of 10 to 60 mg/day (see CLINICAL TRIALS). Treatment should be initiated with a dose of 10 mg/day. After 1 week, the dose should be increased to 20 mg/day. The most frequently administered dose in the 2 flexible-dose clinical trials was 20 mg/day.

A dose increase may be considered after several weeks if no clinical improvement is observed. Fluoxetine doses above 60 mg/day have not been systematically evaluated in patients with panic disorder.

As with the use of fluoxetine hydrochloride in other indications, a lower or less frequent dosage should be used in patients with hepatic impairment. A lower or less frequent dosage should also be considered for the elderly (see Geriatric Use under PRECAUTIONS), and for patients with concurrent disease or on multiple concomitant medications. Dosage adjustments for renal impairment are not routinely necessary (see Liver disease and Renal disease under CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, and Use in Patients with Concomitant Illness under PRECAUTIONS).

Maintenance/Continuation Treatment

While there are no systematic studies that answer the question of how long to continue Fluoxetine, panic disorder is a chronic condition and it is reasonable to consider continuation for a responding patient. Nevertheless, patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for continued treatment.

Special Populations

Treatment of Pregnant Women During the Third Trimester

Neonates exposed to fluoxetine and other SSRIs or SNRIs, late in the third trimester have developed complications requiring prolonged hospitalization, respiratory support, and tube feeding (see PRECAUTIONS). When treating pregnant women with fluoxetine during the third trimester, the physician should carefully consider the potential risks and benefits of treatment. The physician may consider tapering fluoxetine in the third trimester.

Discontinuation of Treatment with Fluoxetine

Symptoms associated with discontinuation of fluoxetine and other SSRIs and SNRIs, have been reported (see PRECAUTIONS). Patients should be monitored for these symptoms when discontinuing treatment. A gradual reduction in the dose rather than abrupt cessation is recommended whenever possible. If intolerable symptoms occur following a decrease in the dose or upon discontinuation of treatment, then resuming the previously prescribed dose may be considered. Subsequently, the physician may continue decreasing the dose but at a more gradual rate. Plasma fluoxetine and norfluoxetine concentration decrease gradually at the conclusion of therapy which may minimize the risk of discontinuation symptoms with this drug.
Glyburide And Metformin...

Glyburide And Metformin Hydrochloride

DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION

General Considerations

Dosage of Glyburide and Metformin Hydrochloride Tablets must be individualized on the basis of both effectiveness and tolerance while not exceeding the maximum recommended daily dose of 20 mg glyburide/2000 mg metformin. Glyburide and Metformin Hydrochloride Tablets should be given with meals and should be initiated at a low dose, with gradual dose escalation as described below, in order to avoid hypoglycemia (largely due to glyburide), to reduce GI side effects (largely due to metformin), and to permit determination of the minimum effective dose for adequate control of blood glucose for the individual patient.

With initial treatment and during dose titration, appropriate blood glucose monitoring should be used to determine the therapeutic response to Glyburide and Metformin Hydrochloride Tablets and to identify the minimum effective dose for the patient. Thereafter, HbA1c should be measured at intervals of approximately 3 months to assess the effectiveness of therapy. The therapeutic goal in all patients with type 2 diabetes is to decrease FPG, PPG, and HbA1c to normal or as near normal as possible. Ideally, the response to therapy should be evaluated using HbA1c (glycosylated hemoglobin), which is a better indicator of long-term glycemic control than FPG alone.

No studies have been performed specifically examining the safety and efficacy of switching to Glyburide and Metformin Hydrochloride Tablets therapy in patients taking concomitant glyburide (or other sulfonylurea) plus metformin. Changes in glycemic control may occur in such patients, with either hyperglycemia or hypoglycemia possible. Any change in therapy of type 2 diabetes should be undertaken with care and appropriate monitoring.

Glyburide and Metformin Hydrochloride Tablets in Patients with Inadequate Glycemic Control on Diet and Exercise

Recommended starting dose: 1.25 mg/250 mg once or twice daily with meals.

For patients with type 2 diabetes whose hyperglycemia cannot be satisfactorily managed with diet and exercise alone, the recommended starting dose of Glyburide and Metformin Hydrochloride Tablets is 1.25 mg/250 mg once a day with a meal. As initial therapy in patients with baseline HbA1c >9% or an FPG >200 mg/dL, a starting dose of Glyburide and Metformin Hydrochloride Tablets 1.25 mg/250 mg twice daily with the morning and evening meals may be used. Dosage increases should be made in increments of 1.25 mg/250 mg per day every two weeks up to the minimum effective dose necessary to achieve adequate control of blood glucose. In clinical trials of Glyburide and Metformin Hydrochloride Tablets as initial therapy, there was no experience with total daily doses greater than 10 mg/2000 mg per day. Glyburide and Metformin Hydrochloride Tablets 5 mg/500 mg should not be used as initial therapy due to an increased risk of hypoglycemia.

Glyburide and Metformin Hydrochloride Tablets Use in Patients with Inadequate Glycemic Control on a Sulfonylurea and/or Metformin

Recommended starting dose: 2.5 mg/500 mg or 5 mg/500 mg twice daily with meals.

For patients not adequately controlled on either glyburide (or another sulfonylurea) or metformin alone, the recommended starting dose of Glyburide and Metformin Hydrochloride Tablets is 2.5 mg/500 mg or 5 mg/500 mg twice daily with the morning and evening meals. In order to avoid hypoglycemia, the starting dose of Glyburide and Metformin Hydrochloride Tablets should not exceed the daily doses of glyburide or metformin already being taken. The daily dose should be titrated in increments of no more than 5 mg/500 mg up to the minimum effective dose to achieve adequate control of blood glucose or to a maximum dose of 20 mg/2000 mg per day.

For patients previously treated with combination therapy of glyburide (or another sulfonylurea) plus metformin, if switched to Glyburide and Metformin Hydrochloride Tablets, the starting dose should not exceed the daily dose of glyburide (or equivalent dose of another sulfonylurea) and metformin already being taken. Patients should be monitored closely for signs and symptoms of hypoglycemia following such a switch and the dose of Glyburide and Metformin Hydrochloride Tablets should be titrated as described above to achieve adequate control of blood glucose.

Addition of Thiazolidinediones to Glyburide and Metformin Hydrochloride Tablets Therapy

For patients not adequately controlled on Glyburide and Metformin Hydrochloride Tablets, a thiazolidinedione can be added to Glyburide and Metformin Hydrochloride Tablets therapy. When a thiazolidinedione is added to Glyburide and Metformin Hydrochloride Tablets therapy, the current dose of Glyburide and Metformin Hydrochloride Tablets can be continued and the thiazolidinedione initiated at its recommended starting dose. For patients needing additional glycemic control, the dose of the thiazolidinedione can be increased based on its recommended titration schedule. The increased glycemic control attainable with Glyburide and Metformin Hydrochloride Tablets plus a thiazolidinedione may increase the potential for hypoglycemia at any time of day. In patients who develop hypoglycemia when receiving Glyburide and Metformin Hydrochloride Tablets and a thiazolidinedione, consideration should be given to reducing the dose of the glyburide component of Glyburide and Metformin Hydrochloride Tablets. As clinically warranted, adjustment of the dosages of the other components of the antidiabetic regimen should also be considered.

Specific Patient Populations
Glyburide and Metformin Hydrochloride Tablets is not recommended for use during pregnancy. The initial and maintenance dosing of Glyburide and Metformin Hydrochloride Tablets should be conservative in patients with advanced age, due to the potential for decreased renal function in this population. Any dosage adjustment requires a careful assessment of renal function. Generally, elderly, debilitated, and malnourished patients should not be titrated to the maximum dose of Glyburide and Metformin Hydrochloride Tablets to avoid the risk of hypoglycemia. Monitoring of renal function is necessary to aid in prevention of metformin-associated lactic acidosis, particularly in the elderly. (See WARNINGS.)
Ranitidine Syrup

Ranitidine Syrup

Active Duodenal Ulcer

The current recommended adult oral dosage of ranitidine oral solution USP for duodenal ulcer is 150 mg or 10 mL of oral solution (2 teaspoonfuls of oral solution equivalent to 150 mg of ranitidine) twice daily. An alternative dosage of 300 mg or 20 mL of oral solution (4 teaspoonfuls of oral solution equivalent to 300 mg of ranitidine) once daily after the evening meal or at bedtime can be used for patients in whom dosing convenience is important. The advantages of one treatment regimen compared to the other in a particular patient population have yet to be demonstrated (see Clinical Trials: Active Duodenal Ulcer). Smaller doses have been shown to be equally effective in inhibiting gastric acid secretion in US studies, and several foreign trials have shown that 100 mg twice daily is as effective as the 150-mg dose.

Antacid should be given as needed for relief of pain (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Pharmacokinetics).

Maintenance of Healing of Duodenal Ulcers

The current recommended adult oral dosage is 150 mg or 10 mL of oral solution (2 teaspoonfuls of oral solution equivalent to 150 mg of ranitidine) at bedtime.

Pathological Hypersecretory Conditions (such as Zollinger-Ellison syndrome)

The current recommended adult oral dosage is 150 mg or 10 mL of oral solution (2 teaspoonfuls of oral solution equivalent to 150 mg of ranitidine) twice a day. In some patients it may be necessary to administer ranitidine 150-mg doses more frequently. Dosages should be adjusted to individual patient needs, and should continue as long as clinically indicated. Dosages up to 6 g/day have been employed in patients with severe disease.

Benign Gastric Ulcer

The current recommended adult oral dosage is 150 mg or 10 mL of oral solution (2 teaspoonfuls of oral solution equivalent to 150 mg of ranitidine) twice daily.

Maintenance of Healing of Gastric Ulcers

The current recommended adult oral dosage is 150 mg or 10 mL of oral solution (2 teaspoonfuls of oral solution equivalent to 150 mg of ranitidine) at bedtime.

GERD

The current recommended adult oral dosage is 150 mg or 10 mL of oral solution (2 teaspoonfuls of oral solution equivalent to 150 mg of ranitidine) twice daily.

Erosive Esophagitis

The current recommended adult oral dosage is 150 mg or 10 mL of oral solution (2 teaspoonfuls of oral solution equivalent to 150 mg of ranitidine) 4 times daily.

Maintenance of Healing of Erosive Esophagitis

The current recommended adult oral dosage is 150 mg or 10 mL of oral solution (2 teaspoonfuls of oral solution equivalent to 150 mg of ranitidine) twice daily.

Pediatric Use

The safety and effectiveness of ranitidine oral solution USP have been established in the age-group of 1 month to 16 years. There is insufficient information about the pharmacokinetics of ranitidine oral solution USP in neonatal patients (less than 1 month of age) to make dosing recommendations.

The following 3 subsections provide dosing information for each of the pediatric indications.

Treatment of Duodenal and Gastric Ulcers

The recommended oral dose for the treatment of active duodenal and gastric ulcers is 2 to 4 mg/kg twice daily to a maximum of 300 mg/day. This recommendation is derived from adult clinical studies and pharmacokinetic data in pediatric patients.

Maintenance of Healing of Duodenal and Gastric Ulcers

The recommended oral dose for the maintenance of healing of duodenal and gastric ulcers is 2 to 4 mg/kg once daily to a maximum of 150 mg/day. This recommendation is derived from adult clinical studies and pharmacokinetic data in pediatric patients.

Treatment of GERD and Erosive Esophagitis

Although limited data exist for these conditions in pediatric patients, published literature supports a dosage of 5 to 10 mg/kg/day, usually given as 2 divided doses.

Dosage Adjustment for Patients With Impaired Renal Function

On the basis of experience with a group of subjects with severely impaired renal function treated with ranitidine oral solution USP, the recommended dosage in patients with a creatinine clearance <50 mL/min is 150 mg or 10 mL of oral solution (2 teaspoonfuls of oral solution equivalent to 150 mg of ranitidine) every 24 hours. Should the patient's condition require, the frequency of dosing may be increased to every 12 hours or even further with caution. Hemodialysis reduces the level of circulating ranitidine. Ideally, the dosing schedule should be adjusted so that the timing of a scheduled dose coincides with the end of hemodialysis.

Elderly patients are more likely to have decreased renal function, therefore caution should be exercised in dose selection, and it may be useful to monitor renal function (see CLINICALPHARMACOLOGY: Pharmacokinetics: Geriatrics and PRECAUTIONS: Geriatric Use).
Naproxen

Naproxen

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of Naproxen Tablets, USP and other treatment options before deciding to use Naproxen Tablets, USP. Use the lowest effectivedose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals (see WARNINGS).

After observing the response to initial therapy with Naproxen Tablets, USP, the dose and frequency should be adjusted to suit an individual patient’s needs.

Different dose strengths and formulations (i.e., tablets, suspension) of the drug are not necessarily bioequivalent. This difference should be taken into consideration whenchanging formulation.

Although naproxen tablets, naproxen suspension, naproxen delayed-release tablets, and naproxen sodium tablets all circulate in the plasma as naproxen, they havepharmacokinetic differences that may affect onset of action. Onset of pain relief can begin within 1 hour in patients taking naproxen.

The recommended strategy for initiating therapy is to choose a formulation and a starting dose likely to be effective for the patient and then adjust the dosage based onobservation of benefit and/or adverse events. A lower dose should be considered in patients with renal or hepatic impairment or in elderly patients (see WARNINGS andPRECAUTIONS).

Geriatric Patients

Studies indicate that although total plasma concentration of naproxen is unchanged, the unbound plasma fraction of naproxen is increased in the elderly. Caution is advised whenhigh doses are required and some adjustment of dosage may be required in elderly patients. As with other drugs used in the elderly, it is prudent to use the lowest effective dose.

Patients With Moderate to Severe Renal Impairment

Naproxen-containing products are not recommended for use in patients with moderate to severe and severe renal impairment (creatinine clearance <30 mL/min) (seeWARNINGS: Renal Effects).

Rheumatoid Arthritis, Osteoarthritis and Ankylosing Spondylitis
Naproxen Tablets, USP 250 mg or 375 mg or 500 mg twice daily twice daily twice daily
During long-term administration, the dose of naproxen may be adjusted up or down depending on the clinical response of the patient. A lower daily dose may suffice for longtermadministration. The morning and evening doses do not have to be equal in size and the administration of the drug more frequently than twice daily is not necessary.In patients who tolerate lower doses well, the dose may be increased to naproxen 1500 mg/day for limited periods of up to 6 months when a higher level of antiinflammatory/analgesic activity is required. When treating such patients with naproxen 1500 mg/day, the physician should observe sufficient increased clinical benefits to offsetthe potential increased risk. The morning and evening doses do not have to be equal in size and administration of the drug more frequently than twice daily does not generallymake a difference in response (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY).

Acute Gout

The recommended starting dose is 750 mg of naproxen tablets, USP followed by 250 mg every 8 hours until the attack has subsided.
Nizatidine

Nizatidine

Active Duodenal Ulcer

The recommended oral dosage for adults is 300 mg once daily at bedtime. An alternative dosage regimen is 150 mg twice daily.

Maintenance of Healed Duodenal Ulcer

The recommended oral dosage for adults is 150 mg once daily at bedtime.

Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease

The recommended oral dosage in adults for the treatment of erosions, ulcerations, and associated heartburn is 150 mg twice daily.

Active Benign Gastric Ulcer

The recommended oral dosage is 300 mg given either as 150 mg twice daily or 300 mg once daily at bedtime. Prior to treatment, care should be taken to exclude the possibility of malignant gastric ulceration.

Dosage Adjustment for Patients With Moderate to Severe Renal Insufficiency

The dose for patients with renal dysfunction should be reduced as follows:
Active Duodenal Ulcer, GERD, and Benign Gastric Ulcer Ccr Dose 20-50 mL/min 150 mg daily <20 mL/min 150 mg every other day Maintenance Therapy Ccr Dose 20-50 mL/min 150 mg every other day <20 mL/min 150 mg every 3 days
Some elderly patients may have creatinine clearances of less than 50 mL/min, and, based on pharmacokinetic data in patients with renal impairment, the dose for such patients should be reduced accordingly. The clinical effects of this dosage reduction in patients with renal failure have not been evaluated.
Meprobamate

Meprobamate

Meprobamate Tablets USP: The usual adult daily dosage is 1200 mgto 1600 mg, in three or four divided doses; adaily dosage above 2400mg is not recommended. The usual daily dosage for children ages sixto twelve years is 200 mg to 600 mg, in two or three divided doses.

Not recommended for children under age 6 (see Usage in Children).
Glycopyrrolate

Glycopyrrolate

The dosage of Glycopyrrolate tablets 1 and 2 mg should be adjusted to the needs of the individual patient to assure symptomatic control with a minimum of adverse reactions. The presently recommended maximum daily dosage of Glycopyrrolate is 8 mg.

Glycopyrrolate, 1 mg Tablets. The recommended initial dosage of Glycopyrrolate for adults is one tablet three times daily (in the morning, early afternoon, and at bedtime). Some patients may require two tablets at bedtime to assure overnight control of symptoms. For maintenance, a dosage of one tablet twice a day is frequently adequate.

Glycopyrrolate, 2 mg Tablets. The recommended dosage of Glycopyrrolate for adults is one tablet two or three times daily at equally spaced intervals.

Glycopyrrolate tablets are not recommended for use in pediatric patients under the age of 12 years.
Quinapril

Quinapril

Hypertension

Monotherapy

The recommended initial dosage of quinapril hydrochloride in patients not ondiuretics is 10 or 20 mg once daily. Dosage should be adjusted according to blood pressureresponse measured at peak (2 to 6 hours after dosing) and trough (predosing). Generally, dosageadjustments should be made at intervals of at least 2 weeks. Most patients have required dosagesof 20, 40, or 80 mg/day, given as a single dose or in two equally divided doses. In some patientstreated once daily, the antihypertensive effect may diminish toward the end of the dosing interval. Insuch patients an increase in dosage or twice daily administration may be warranted. In general,doses of 40 to 80 mg and divided doses give a somewhat greater effect at the end of the dosinginterval.

Concomitant Diuretics

If blood pressure is not adequately controlled with quinapril hydrochloridemonotherapy, a diuretic may be added. In patients who are currently being treated with a diuretic,symptomatic hypotension occasionally can occur following the initial dose of quinapril hydrochloride.To reduce the likelihood of hypotension, the diuretic should, if possible, be discontinued 2 to 3 daysprior to beginning therapy with quinapril hydrochloride (see WARNINGS). Then, if blood pressure isnot controlled with quinapril hydrochloride alone, diuretic therapy should be resumed.

If the diuretic cannot be discontinued, an initial dose of 5 mg quinapril hydrochloride should be usedwith careful medical supervision for several hours and until blood pressure has stabilized.

The dosage should subsequently be titrated (as described above) to the optimal response (seeWARNINGS, PRECAUTIONS, and Drug Interactions).

Renal Impairment

Kinetic data indicate that the apparent elimination half-life of quinaprilatincreases as creatinine clearance decreases. Recommended starting doses, based on clinical andpharmacokinetic data from patients with renal impairment, are as follows:

Patients should subsequently have their dosage titrated (as described above) to the optimalresponse.

Elderly (≥65 years)

The recommended initial dosage of quinapril hydrochloride in elderly patientsis 10 mg given once daily followed by titration (as described above) to the optimal response.

Following the initial dose of quinapril hydrochloride, the patient should be observed under medicalsupervision for at least two hours for the presence of hypotension or orthostatis and, if present, untilblood pressure stabilizes. The appearance of hypotension, orthostatis, or azotemia early in dosetitration should not preclude further careful dose titration. Consideration should be given to reducingthe dose of concomitant diuretics.

DOSE ADJUSTMENTS IN PATIENTS WITH HEART FAILURE AND RENAL IMPAIRMENT OR HYPONATREMIA

Pharmacokinetic data indicate that quinapril elimination is dependent on level of renal function. Inpatients with heart failure and renal impairment, the recommended initial dose of quinaprilhydrochloride is 5 mg in patients with a creatinine clearance above 30 mLlmin and 2.5 mg in patientswith a creatinine clearance of 10 to 30 mL/min. There is insufficient data for dosage recommendationin patients with a creatinine clearance less than 10 mLlmin (see DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION,Heart Failure,WARNINGS, and PRECAUTIONS, Drug Interactions).

If the initial dose is well tolerated, quinapril hydrochloride may be administered the following day asa twice daily regimen. In the absence of excessive hypotension or significant deterioration of renalfunction, the dose may be increased at weekly intervals based on clinical and hemodynamicresponse.
Cetirizine Hydrochlorid...

Cetirizine Hydrochloride Syrup

Cetirizine hydrochloride syrup can be taken without regard to food consumption.

Children 2 to 5 Years for Chronic Urticaria

The recommended initial dose of cetirizine hydrochloride syrup in children aged 2 to 5 years is 2.5 mg (½ teaspoonful) syrup once daily. The dosage in this age group can be increased to a maximum dose of 5 mg per day given as 1 teaspoonful syrup once a day, or one ½ teaspoonful syrup given every 12 hours.

Children 6 months to < 2 years for Perennial Allergic Rhinitis and Chronic Urticaria

The recommended dose of cetirizine hydrochloride syrup in children 6 months to 23 months of age is 2.5 mg (½ teaspoonful) once daily. The dose in children 12 to 23 months of age can be increased to a maximum dose of 5 mg per day, given as ½ teaspoonful (2.5 mg) every 12 hours.
Minocycline Hydrochlori...

Minocycline Hydrochloride

THE USUAL DOSAGE AND FREQUENCY OF ADMINISTRATION OF MINOCYCLINE DIFFERS FROM THAT OF THE OTHER TETRACYCLINES. EXCEEDING THE RECOMMENDED DOSAGE MAY RESULT IN AN INCREASED INCIDENCE OF SIDE EFFECTS.

Minocycline hydrochloride tablets may be taken with ot without food (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY).

Ingestion of adequate amounts of fluids along with capsule and tablet forms of drugs in the tetracycline-class is recommended to reduce the risk of esophageal irritation and ulceration. The tablets should be swallowed whole.

For Pediatric Patients Above 8 Years of Age

Usual pediatric dose: 4 mg/kg initially followed by 2 mg/kg every 12 hours, not to exceed the usual adult dose.

Adults

The usual dosage of minocycline hydrochloride tablets is 200 mg initially followed by 100 mg every 12 hours. Alternatively, if more frequent doses are preferred, two or four 50 mg tablets may be given initially followed by one 50 mg tablet four times daily.

Uncomplicated gonococcal infections other than urethritis and anorectal infections in men: 200 mg initially, followed by 100 mg every 12 hours for a minimum of four days, with post-therapy cultures within 2 to 3 days.

In the treatment of uncomplicated gonococcal urethritis in men, 100 mg every 12 hours for 5 days is recommended.

For the treatment of syphilis, the usual dosage of minocycline hydrochloride should be administered over a period of 10 to 15 days. Close follow-up, including laboratory tests, is recommended.

In the treatment of meningococcal carrier state, the recommended dosage is 100 mg every 12 hours for five days.

Mycobacterium marinum infections: Although optimal doses have not been established, 100 mg every 12 hours for 6 to 8 weeks have been used successfully in a limited number of cases.

Uncomplicated urethral, endocervical, or rectal infection in adults caused by Chlamydia trachomatis or Ureaplasma urealyticum: 100 mg orally, every 12 hours for at least seven days.

Ingestion of adequate amounts of fluids along with capsule and tablet forms of drugs in the tetracycline-class is recommended to reduce the risk of esophageal irritation and ulceration.

The pharmacokinetics of minocycline in patients with renal impairment (CLCR <80mL/min) have not been fully characterized. Current data are insufficient to determine if a dosage adjustment is warranted. The total daily dosage should not exceed 200 mg in 24 hours. However, due to the anti-anabolic effect of tetracyclines, BUN and creatinine should be monitored (see WARNINGS).
Zonisamide

Zonisamide

Zonisamide capsules are recommended as adjunctive therapy for the treatment of partial seizures in adults. Safety and efficacy in pediatric patients below the age of 16 have not been established. Zonisamide capsules should be administered once or twice daily, using 25 mg, 50 mg or 100 mg capsules. Zonisamide capsules are given orally and can be taken with or without food. Capsules should be swallowed whole.

Adults over Age 16

The prescriber should be aware that, because of the long half-life of zonisamide, up to two weeks may be required to achieve steady state levels upon reaching a stable dose or following dosage adjustment. Although the regimen described below is one that has been shown to be tolerated, the prescriber may wish to prolong the duration of treatment at the lower doses in order to fully assess the effects of zonisamide at steady state, noting that many of the side effects of zonisamide are more frequent at doses of 300 mg per day and above. Although there is some evidence of greater response at doses above 100–200 mg/day, the increase appears small and formal dose-response studies have not been conducted.

The initial dose of zonisamide should be 100 mg daily. After two weeks, the dose may be increased to 200 mg/day for at least two weeks. It can be increased to 300 mg/day and 400 mg/day, with the dose stable for at least two weeks to achieve steady state at each level. Evidence from controlled trials suggests that zonisamide doses of 100–600 mg/day are effective, but there is no suggestion of increasing response above 400 mg/day (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Clinical Studies subsection). There is little experience with doses greater than 600 mg/day.

Patients with Renal or Hepatic Disease

Because zonisamide is metabolized in the liver and excreted by the kidneys, patients with renal or hepatic disease should be treated with caution, and might require slower titration and more frequent monitoring (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY and PRECAUTIONS).
Ibuprofen And Diphenhyd...

Ibuprofen And Diphenhydramine Citrate

There is currently no dosage information available for this product. We apologize for any inconvenience.
Ofloxacin

Ofloxacin

The usual dose of ofloxacin tablets is 200 mg to 400 mg orally every 12 h as described in the following dosing chart. These recommendations apply to patients with normal renal function (i.e., creatinine clearance > 50 mL/min). For patients with altered renal function (i.e., creatinine clearance ≤ 50 mL/min), see the Patients with Impaired Renal Functionsubsection.
Infection* Unit Dose Frequency Duration Daily Dose * DUE TO THE DESIGNATED PATHOGENS (See INDICATIONS AND USAGE.) Acute Bacterial Exacerbation of Chronic Bronchitis 400 mg q12h 10 days 800 mg Comm. Acquired Pneumonia 400 mg q12h 10 days 800 mg Uncomplicated Skin and Skin Structure Infections 400 mg q12h 10 days 800 mg Acute, Uncomplicated Urethral and Cervical Gonorrhea 400 mg single dose 1 day 400 mg Nongonococcal Cervicitis/Urethritis due to C. trachomatis 300 mg q12h 7 days 600 mg Mixed Infection of the urethra and cervix due to C. trachomatis and N. gonorrhoeae 300 mg q12h 7 days 600 mg Acute Pelvic Inflammatory Disease 400 mg q12ho 10–14 days 800 mg Uncomplicated Cystitis due to E. coli or K. pneumoniae 200 mg q12h 3 days 400 mg Uncomplicated Cystitis due to other approved pathogens 200 mg q12h 7 days 400 mg Complicated UTI's 200 mg q12h 10 days 400 mg Prostatitis due to E.Coli 300 mg q12h 6 weeks 600 mg
Antacids containing calcium, magnesium, or aluminum; sucralfate; divalent or trivalent cations such as iron; or multivitamins containing zinc; or Videx® (didanosine) should not be taken within the two-hour period before or within the two-hour period after taking ofloxacin. (See PRECAUTIONS.)

Patients with Impaired Renal Function

Dosage should be adjusted for patients with a creatinine clearance ≤ 50 mL/min. After a normal initial dose, dosage should be adjusted as follows:
Creatinine Clearance Maintenance Dose Frequency 20–50 mL/min the usual recommended unit dose q24h <20 mL/min 1/2 the usual recommended unit dose q24h
When only the serum creatinine is known, the following formula may be used to estimate creatinine clearance.

Men: Creatinine clearance (mL/min) = Weight (kg) × (140-age)

72× serum creatinine (mg/dL)

Women: 0.85× the value calculated for men.

The serum creatinine should represent a steady-state of renal function.

Patients with Cirrhosis

The excretion of ofloxacin may be reduced in patients with severe liver function disorders (e.g., cirrhosis with or without ascites). A maximum dose of 400 mg of ofloxacin per day should therefore not be exceeded.
Enalapril Maleate And H...

Enalapril Maleate And Hydrochlorothiazide

Enalapril and hydrochlorothiazide are effective treatments for hypertension. The usual dosage range of enalapril is 10 to 40 mg per day administered in a single or two divided doses; hydrochlorothiazide is effective in doses of 12.5 to 50 mg daily. The side effects (see WARNINGS) of enalapril are generally rare and apparently independent of dose; those of hydrochlorothiazide are a mixture of dose-dependent phenomena (primarily hypokalemia) and dose-independent phenomena (e.g., pancreatitis), the former much more common than the latter. Therapy with any combination of enalapril and hydrochlorothiazide will be associated with both sets of dose-independent side effects but the addition of enalapril in clinical trials blunted the hypokalemia normally seen with diuretics.

To minimize dose-independent side effects, it is usually appropriate to begin combination therapy only after a patient has failed to achieve the desired effect with monotherapy.

Dose Titration Guided by Clinical Effect

A patient whose blood pressure is not adequately controlled with either enalapril or hydrochlorothiazide monotherapy may be given enalapril maleate and hydrochlorothiazide tablets 5 mg/12.5 mg or enalapril maleate and hydrochlorothiazide tablets 10 mg/25 mg. Further increases of enalapril, hydrochlorothiazide or both depend on clinical response. The hydrochlorothiazide dose should generally not be increased until 2-3 weeks have elapsed. In general, patients do not require doses in excess of 20 mg of enalapril or 50 mg of hydrochlorothiazide. The daily dosage should not exceed four tablets of enalapril maleate and hydrochlorothiazide tablets 5 mg/12.5 mg or two tablets of enalapril maleate and hydrochlorothiazide tablets 10 mg/25 mg.

Replacement Therapy

The combination may be substituted for the titrated components.

Use in Renal Impairment

The usual regimens of therapy with enalapril maleate and hydrochlorothiazide tablets need not be adjusted as long as the patient's creatinine clearance is >30 mL/min/1.73m2 (serum creatinine approximately ≤3 mg/dL or 265 µmol/L). In patients with more severe renal impairment, loop diuretics are preferred to thiazides, so enalapril maleate– hydrochlorothiazide is not recommended (see WARNINGS, Anaphylactoid reactions during membrane exposure).
Oxaprozin

Oxaprozin

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of oxaprozin and other treatment options before deciding to use oxaprozin. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals (see WARNINGS).

After observing the response to initial therapy with oxaprozin, the dose and frequency should be adjusted to suit an individual patient’s needs.

Rheumatoid Arthritis

For relief of the signs and symptoms of rheumatoid arthritis, the usual recommended dose is 1200 mg (two 600-mg tablets) given orally once a day (see Individualization of Dosage).

Osteoarthritis

For relief of the signs and symptoms of osteoarthritis, the usual recommended dose is 1200 mg (two 600-mg tablets) given orally once a day (see Individualization of Dosage).

Juvenile Rheumatoid Arthritis

For the relief of the signs and symptoms of JRA in patients 6-16 years of age, the recommended dose given orally once per day should be based on body weight of the patient as given in Table 3 (see also Individualization of Dosage).

Table 3
Body Weight Range (kg) Dose (mg) 22–31 600 32–54 900 ≥55 1200
(see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Special Populations, Pediatric Patients)

Individualization of Dosage

As with other NSAIDs, the lowest dose should be sought for each patient. Therefore, after observing the response to initial therapy with oxaprozin, the dose and frequency should be adjusted to suit an individual patient’s needs. In osteoarthritis and rheumatoid arthritis and juvenile rheumatoid arthritis, the dosage should be individualized to the lowest effective dose of oxaprozin to minimize adverse effects. The maximum recommended total daily dose of oxaprozin tablets in adults is 1800 mg (26 mg/kg, whichever is lower) in divided doses. In children, doses greater than 1200 mg have not been studied.

Patients of low body weight should initiate therapy with 600 mg once daily. Patients with severe renal impairment or on dialysis should also initiate therapy with 600 mg once daily. If there is insufficient relief of symptoms in such patients, the dose may be cautiously increased to 1200 mg, but only with close monitoring (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Special Populations).

In adults, in cases where a quick onset of action is important, the pharmacokinetics of oxaprozin allow therapy to be started with a one-time loading dose of 1200 to 1800 mg (not to exceed 26 mg/kg). Doses larger than 1200 mg/day on a chronic basis should be reserved for patients who weigh more than 50 kg, have normal renal and hepatic function, are at low risk of peptic ulcer, and whose severity of disease justifies maximal therapy. Physicians should ensure that patients are tolerating doses in the 600 to 1200 mg/day range without gastroenterologic, renal, hepatic, or dermatologic adverse effects before advancing to the larger doses. Most patients will tolerate once-a-day dosing with oxaprozin, although divided doses may be tried in patients unable to tolerate single doses.
Aloe Sunscreen

Aloe Sunscreen

Omeprazole delayed-release capsules should be taken before eating. In the clinical trials, antacids were used concomitantly with omeprazole.

Patients should be informed that the omeprazole delayed-release capsule should be swallowed whole.

For patients unable to swallow an intact capsule, alternative administration options are available [See Dosage and Administration(2.8)].

2.1 Short-Term Treatment of Active Duodenal Ulcer

The recommended adult oral dose of omeprazole delayed-release capsules is 20 mg once daily. Most patients heal within four weeks. Some patients may require an additional four weeks of therapy.

2.2 H. pylori Eradication for the Reduction of the Risk of Duodenal Ulcer Recurrence

Triple Therapy (omeprazole/clarithromycin/amoxicillin) — The recommended adult oral regimen is omeprazole delayed-release capsules 20 mg plus clarithromycin 500 mg plus amoxicillin 1000 mg each given twice daily for 10 days. In patients with an ulcer present at the time of initiation of therapy, an additional 18 days of omeprazole delayed-release capsules 20 mg once daily is recommended for ulcer healing and symptom relief.

Dual Therapy (omeprazole/clarithromycin) — The recommended adult oral regimen is omeprazole delayed-release capsuels 40 mg once daily plus clarithromycin 500 mg three times daily for 14 days. In patients with an ulcer present at the time of initiation of therapy, an additional 14 days of omeprazole delayed-release capsules 20 mg once daily is recommended for ulcer healing and symptom relief.

2.3 Gastric Ulcer

The recommended adult oral dose is 40 mg once daily for 4 to 8 weeks.

2.4 Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease (GERD)

The recommended adult oral dose for the treatment of patients with symptomatic GERD and no esophageal lesions is 20 mg daily for up to 4 weeks. The recommended adult oral dose for the treatment of patients with erosive esophagitis and accompanying symptoms due to GERD is 20 mg daily for 4 to 8 weeks.

2.5 Maintenance of Healing of Erosive Esophagitis

The recommended adult oral dose is 20 mg daily. Controlled studies do not extend beyond 12 months [See Clinical Studies(14.4)].

2.6 Pathological Hypersecretory Conditions

The dosage of omeprazole delayed-release capsules in patients with pathological hypersecretory conditions varies with the individual patient. The recommended adult oral starting dose is 60 mg once daily. Doses should be adjusted to individual patient needs and should continue for as long as clinically indicated. Doses up to 120 mg three times daily have been administered. Daily dosages of greater than 80 mg should be administered in divided doses. Some patients with Zollinger-Ellison syndrome have been treated continuously with omeprazole delayed-release capsules for more than 5 years.

2.7 Pediatric Patients

For the treatment of GERD and maintenance of healing of erosive esophagitis, the recommended daily dose for pediatric patients 2 to 16 years of age is as follows:
Patient Weight Omeprazole Daily Dose 10 < 20 kg 10 mg ≥ 20 kg 20 mg
On a per kg basis, the doses of omeprazole required to heal erosive esophagitis in pediatric patients are greater than those for adults.

Alternative administrative options can be used for pediatric patients unable to swallow an intact capsule [See Dosage and Administration (2.8)].

2.8 Alternative Administration Options

Omeprazole is available as a delayed-release capsule.

For patients who have difficulty swallowing capsules, the contents of an omeprazole delayed-release capsule can be added to applesauce. One tablespoon of applesauce should be added to an empty bowl and the capsule should be opened. All of the pellets inside the capsule should be carefully emptied on the applesauce. The pellets should be mixed with the applesauce and then swallowed immediately with a glass of cool water to ensure complete swallowing of the pellets. The applesauce used should not be hot and should be soft enough to be swallowed without chewing. The pellets should not be chewed or crushed. The pellets/applesauce mixture should not be stored for future use.
Famotidine

Famotidine

Duodenal Ulcer

Acute Therapy:The recommended adult oral dosage for active duodenal ulcer is 40 mg once a day at bedtime. Most patients heal within 4 weeks; there is rarely reason to use famotidine at full dosage for longer than 6 to 8 weeks. A regimen of 20 mg b.i.d. is also effective.Maintenance Therapy: The recommended adult oral dose is 20 mg once a day at bedtime.

Benign Gastric Ulcer

Acute Therapy:The recommended adult oral dosage for active benign gastric ulcer is 40 mg once a day at bedtime.

Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease (GERD)The recommended oral dosage for treatment of adult patients with symptoms of GERD is 20 mg b.i.d. for up to 6 weeks. The recommended oral dosage for the treatment of adult patients with esophagitis including erosions and ulcerations and accompanying symptoms due to GERD is 20 or 40 mg b.i.d. for up to 12 weeks (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY IN ADULTS, Clinical Studies).

Dosage for Pediatric Patients <1 year of ageGastroesophageal Reflux Disease (GERD)

See PRECAUTIONS, Pediatric Patients <1 year of age.

The studies described in PRECAUTIONS, PediatricPatients <1 year of age suggest the following startingdoses in pediatric patients <1 year of age:Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease (GERD) - 0.5mg/kg/dose of famotidine oral suspension for thetreatment of GERD for up to 8 weeks once daily inpatients <3 months of age and 0.5 mg/kg/dose twicedaily in patients 3 months to <1 year of age. Patientsshould also be receiving conservative measures (e.g.,thickened feedings). The use of intravenous famotidinein pediatric patients <1 year of age with GERD has notbeen adequately studied.

Dosage for Pediatric Patients 1-16 years of age

See PRECAUTIONS, Pediatric Patients 1-16 years of age.

The studies described in PRECAUTIONS, Pediatric Patients 1-16 years of age suggest the following starting doses in pediatric patients 1-16 years of age.

Peptic Ulcer - 0.5 mg/kg/day p.o. at bedtime or divided b.i.d. up to 40 mg/day.

Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease with or without Esophagitis Including Erosions and Ulcerations – 1 mg/kg/day p.o. divided b.i.d. up to 40 mg b.i.d.

While published uncontrolled studies suggest effectiveness of famotidine in the treatment of gastroesophageal reflux disease and peptic ulcer, data in pediatric patients are insufficient to establish percent response with dose and duration of therapy. Therefore, treatment duration (initially based on adult duration recommendations) and dose should be individualized based on clinical response and/or pH determination (gastric or esophageal) and endoscopy. Published uncontrolled clinical studies in pediatric patients 1-16 years of age have employed doses up to 1 mg/kg/day for peptic ulcer and 2 mg/kg/day for GERD with or without esophagitis including erosions and ulcerations.

Pathological Hypersecretory Conditions (e.g., Zollinger-Ellison Syndrome, Multiple Endocrine Adenomas)

The dosage of famotidine in patients with pathological hypersecretory conditions varies with the individual patient. The recommended adult oral starting dose for pathological hypersecretory conditions is 20 mg q 6 h. In some patients, a higher starting dose may be required. Doses should be adjusted to individual patient needs and should continue as long as clinically indicated. Doses up to 160 mg q 6 h have been administered to some adult patients with severe Zollinger-Ellison Syndrome.

Concomitant Use of Antacids

Antacids may be given concomitantly if needed.

Dosage Adjustment for Patients with Moderate or Severe Renal Insufficiency

In adult patients with moderate (creatinine clearance < 50 mL/min) or severe (creatinine clearance < 10 mL/min) renal insufficiency, the elimination half-life of famotidine is increased. For patients with severe renal insufficiency, it may exceed 20 hours, reaching approximately 24 hours in anuric patients. Since CNS adverse effects have been reported in patients with moderate and severe renal insufficiency, to avoid excess accumulation of the drug in patients with moderate or severe renal insufficiency, the dose of famotidine may be reduced to half the dose or the dosing interval may be prolonged to 36-48 hours as indicated by the patient’s clinical response.

Based on the comparison of pharmacokinetic parameters for famotidine in adults and pediatric patients, dosage adjustment in pediatric patients with moderate or severe renal insufficiency should be considered.
Zafirlukast

Zafirlukast

Because food can reduce the bioavailability of zafirlukast, zafirlukast tablets should be taken at least 1 hour before or 2 hours after meals.

Adults and Children 12 years of age and older

The recommended dose of zafirlukast tablets in adults and children 12 years and older is 20 mg twice daily.

Pediatric Patients 5 through 11 years of age

The recommended dose of zafirlukast tablets in children 5 through 11 years of age is 10 mg twice daily.

Elderly Patients: Based on cross-study comparisons, the clearance of zafirlukast is reduced in elderly patients (65 years of age and older), such that Cmax and AUC are approximately twice those of younger adults. In clinical trials, a dose of 20 mg twice daily was not associated with an increase in the overall incidence of adverse events or withdrawals because of adverse events in elderly patients.

Patients with Hepatic Impairment: The clearance of zafirlukast is reduced in patients with stable alcoholic cirrhosis such that the Cmax and AUC are approximately 50 - 60% greater than those of normal adults. Zafirlukast has not been evaluated in patients with hepatitis or in long-term studies of patients with cirrhosis.

Patients with Renal Impairment: Dosage adjustment is not required for patients with renal impairment.
Metformin Hydrochloride...

Metformin Hydrochloride

2.1 Dosing Information

The maximum single recommended adult dose of sumatriptan injection for the acute treatment of migraine or cluster headache is 6 mg injected subcutaneously. For the treatment of migraine, if side effects are dose limiting, lower doses (1 to 5 mg) may be used [see Clinical Studies (14.1)]. For the treatment of cluster headache, the efficacy of lower doses has not been established.

The maximum cumulative dose that may be given in 24 hours is 12 mg, two 6 mg injections separated by at least 1 hour. A second 6 mg dose should only be considered if some response to a first injection was observed.

2.2 Administration Using the Autoinjector

An autoinjector device is available for use with a 6 mg prefilled syringe to facilitate self-administration in patients using the 6 mg dose. With this device, the needle penetrates approximately 1/4 inch (5 to 6 mm). The injection is intended to be given subcutaneously, and intramuscular or intravascular delivery should be avoided. Instruct patients on the proper use of the sumatriptan autoinjector and direct them to use injection sites with an adequate skin and subcutaneous thickness to accommodate the length of the needle.

2.3 Administration of Doses of Sumatriptan Injection Other Than 6 mg

In patients receiving doses other than 6 mg, use the 6 mg single-dose vial; do not use the Sumatriptan Autoinjector Pen. Visually inspect the vial for particulate matter and discoloration before administration. Do not use if particulates and discolorations are noted.
Naproxen Sodium

Naproxen Sodium

do not take more than directed the smallest effective dose should be used drink a full glass of water with each dose Adults and children 12 years and older take 1 tablet/caplet every 8 to 12 hours while symptoms last for the first dose you may take 2 tablets/caplets within the first hour do not exceed 2 tablets/caplets in any 8- to 12-hour period do not exceed 3 tablets/caplets in a 24-hour period Children under 12 years ask a doctor
Valacyclovir Hydrochlor...

Valacyclovir Hydrochloride

Valacyclovir hydrochloride tablets may be given without regard to meals.

Labeling describing use of valacyclovir HCL in pediatric patients for whom a solid dosage form is not appropriate is approved for GlaxoSmithKline’s Valtrex® Caplets.However, due to GlaxoSmithKline’s marketing exclusivity rights, a description of that information is not approved for this valacyclovir HCL tablet product.

2.1 Adult Dosing Recommendations

Cold Sores (Herpes Labialis): The recommended dosage of valacyclovir hydrochloride for treatment of cold sores is 2 grams twice daily for 1 day taken 12 hours apart. Therapy should be initiated at the earliest symptom of a cold sore (e.g., tingling, itching, or burning).

Genital Herpes: Initial Episode: The recommended dosage of valacyclovir hydrochloride for treatment of initial genital herpes is 1 gram twice daily for 10 days. Therapy was most effective when administered within 48 hours of the onset of signs and symptoms.

Recurrent Episodes: The recommended dosage of valacyclovir hydrochloride for treatment of recurrent genital herpes is 500 mg twice daily for 3 days. Initiate treatment at the first sign or symptom of an episode.

Suppressive Therapy: The recommended dosage of valacyclovir hydrochloride for chronic suppressive therapy of recurrent genital herpes is 1 gram once daily in patients with normal immune function. In patients with a history of 9 or fewer recurrences per year, an alternative dose is 500 mg once daily.

In HIV-infected patients with a CD4+ cell count ≥100 cells/mm3, the recommended dosage of valacyclovir hydrochloride for chronic suppressive therapy of recurrent genital herpes is 500 mg twice daily.

Reduction of Transmission: The recommended dosage of valacyclovir hydrochloride for reduction of transmission of genital herpes in patients with a history of 9 or fewer recurrences per year is 500 mg once daily for the source partner.

Herpes Zoster: The recommended dosage of valacyclovir hydrochloride for treatment of herpes zoster is 1 gram 3 times daily for 7 days. Therapy should be initiated at the earliest sign or symptom of herpes zoster and is most effective when started within 48 hours of the onset of rash.

2.2 Pediatric Dosing Recommendations

Labeling describing additional dosing of valacyclovir HCL for pediatric patients with chickenpox is approved for GlaxoSmithKline’s Valtrex® Caplets. However, due to GlaxoSmithKline’s marketing exclusivity rights, a description of that additional dosing information is not approved for this valacyclovir HCL tablet product.

2.4 Patients With Renal Impairment

Dosage recommendations for adult patients with reduced renal function are provided in Table 1 [see Use in Specific Populations (8.5, 8.6), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. Data are not available for the use of valacyclovir hydrochloride in pediatric patients with a creatinine clearance < 50 mL/min/1.73 m2.

Table 1. Valacyclovir Hydrochloride Dosage Recommendations for Adults With Renal Impairment
Indications Normal Dosage Regimen (Creatinine Clearance50 mL/min) Creatinine Clearance (mL/min) 30-49 10-29 <10 Cold Sores (Herpes labialis) Do not exceed 1 day of treatment. Two 2 gram doses taken12 hours apart Two 1 gram doses taken 12 hours apart Two 500 mg doses taken 12 hours apart 500 mg single dose Genital herpes: Initial episode 1 gram every12 hours no reduction 1 gram every 24 hours 500 mg every 24 hours Genital herpes: Recurrent episode 500 mg every12 hours no reduction 500 mg every 24 hours 500 mg every 24 hours Genital herpes: Suppressive therapy Immunocompetent patients Alternate dose for immunocompetentpatients with≤9 recurrences/year HIV-infected patients 1 gram every24 hours 500 mg every24 hours 500 mg every12 hours no reduction no reduction no reduction 500 mg every 24 hours 500 mg every 48 hours 500 mg every24 hours 500 mg every24 hours 500 mg every48 hours 500 mg every24 hours Herpes zoster 1 gram every8 hours 1 gram every12 hours 1 gram every24 hours 500 mg every24 hours
Hemodialysis: Patients requiring hemodialysis should receive the recommended dose of valacyclovir hydrochloride after hemodialysis. During hemodialysis, the half-life of acyclovir after administration of valacyclovir hydrochloride is approximately 4 hours. About one third of acyclovir in the body is removed by dialysis during a 4-hour hemodialysis session.

Peritoneal Dialysis: There is no information specific to administration of valacyclovir hydrochloride in patients receiving peritoneal dialysis. The effect of chronic ambulatory peritoneal dialysis (CAPD) and continuous arteriovenous hemofiltration/dialysis (CAVHD) on acyclovir pharmacokinetics has been studied. The removal of acyclovir after CAPD and CAVHD is less pronounced than with hemodialysis, and the pharmacokinetic parameters closely resemble those observed in patients with end-stage renal disease (ESRD) not receiving hemodialysis. Therefore, supplemental doses of valacyclovir hydrochloride should not be required following CAPD or CAVHD.
Fexofenadine Hcl And Ps...

Fexofenadine Hcl And Pseudoephedrine Hcl

The recommended dose of fexofenadine HCl 180 mg and pseudoephedrine HCl 240 mg extended-release tablets (24 hour formulation) is one tablet once daily administered on an empty stomach with water for adults and children 12 years of age and older fexofenadine HCl 180 mg and pseudoephedrine HCl 240 mg extended-release tablets (24 hour formulation) should generally be avoided in patients with renal insufficiency. Fexofenadine HCl 180 mg and pseudoephedrine HCl 240 mg extended-release tablets (24 hour formulation) must be swallowed whole and never crushed or chewed.
Allopurinol

Allopurinol

The dosage of allopurinol to accomplish full control of gout and to lower serum uric acid to normal or near-normal levels varies with the severity of the disease. The average is 200 to 300 mg per day for patients with mild gout and 400 to 600 mg per day for those with moderately severe tophaceous gout. The appropriate dosage may be administered in divided doses or as a single equivalent dose with the 300 mg tablet. Dosage requirements in excess of 300 mg should be administered in divided doses. The maximal recommended dosage is 800 mg daily. To reduce the possibility of flareup of acute gouty attacks, it is recommended that the patient start with a low dose of allopurinol (100 mg daily) and increase at weekly intervals by 100 mg until a serum uric acid level of 6 mg/dL or less is attained but without exceeding the maximal recommended dosage.

Normal serum urate levels are usually achieved in one to three weeks. The upper limit of normal is about 7 mg/dL for men and postmenopausal women and 6 mg/dL for premenopausal women. Too much reliance should not be placed on a single serum uric acid determination since, for technical reasons, estimation of uric acid may be difficult. By selecting the appropriate dosage and, in certain patients, using uricosuric agents concurrently, it is possible to reduce serum uric acid to normal or, if desired, to as low as 2 to 3 mg/dL and keep it there indefinitely.

While adjusting the dosage of allopurinol in patients who are being treated with colchicine and/or anti-inflammatory agents, it is wise to continue the latter therapy until serum uric acid has been normalized and there has been freedom from acute gouty attacks for several months.

In transferring a patient from a uricosuric agent to allopurinol, the dose of the uricosuric agent should be gradually reduced over a period of several weeks and the dose of allopurinol gradually increased to the required dose needed to maintain a normal serum uric acid level.

It should also be noted that allopurinol is generally better tolerated if taken following meals. A fluid intake sufficient to yield a daily urinary output of at least two liters and the maintenance of a neutral or, preferably, slightly alkaline urine are desirable.

Since allopurinol and its metabolites are primarily eliminated only by the kidney, accumulation of the drug can occur in renal failure, and the dose of allopurinol should consequently be reduced. With a creatinine clearance of 10 to 20 mL/min, a daily dosage of 200 mg of allopurinol is suitable. When the creatinine clearance is less than 10 mL/min, the daily dosage should not exceed 100 mg. With extreme renal impairment (creatinine clear- ance less than 3 mL/min) the interval between doses may also need to be lengthened.

The correct size and frequency of dosage for maintaining the serum uric acid just within the normal range are best determined by using the serum uric acid level as an index.

For the prevention of uric acid nephropathy during the vigorous therapy of neoplastic disease, treatment with 600 to 800 mg daily for two or three days is advisable together with a high fluid intake. Otherwise similar considerations to the above recommendations for treating patients with gout govern the regulation of dosage for maintenance purposes in secondary hyperuricemia.

The dose of allopurinol recommended for management of recurrent calcium oxalate stones in hyperuricosuric patients is 200 to 300 mg/day in divided doses or as the single equivalent. This dose may be adjusted up or down depending upon the resultant control of the hyperuricosuria based upon subsequent 24 hour urinary urate determinations. Clinical experience suggests that patients with recurrent calcium oxalate stones may also benefit from dietary changes such as the reduction of animal protein, sodium, refined sugars, oxalate-rich foods, and excessive calcium intake as well as an increase in oral fluids and dietary fiber.

Children, 6 to 10 years of age, with secondary hyperuricemia associated with malignancies may be given 300 mg allopurinol daily while those under 6 years are generally given 150 mg daily. The response is evaluated after approximately 48 hours of therapy and a dosage adjustment is made if necessary.
Letrozole

Letrozole

2.1 Recommended Dose

The recommended dose of letrozole tablets is one 2.5 mg tablet administered once a day, without regard to meals.

2.2 Use in Adjuvant Treatment of Early Breast Cancer

In the adjuvant setting, the optimal duration of treatment with letrozole tablets is unknown. The planned duration of treatment in the study was 5 years with 73% of the patients having completed adjuvant therapy. Treatment should be discontinued at relapse [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].

2.3 Use in Extended Adjuvant Treatment of Early Breast Cancer

In the extended adjuvant setting, the optimal treatment duration with letrozole tablets is not known. The planned duration of treatment in the study was 5 years. In the final updated analysis, conducted at a median follow-up of 62 months, the median treatment duration was 60 months. Seventy-one percent of patients were treated for at least 3 years and 58% of patients completed least 4.5 years of extended adjuvant treatment. The treatment should be discontinued at tumor relapse [see Clinical Studies (14.2)].

2.4 Use in First and Second-Line Treatment of Advanced Breast Cancer

In patients with advanced disease, treatment with letrozole tablets should continue until tumor progression is evident. [see Clinical Studies (14.4, 14.5)]

2.5 Use in Hepatic Impairment

No dosage adjustment is recommended for patients with mild to moderate hepatic impairment, although letrozole tablets blood concentrations were modestly increased in subjects with moderate hepatic impairment due to cirrhosis. The dose of letrozole tablets in patients with cirrhosis and severe hepatic dysfunction should be reduced by 50% [see Warnings and Precautions (5.3)]. The recommended dose of letrozole tablets for such patients is 2.5 mg administered every other day. The effect of hepatic impairment on Letrozole exposure in noncirrhotic cancer patients with elevated bilirubin levels has not been determined.

2.6 Use in Renal Impairment

No dosage adjustment is required for patients with renal impairment if creatinine clearance is ≥10 mL/min. [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Rivastigmine Tartrate

Rivastigmine Tartrate

2.1 Dosing in Alzheimer’s Disease

Rivastigmine tartrate capsules should be taken with meals in divided doses in the morning and evening.

The recommended dosage of rivastigmine tartrate capsules in Alzheimer’s disease is 6 mg to 12 mg per day, administered twice a day (daily doses of 3 mg to 6 mg twice a day). There is evidence from the clinical trials that doses at the higher end of this range may be more beneficial.

Initial Dose

Initiate treatment with the 1.5 mg twice a day with rivastigmine tartrate capsules.

Dose Titration

After a minimum of 2 weeks and if well tolerated, increase the dose to 3 mg twice a day. Subsequent increases to 4.5 mg twice a day and 6 mg twice a day should be attempted after a minimum of 2 weeks at the previous dose and if well tolerated. The maximum dose is 6 mg twice a day (12 mg per day).

2.2 Dosing in Parkinson’s Disease Dementia

Rivastigmine tartrate capsules should be taken with meals in divided doses in the morning and evening.

The dosage of rivastigmine tartrate capsules shown to be effective in the single controlled clinical trial conducted in dementia associated with Parkinson’s disease is 3 mg to 12 mg per day, administered twice a day (daily doses of 1.5 mg to 6 mg twice a day).

Initial Dose

Initiate treatment with the 1.5 mg twice a day with rivastigmine tartrate capsules.

Dose Titration

After a minimum of 4 weeks and if well tolerated, increase the dose to 3 mg twice a day. Subsequent increases to 4.5 mg twice a day and 6 mg twice a day should be attempted after a minimum of 4 weeks at the previous dose and if well tolerated. The maximum dose is 6 mg twice a day (12 mg per day).

2.3 Interruption of Treatment

If adverse effects (e.g., nausea, vomiting, abdominal pain, loss of appetite) cause intolerance during treatment, the patient should be instructed to discontinue treatment for several doses and then restart at the same or next lower dose level.

If dosing is interrupted for 3 days or fewer, restart treatment with the same or lower dose of rivastigmine tartrate capsules. If dosing is interrupted for more than 3 days, treatment should be restarted with 1.5 mg twice a day and titrated as described above [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1)].

2.4 Dosing in Specific Populations

Dosing Modifications in Patients with Renal Impairment

Patients with moderate and severe renal impairment may be able to only tolerate lower doses.

Dosing Modifications in Patients with Hepatic Impairment

Patients with mild (Child-Pugh score 5 to 6) and moderate (Child-Pugh score 7 to 9) hepatic impairment may be able to only tolerate lower doses. No data are available on the use of rivastigmine in patients with severe hepatic impairment.

Dosing Modifications in Patients with Low Body Weight

Carefully titrate and monitor patients with low body weight (less than 50 kg) for toxicities (e.g., excessive nausea, vomiting), and consider reducing the dose if such toxicities develop.
Fexofenadine Hcl And Ps...

Fexofenadine Hcl And Pseudoephedrine Hci

do not divide, crush, chew or dissolve the tablet; swallow tablet whole adults and children 12 years of age and over take 1 tablet with a glass of water every 24 hours on an empty stomach; do not take more than 1 tablet in 24 hours children under 12 years of age do not use Adults 65 years of age and older ask a doctor consumers with kidney disease ask a doctor
Ranitidine Hydrochlorid...

Ranitidine Hydrochloride

adults and children 12 years and over: to relieve symptoms, swallow 1 tablet with a glass of water to prevent symptoms, swallow 1 tablet with a glass of water 30 to 60 minutes before eating food or drinking beverages that cause heartburn can be used up to twice daily (do not take more than 2 tablets in 24 hours) children under 12 years: ask a doctor
Anastrozole

Anastrozole

2.1 Recommended Dose

The dose of anastrozole is one 1 mg tablet taken once a day. For patients with advanced breast cancer, anastrozole should be continued until tumor progression. Anastrozole can be taken with or without food.

For adjuvant treatment of early breast cancer in postmenopausal women, the optimal duration of therapy is unknown. In the ATAC trial anastrozole was administered for five years. [see Clinical Studies (14.1)]

No dosage adjustment is necessary for patients with renal impairment or for elderly patients. [seeUse in Specific Populations (8.6)]

2.2 Patients with Hepatic Impairment

No changes in dose are recommended for patients with mild-to-moderate hepatic impairment. Anastrozole has not been studied in patients with severe hepatic impairment. [see Use in Specific Populations (8.7)]
Ciprofloxacin

Ciprofloxacin

Ciprofloxacin extended-release tablets and ciprofloxacin immediate-release tablets are not interchangeable. Ciprofloxacin extended-release tablets should be administered orally once daily as described in the following Dosage Guidelines table:
DOSAGE GUIDELINES Indication Unit Dose Frequency Usual Duration Uncomplicated Urinary Tract Infection(Acute Cystitis) 500 mg Q24h 3 Days Complicated Urinary Tract Infection 1000 mg Q24h 7-14 Days Acute Uncomplicated Pyelonephritis 1000 mg Q24h 7-14 Days
Patients whose therapy is started with ciprofloxacin I.V. for urinary tract infections may be switched to ciprofloxacin extended-release tablets when clinically indicated at the discretion of the physician.

Ciprofloxacin extended-release tablets should be administered at least 2 hours before or 6 hours after antacids containing magnesium or aluminum, as well as sucralfate, VIDEX® (didanosine) chewable/buffered tablets or pediatric powder, other highly buffered drugs, metal cations such as iron, and multivitamin preparations with zinc. Although ciprofloxacin extended-release tablets may be taken with meals that include milk, concomitant administration with dairy products alone, or with calcium-fortified products should be avoided, since decreased absorption is possible. A 2-hour window between substantial calcium intake (> 800 mg) and dosing with ciprofloxacin extended-release tablets are recommended. Ciprofloxacin extended-release tablets should be swallowed whole. DO NOT SPLIT, CRUSH, OR CHEW THE TABLET. (See CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Drug-drug Interactions, PRECAUTIONS, Drug Interactions and Information for Patients.)

Impaired Renal Function

Ciprofloxacin is eliminated primarily by renal excretion; however, the drug is also metabolized and partially cleared through the biliary system of the liver and through the intestine. These alternate pathways of drug elimination appear to compensate for the reduced renal excretion in patients with renal impairment. No dosage adjustment is required for patients with uncomplicated urinary tract infections receiving 500 mg ciprofloxacin extended-release tablets. In patients with complicated urinary tract infections and acute uncomplicated pyelonephritis, who have a creatinine clearance of < 30 mL/min, the dose of ciprofloxacin extended-release tablets should be reduced from 1000 mg to 500 mg daily. For patients on hemodialysis or peritoneal dialysis, administer ciprofloxacin extended-release tablets after the dialysis procedure is completed. (See CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Special Populations, and PRECAUTIONS, Geriatric Use.)

Impaired Hepatic Function

No dosage adjustment is required with ciprofloxacin extended-release tablets in patients with stable chronic cirrhosis. The kinetics of ciprofloxacin in patients with acute hepatic insufficiency, however, have not been fully elucidated. (See CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Special Populations.)
Risperidone Solution

Risperidone Solution

2.1 Schizophrenia

Adults

Usual Initial Dose

Risperidone oral solution can be administered once or twice daily. Initial dosing is generally 2 mg/day. Dose increases should then occur at intervals not less than 24 hours, in increments of 1-2 mg/day, as tolerated, to a recommended dose of 4-8 mg/day. In some patients, slower titration may be appropriate. Efficacy has been demonstrated in a range of 4-16 mg/day [see Clinical Studies (14.1)]. However, doses above 6 mg/day for twice daily dosing were not demonstrated to be more efficacious than lower doses, were associated with more extrapyramidal symptoms and other adverse effects, and are generally not recommended. In a single study supporting once-daily dosing, the efficacy results were generally stronger for 8 mg than for 4 mg. The safety of doses above 16 mg/day has not been evaluated in clinical trials.

Maintenance Therapy

While it is unknown how long a patient with schizophrenia should remain on risperidone, the effectiveness of risperidone 2 mg/day to 8 mg/day at delaying relapse was demonstrated in a controlled trial in patients who had been clinically stable for at least 4 weeks and were then followed for a period of 1 to 2 years [see Clinical Studies(14.1)]. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment with an appropriate dose.

Adolescents

The dosage of risperidone should be initiated at 0.5 mg once daily, administered as a single-daily dose in either the morning or evening. Dosage adjustments, if indicated, should occur at intervals not less than 24 hours, in increments of 0.5 or 1 mg/day, as tolerated, to a recommended dose of 3 mg/day. Although efficacy has been demonstrated in studies of adolescent patients with schizophrenia at doses between 1 and 6 mg/day, no additional benefit was seen above 3 mg/day, and higher doses were associated with more adverse events. Doses higher than 6 mg/day have not been studied.

Patients experiencing persistent somnolence may benefit from administering half the daily dose twice daily.

There are no controlled data to support the longer term use of risperidone beyond 8 weeks in adolescents with schizophrenia. The physician who elects to use risperidone for extended periods in adolescents with schizophrenia should periodically re-evaluate the long-term risks and benefits of the drug for the individual patient.

Reinitiation of Treatment in Patients Previously Discontinued

Although there are no data to specifically address reinitiation of treatment, it is recommended that after an interval off risperidone, the initial titration schedule should be followed.

Switching From Other Antipsychotics

There are no systematically collected data to specifically address switching schizophrenic patients from other antipsychotics to risperidone, or treating patients with concomitant antipsychotics. While immediate discontinuation of the previous antipsychotic treatment may be acceptable for some schizophrenic patients, more gradual discontinuation may be most appropriate for others. The period of overlapping antipsychotic administration should be minimized. When switching schizophrenic patients from depot antipsychotics, initiate risperidone therapy in place of the next scheduled injection. The need for continuing existing EPS medication should be re-evaluated periodically.

2.2 Bipolar Mania

Usual Dose

Adults

Risperidone should be administered on a once-daily schedule, starting with 2 mg to 3 mg per day. Dosage adjustments, if indicated, should occur at intervals of not less than 24 hours and in dosage increments/decrements of 1 mg per day, as studied in the short-term, placebo-controlled trials. In these trials, short-term (3 week) anti-manic efficacy was demonstrated in a flexible dosage range of 1-6 mg per day [see Clinical Studies(14.2, 14.3)]. Risperidone doses higher than 6 mg per day were not studied.

Pediatrics

The dosage of risperidone should be initiated at 0.5 mg once daily, administered as a single-daily dose in either the morning or evening. Dosage adjustments, if indicated, should occur at intervals not less than 24 hours, in increments of 0.5 or 1 mg/day, as tolerated, to a recommended dose of 2.5 mg/day. Although efficacy has been demonstrated in studies of pediatric patients with bipolar mania at doses between 0.5 and 6 mg/day, no additional benefit was seen above 2.5 mg/day, and higher doses were associated with more adverse events. Doses higher than 6 mg/day have not been studied.

Patients experiencing persistent somnolence may benefit from administering half the daily dose twice daily.

Maintenance Therapy

There is no body of evidence available from controlled trials to guide a clinician in the longer-term management of a patient who improves during treatment of an acute manic episode with risperidone. While it is generally agreed that pharmacological treatment beyond an acute response in mania is desirable, both for maintenance of the initial response and for prevention of new manic episodes, there are no systematically obtained data to support the use of risperidone in such longer-term treatment (i.e., beyond 3 weeks). The physician who elects to use risperidone for extended periods should periodically re-evaluate the long-term risks and benefits of the drug for the individual patient.

2.3 Irritability Associated with Autistic Disorder – Pediatrics (Children and Adolescents)

The safety and effectiveness of risperidone in pediatric patients with autistic disorder less than 5 years of age have not been established.

The dosage of risperidone should be individualized according to the response and tolerability of the patient. The total daily dose of risperidone can be administered once daily, or half the total daily dose can be administered twice daily.

Dosing should be initiated at 0.25 mg per day for patients < 20 kg and 0.5 mg per day for patients ≥ 20 kg. After a minimum of four days from treatment initiation, the dose may be increased to the recommended dose of 0.5 mg per day for patients < 20 kg and 1 mg per day for patients ≥ 20 kg. This dose should be maintained for a minimum of 14 days. In patients not achieving sufficient clinical response, dose increases may be considered at ≥ 2-week intervals in increments of 0.25 mg per day for patients < 20 kg or 0.5 mg per day for patients ≥ 20 kg. Caution should be exercised with dosage for smaller children who weigh less than 15 kg.

In clinical trials, 90% of patients who showed a response (based on at least 25% improvement on ABC-I, [see Clinical Studies (14.4)] received doses of risperidonebetween 0.5 mg and 2.5 mg per day. The maximum daily dose of risperidonein one of the pivotal trials, when the therapeutic effect reached plateau, was 1 mg in patients < 20 kg, 2.5 mg in patients ≥ 20 kg, or 3 mg in patients > 45 kg. No dosing data is available for children who weighed less than 15 kg.

Once sufficient clinical response has been achieved and maintained, consideration should be given to gradually lowering the dose to achieve the optimal balance of efficacy and safety. The physician who elects to use risperidonefor extended periods should periodically re-evaluate the long-term risks and benefits of the drug for the individual patient.

Patients experiencing persistent somnolence may benefit from a once-daily dose administered at bedtime or administering half the daily dose twice daily, or a reduction of the dose.

2.4 Dosage in Special Populations

The recommended initial dose is 0.5 mg twice daily in patients who are elderly or debilitated, patients with severe renal or hepatic impairment, and patients either predisposed to hypotension or for whom hypotension would pose a risk. Dosage increases in these patients should be in increments of no more than 0.5 mg twice daily. Increases to dosages above 1.5 mg twice daily should generally occur at intervals of at least 1 week. In some patients, slower titration may be medically appropriate.

Elderly or debilitated patients, and patients with renal impairment, may have less ability to eliminate risperidone than normal adults. Patients with impaired hepatic function may have increases in the free fraction of risperidone, possibly resulting in an enhanced effect [see ClinicalPharmacology(12.3)]. Patients with a predisposition to hypotensive reactions or for whom such reactions would pose a particular risk likewise need to be titrated cautiously and carefully monitored [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2,5.7,5.17)]. If a once-daily dosing regimen in the elderly or debilitated patient is being considered, it is recommended that the patient be titrated on a twice-daily regimen for 2-3 days at the target dose. Subsequent switches to a once-daily dosing regimen can be done thereafter.

2.5 Co-Administration of Risperidone with Certain Other Medications

Co-administration of carbamazepine and other enzyme inducers (e.g., phenytoin, rifampin, phenobarbital) with risperidone would be expected to cause decreases in the plasma concentrations of the sum of risperidone and 9-hydroxyrisperidone combined, which could lead to decreased efficacy of risperidone treatment. The dose of risperidone needs to be titrated accordingly for patients receiving these enzyme inducers, especially during initiation or discontinuation of therapy with these inducers [see Drug Interactions (7.11)].

Fluoxetine and paroxetine have been shown to increase the plasma concentration of risperidone 2.5-2.8 fold and 3-9 fold, respectively. Fluoxetine did not affect the plasma concentration of 9-hydroxyrisperidone. Paroxetine lowered the concentration of 9-hydroxyrisperidone by about 10%. The dose of risperidone needs to be titrated accordingly when fluoxetine or paroxetine is co-administered [see Drug Interactions (7.10)].

2.6 Administration of Risperidone Oral Solution

Risperidone Oral Solution can be administered directly from the calibrated pipette, or can be mixed with a beverage prior to administration. Risperidone Oral Solution is compatible in the following beverages: water, coffee, orange juice, and low-fat milk; it is NOT compatible with either cola or tea.
Ondansetron Hydrochlori...

Ondansetron Hydrochloride

Prevention of Nausea and Vomiting Associated With Highly Emetogenic Cancer Chemotherapy

The recommended adult oral dosage of ondansetron tablet is 24 mg given as three 8 mg tablets administered 30 minutes before the start of single-day highly emetogenic chemotherapy, including cisplatin ≥50 mg/m2. Multiday, single-dose administration of a 24 mg dosage has not been studied.

Pediatric Use

There is no experience with the use of a 24 mg dosage in pediatric patients.

Geriatric Use

The dosage recommendation is the same as for the general population.

Prevention of Nausea and Vomiting Associated With Moderately Emetogenic Cancer Chemotherapy

The recommended adult oral dosage is one 8 mg ondansetron tablet given twice a day. The first dose should be administered 30 minutes before the start of emetogenic chemotherapy, with a subsequent dose 8 hours after the first dose. One 8 mg ondansetron tablet should be administered twice a day (every 12 hours) for 1 to 2 days after completion of chemotherapy.

Pediatric Use

For pediatric patients 12 years of age and older, the dosage is the same as for adults. For pediatric patients 4 through 11 years of age, the dosage is one 4 mg ondansetron tablet given 3 times a day. The first dose should be administered 30 minutes before the start of emetogenic chemotherapy, with subsequent doses 4 and 8 hours after the first dose. One 4 mg ondansetron tablet should be administered 3 times a day (every 8 hours) for 1 to 2 days after completion of chemotherapy.

Geriatric Use

The dosage is the same as for the general population.

Prevention of Nausea and Vomiting Associated With Radiotherapy, Either Total Body Irradiation, or Single High-Dose Fraction or Daily Fractions to the Abdomen

The recommended oral dosage is one 8 mg ondansetron tablet given 3 times a day.

For total body irradiation, one 8 mg ondansetron tablet should be administered 1 to 2 hours before each fraction of radiotherapy administered each day.

For single high-dose fraction radiotherapy to the abdomen, one 8 mg ondansetron tablet should be administered 1 to 2 hours before radiotherapy, with subsequent doses every 8 hours after the first dose for 1 to 2 days after completion of radiotherapy.

For daily fractionated radiotherapy to the abdomen, one 8 mg ondansetron tablet should be administered 1 to 2 hours before radiotherapy, with subsequent doses every 8 hours after the first dose for each day radiotherapy is given.

Pediatric Use

There is no experience with the use of ondansetron tablets in the prevention of radiation-induced nausea and vomiting in pediatric patients.

Geriatric Use

The dosage recommendation is the same as for the general population.

Postoperative Nausea and Vomiting

The recommended dosage is 16 mg given as two 8 mg ondansetron tablets 1 hour before induction of anesthesia.

Pediatric Use

There is no experience with the use of ondansetron tablets in the prevention of postoperative nausea and vomiting in pediatric patients.

Geriatric Use

The dosage is the same as for the general population.

Dosage Adjustment for Patients With Impaired Renal Function

The dosage recommendation is the same as for the general population. There is no experience beyond first-day administration of ondansetron.

Dosage Adjustment for Patients With Impaired Hepatic Function

In patients with severe hepatic impairment (Child-Pugh2 score of 10 or greater), clearance is reduced and apparent volume of distribution is increased with a resultant increase in plasma half-life. In such patients, a total daily dose of 8 mg should not be exceeded.
Famotidine

Famotidine

For Famotidine 10 mg: adults and children 12 years and over: to relieve symptoms, swallow 1 tablet with a glass of water. Do not chew. to prevent symptoms, swallow 1 tablet with a glass of water at any time from 15 to 60 minutes before eating food or drinking beverages that cause heartburn do not use more than 2 tablets in 24 hours children under 12 years: ask a doctor For Famotidine 20 mg: adults and children 12 years and over: to relieve symptoms, swallow 1 tablet with a glass of water. Do not chew. to prevent symptoms, swallow 1 tablet with a glass of water at any time from 10 to 60 minutes before eating food or drinking beverages that cause heartburn do not use more than 2 tablets in 24 hours children under 12 years: ask a doctor
Fluoxetine

Fluoxetine

2.1 Major Depressive Disorder

Initial Treatment

Adult — In controlled trials used to support the efficacy of fluoxetine, patients were administered morning doses ranging from 20 to 80 mg/day. Studies comparing fluoxetine 20, 40, and 60 mg/day to placebo indicate that 20 mg/day is sufficient to obtain a satisfactory response in Major Depressive Disorder in most cases. Consequently, a dose of 20 mg/day, administered in the morning, is recommended as the initial dose. A dose increase may be considered after several weeks if insufficient clinical improvement is observed. Doses above 20 mg/day may be administered on a once-a-day (morning) or BID schedule (i.e., morning and noon) and should not exceed a maximum dose of 80 mg/day.

Pediatric (children and adolescents) — In the short-term (8 to 9 week) controlled clinical trials of fluoxetine supporting its effectiveness in the treatment of Major Depressive Disorder, patients were administered fluoxetine doses of 10 to 20 mg/day [see Clinical Studies (14.1)]. Treatment should be initiated with a dose of 10 or 20 mg/day. After 1 week at 10 mg/day, the dose should be increased to 20 mg/day.

However, due to higher plasma levels in lower weight children, the starting and target dose in this group may be 10 mg/day. A dose increase to 20 mg/day may be considered after several weeks if insufficient clinical improvement is observed.

All patients —As with other drugs effective in the treatment of Major Depressive Disorder, the full effect may be delayed until 4 weeks of treatment or longer.

Maintenance/Continuation/Extended Treatment — It is generally agreed that acute episodes of Major Depressive Disorder require several months or longer of sustained pharmacologic therapy. Whether the dose needed to induce remission is identical to the dose needed to maintain and/or sustain euthymia is unknown.

Daily Dosing — Systematic evaluation of fluoxetine capsules in adult patients has shown that its efficacy in Major Depressive Disorder is maintained for periods of up to 38 weeks following 12 weeks of open-label acute treatment (50 weeks total) at a dose of 20 mg/day [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].

If satisfactory response is not maintained with fluoxetine weekly, consider reestablishing a daily dosing regimen [see Clinical Studies (14.1 )].

Switching Patients to a Tricyclic Antidepressant (TCA) — Dosage of a TCA may need to be reduced, and plasma TCA concentrations may need to be monitored temporarily when fluoxetine is coadministered or has been recently discontinued [see Drug Interactions (7.9)].

Switching Patients to or from a Monoamine Oxidase Inhibitor (MAOI) — At least 14 days should elapse between discontinuation of an MAOI and initiation of therapy with fluoxetine capsules. In addition, at least 5 weeks, perhaps longer, should be allowed after stopping fluoxetine capsules before starting an MAOI [see Contraindications (4)and Drug Interactions (7.1)].

2.2 Obsessive Compulsive Disorder

Initial Treatment

Adult — In the controlled clinical trials of fluoxetine supporting its effectiveness in the treatment of OCD, patients were administered fixed daily doses of 20, 40, or 60 mg of fluoxetine or placebo [see Clinical Studies (14.2)]. In one of these studies, no dose-response relationship for effectiveness was demonstrated. Consequently, a dose of 20 mg/day, administered in the morning, is recommended as the initial dose. Since there was a suggestion of a possible dose-response relationship for effectiveness in the second study, a dose increase may be considered after several weeks if insufficient clinical improvement is observed. The full therapeutic effect may be delayed until 5 weeks of treatment or longer.

Doses above 20 mg/day may be administered on a once daily (i.e., morning) or BID schedule (i.e., morning and noon). A dose range of 20 to 60 mg/day is recommended; however, doses of up to 80 mg/day have been well tolerated in open studies of OCD. The maximum fluoxetine dose should not exceed 80 mg/day.

Pediatric (children and adolescents) — In the controlled clinical trial of fluoxetine supporting its effectiveness in the treatment of OCD, patients were administered fluoxetine doses in the range of 10 to 60 mg/day [seeClinical Studies (14.2)].

In adolescents and higher weight children, treatment should be initiated with a dose of 10 mg/day. After 2 weeks, the dose should be increased to 20 mg/day. Additional dose increases may be considered after several more weeks if insufficient clinical improvement is observed. A dose range of 20 to 60 mg/day is recommended.

In lower weight children, treatment should be initiated with a dose of 10 mg/day. Additional dose increases may be considered after several more weeks if insufficient clinical improvement is observed. A dose range of 20 to 30 mg/day is recommended. Experience with daily doses greater than 20 mg is very minimal, and there is no experience with doses greater than 60 mg.

Maintenance/Continuation Treatment) — While there are no systematic studies that answer the question of how long to continue fluoxetine capsules, OCD is a chronic condition and it is reasonable to consider continuation for a responding patient. Although the efficacy of fluoxetine capsules after 13 weeks has not been documented in controlled trials, adult patients have been continued in therapy under double-blind conditions for up to an additional 6 months without loss of benefit. However, dosage adjustments should be made to maintain the patient on the lowest effective dosage, and patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for treatment.

2.3 Bulimia Nervosa

Initial Treatment) — In the controlled clinical trials of fluoxetine supporting its effectiveness in the treatment of Bulimia Nervosa, patients were administered fixed daily fluoxetine doses of 20 or 60 mg, or placebo [see Clinical Studies (14.3)]. Only the 60 mg dose was statistically significantly superior to placebo in reducing the frequency of binge-eating and vomiting. Consequently, the recommended dose is 60 mg/day, administered in the morning. For some patients it may be advisable to titrate up to this target dose over several days. Fluoxetine doses above 60 mg/day have not been systematically studied in patients with bulimia.

Maintenance/Continuation Treatment) — Systematic evaluation of continuing fluoxetine capsules 60 mg/day for periods of up to 52 weeks in patients with bulimia who have responded while taking fluoxetine capsules 60 mg/day during an 8-week acute treatment phase has demonstrated a benefit of such maintenance treatment [see Clinical Studies (14.3)]. Nevertheless, patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

2.4 Panic Disorder

Initial Treatment) — In the controlled clinical trials of fluoxetine supporting its effectiveness in the treatment of Panic Disorder, patients were administered fluoxetine doses in the range of 10 to 60 mg/day [see Clinical Studies (14.4)]. Treatment should be initiated with a dose of 10 mg/day. After one week, the dose should be increased to 20 mg/day. The most frequently administered dose in the 2 flexible-dose clinical trials was 20 mg/day.

A dose increase may be considered after several weeks if no clinical improvement is observed. Fluoxetine doses above 60 mg/day have not been systematically evaluated in patients with Panic Disorder.

Maintenance/Continuation Treatment) — While there are no systematic studies that answer the question of how long to continue fluoxetine capsules, panic disorder is a chronic condition and it is reasonable to consider continuation for a responding patient. Nevertheless, patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for continued treatment.

2.5   Fluoxetine and Olanzapine in Combination: Depressive Episodes Associated with Bipolar I Disorder

When using fluoxetine and olanzapine in combination, also refer to the Clinical Studies section of the package insert for fluoxetine hydrochloride and olanzapine capsules.

Fluoxetine should be administered in combination with oral olanzapine once daily in the evening, without regard to meals, generally beginning with 5 mg of oral olanzapine and 20 mg of fluoxetine. Dosage adjustments, if indicated, can be made according to efficacy and tolerability within dose ranges of fluoxetine 20 to 50 mg and oral olanzapine 5 to 12.5 mg. Antidepressant efficacy was demonstrated with olanzapine and fluoxetine in combination with a dose range of olanzapine 6 to 12 mg and fluoxetine 25 to 50 mg.

Safety and efficacy of fluoxetine in combination with olanzapine was determined in clinical trials supporting approval of fluoxetine hydrochloride and olanzapine capsules (fixed-dose combination of olanzapine and fluoxetine). Fluoxetine hydrochloride and olanzapine is dosed between 3 mg/25 mg (olanzapine/fluoxetine) per day and 12 mg/50 mg (olanzapine/fluoxetine) per day. The following table demonstrates the appropriate individual component doses of fluoxetine and olanzapine versus fluoxetine hydrochloride and olanzapine. Dosage adjustments, if indicated, should be made with the individual components according to efficacy and tolerability.

Table 1: Approximate Dose Correspondence Between Fluoxetine hydrochloride and olanzapine1 and the Combination of fluoxetine and Olanzapine
For Fluoxetine hydrochloride and olanzapine (mg/day) Use in Combination Olanzapine (mg/day) Fluoxetine (mg/day) 3 mg olanzapine/25 mg fluoxetine 2.5 20 6 mg olanzapine/25 mg fluoxetine 5 20 12 mg olanzapine/25 mg fluoxetine 10+2.5 20 6 mg olanzapine/50 mg fluoxetine 5 40+10 12 mg olanzapine/50 mg fluoxetine 10+2.5 40+10
1Fluoxetine hydrochloride and olanzapine is a fixed-dose combination of fluoxetine and olanzapine.

While there is no body of evidence to answer the question of how long a patient treated with fluoxetine and olanzapine in combination should remain on it, it is generally accepted that Bipolar I Disorder, including the depressive episodes associated with Bipolar I Disorder, is a chronic illness requiring chronic treatment. The physician should periodically re-examine the need for continued pharmacotherapy.

Safety of coadministration of doses above 18 mg olanzapine with 75 mg fluoxetine has not been evaluated in clinical studies. Fluoxetine monotherapy is not indicated for the treatment of depressive episodes associated with Bipolar I Disorder.

2.7 Dosing in Specific Populations

Treatment of Pregnant Women during the Third Trimester) — When treating pregnant women with fluoxetine capsules during the third trimester, the physician should carefully consider the potential risks and potential benefits of treatment. Neonates exposed to SNRIs or SSRIs late in the third trimester have developed complications requiring prolonged hospitalization, respiratory support, and tube feeding. The physician may consider tapering fluoxetine capsules in the third trimester [see Use in Specific Populations (8.1)].

Geriatrics) — A lower or less frequent dosage should be considered for the elderly [see Use in Specific Populations (8.5)]

Hepatic Impairment) — As with many other medications, a lower or less frequent dosage should be used in patients with hepatic impairment [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.4) and Use in Specific Populations (8.6)].

Concomitant Illness) — Patients with concurrent disease or on multiple concomitant medications may require dosage adjustments [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.4) and Warnings and Precautions (5.10)].

Fluoxetine and Olanzapine in Combination — The starting dose of oral olanzapine 2.5 to          5 mg with fluoxetine 20 mg should be used for patients with a predisposition to hypotensive reactions, patients with hepatic impairment, or patients who exhibit a combination of factors that may slow the metabolism of olanzapine or fluoxetine in combination (female gender, geriatric age, non smoking status), or those patients who may be pharmacodynamically sensitive to olanzapine. Dosing modifications may be necessary in patients who exhibit a combination of factors that may slow metabolism. When indicated, dose escalation should be performed with caution in these patients. Fluoxetine and olanzapine in combination have not been systematically studied in patients over 65 years of age or in patients less than 18 years of age [see Warnings and Precautions (5.14) and Drug Interactions (7.9)].

2.8 Discontinuation of Treatment

Symptoms associated with discontinuation of fluoxetine, SNRIs, and SSRIs, have been reported [see Warnings and Precautions (5.13)].
Sumatriptan Succinate

Sumatriptan Succinate

In controlled clinical trials, single doses of 25, 50, or 100 mg of sumatriptan tablets were effective for the acute treatment of migraine in adults. There is evidence that doses of 50 and 100 mg may provide a greater effect than 25 mg (see CLINICALTRIALS). There is also evidence that doses of 100 mg do not provide a greater effect than 50 mg. Individuals may vary in response to doses of sumatriptan tablets. The choice of dose should therefore be made on an individual basis, weighing the possible benefit of a higher dose with the potential for a greater risk of adverse events.

If the headache returns or the patient has a partial response to the initial dose, the dose may be repeated after 2 hours, not to exceed a total daily dose of 200 mg. If a headache returns following an initial treatment with sumatriptan succinate injection, additional single sumatriptan tablets (up to 100 mg/day) may be given with an interval of at least 2 hours between tablet doses. The safety of treating an average of more than 4 headaches in a 30-day period has not been established.

Because of the potential of MAO-A inhibitors to cause unpredictable elevations in the bioavailability of oral sumatriptan, their combined use is contraindicated (see CONTRAINDICATIONS).

Hepatic disease/functional impairment may also cause unpredictable elevations in the bioavailability of orally administered sumatriptan. Consequently, if treatment is deemed advisable in the presence of liver disease, the maximum single dose should in general not exceed 50 mg (see CLINICALPHARMACOLOGYfor the basis of this recommendation).
Levetiracetam

Levetiracetam

2.1 Important Administration Instructions

Levetiracetam tablets are given orally with or without food. The levetiracetam dosing regimen depends on the indication, age group, dosage form (tablets or oral solution), and renal function.

Prescribe the oral solution for pediatric patients with body weight ≤ 20 kg. Prescribe the oral solution or tablets for pediatric patients with body weight above 20 kg.

When using the oral solution in pediatric patients, dosing is weight-based (mg per kg) using a calibrated measuring device (not a household teaspoon or tablespoon).

Levetiracetam tablets should be swallowed whole. Levetiracetam tablets should not be chewed or crushed.

2.2 Partial Onset Seizures

Adults 16 Years and Older

In clinical trials, daily doses of 1000 mg, 2000 mg, and 3000 mg, given as twice-daily dosing were shown to be effective. Although in some studies there was a tendency toward greater response with higher dose [see Clinical Studies (14.1)], a consistent increase in response with increased dose has not been shown.

Treatment should be initiated with a daily dose of 1000 mg/day, given as twice-daily dosing (500 mg twice daily). Additional dosing increments may be given (1000 mg/day additional every 2 weeks) to a maximum recommended daily dose of 3000 mg. Doses greater than 3000 mg/day have been used in open-label studies for periods of 6 months and longer. There is no evidence that doses greater than 3000 mg/day confer additional benefit.

Pediatric Patients

1 Month to < 6 Months

Treatment should be initiated with a daily dose of 14 mg/kg in 2 divided doses (7 mg/kg twice daily). The daily dose should be increased every 2 weeks by increments of 14 mg/kg to the recommended daily dose of 42 mg/kg (21 mg/kg twice daily). In the clinical trial, the mean daily dose was 35 mg/kg in this age group. The effectiveness of lower doses has not been studied.

6 Months to <4 Years:

Treatment should be initiated with a daily dose of 20 mg/kg in 2 divided doses (10 mg/kg twice daily). The daily dose should be increased in 2 weeks by an increment of 20 mg/kg to the recommended daily dose of 50 mg/kg (25 mg/kg twice daily). If a patient cannot tolerate a daily dose of 50 mg/kg, the daily dose may be reduced. In the clinical trial, the mean daily dose was 47 mg/kg in this age group.

4 Years to < 16 Years

Treatment should be initiated with a daily dose of 20 mg/kg in 2 divided doses (10 mg/kg twice daily). The daily dose should be increased every 2 weeks by increments of 20 mg/kg to the recommended daily dose of 60 mg/kg (30 mg/kg twice daily). If a patient cannot tolerate a daily dose of 60 mg/kg, the daily dose may be reduced. In the clinical efficacy trial, the mean daily dose was 44 mg/kg. The maximum daily dose was 3000 mg/day.

For levetiracetam tablet dosing in pediatric patients weighing 20 to 40 kg, treatment should be initiated with a daily dose of 500 mg given as twice daily dosing (250 mg twice daily). The daily dose should be increased every 2 weeks by increments of 500 mg to a maximum recommended daily dose of 1500 mg (750 mg twice daily).

For levetiracetam tablet dosing in pediatric patients weighing more than 40 kg, treatment should be initiated with a daily dose of 1000 mg/day given as twice daily dosing (500 mg twice daily). The daily dose should be increased every 2 weeks by increments of 1000 mg/day to a maximum recommended daily dose of 3000 mg (1500 mg twice daily).

Levetiracetam Oral Solution Weight-Based Dosing Calculation for Pediatric Patients

The following calculation should be used to determine the appropriate daily dose of oral solution for pediatric patients:

                                             Daily dose (mg/kg/day) x patient weight (kg)

Total daily dose (mL/day) = ----------------------------------------------------------

                                                                 100 mg/mL

2.3 Myoclonic Seizures in Patients 12 Years of Age and Older with Juvenile Myoclonic Epilepsy

Treatment should be initiated with a dose of 1000 mg/day, given as twice-daily dosing (500 mg twice daily). Dosage should be increased by 1000 mg/day every 2 weeks to the recommended daily dose of 3000 mg. The effectiveness of doses lower than 3000 mg/day has not been studied.

2.4 Primary Generalized Tonic-Clonic Seizures

Adults 16 Years and Older

Treatment should be initiated with a dose of 1000 mg/day, given as twice-daily dosing (500 mg twice daily). Dosage should be increased by 1000 mg/day every 2 weeks to the recommended daily dose of 3000 mg. The effectiveness of doses lower than 3000 mg/day has not been adequately studied.

Pediatric Patients Ages 6 to <16 Years

Treatment should be initiated with a daily dose of 20 mg/kg in 2 divided doses (10 mg/kg twice daily). The daily dose should be increased every 2 weeks by increments of 20 mg/kg to the recommended daily dose of 60 mg/kg (30 mg/kg twice daily). The effectiveness of doses lower than 60 mg/kg/day has not been adequately studied. Patients with body weight ≤20 kg should be dosed with oral solution. Patients with body weight above 20 kg can be dosed with either tablets or oral solution [see Dosage and Administration (2.1)]. Only whole tablets should be administered.

2.5 Adult Patients with Impaired Renal Function

Levetiracetam tablets dosing must be individualized according to the patient’s renal function status. Recommended doses and adjustment for dose for adults are shown in Table 1. In order to calculate the dose recommended for patients with renal impairment, creatinine clearance adjusted for body surface area must be calculated. To do this an estimate of the patient’s creatinine clearance (CLcr) in mL/min must first be calculated using the following formula:

          [140-age (years)] x weight (kg)

CLcr= -----------------------------------------     (x 0.85 for female patients)

          72 x serum creatinine (mg/dL)

Then CLcr is adjusted for body surface area (BSA) as follows:

                                        CLcr (mL/min)

CLcr (mL/min/1.73m2)= ---------------------------- x 1.73

                                     BSA subject (m2)

Table 1: Dosing Adjustment Regimen For Adult Patients With Impaired Renal Function
Group Creatinine Clearance (mL/min/1.73m2) Dosage (mg)            Frequency Normal > 80 500 to 1,500 Every 12 hours Mild 50 to 80 500 to 1,000 Every 12 hours Moderate 30 to 50 250 to 750 Every 12 hours Severe < 30 250 to 500 Every 12 hours ESRD patients using dialysis ---- 500 to 1,0001 Every 24 hours1
1 Following dialysis, a 250 to 500 mg supplemental dose is recommended.
Levetiracetam

Levetiracetam

2.1 Important Administration Instructions

Levetiracetam tablets are given orally with or without food. The levetiracetam dosing regimen depends on the indication, age group, dosage form (tablets or oral solution), and renal function.

Prescribe the oral solution for pediatric patients with body weight ≤ 20 kg. Prescribe the oral solution or tablets for pediatric patients with body weight above 20 kg.

When using the oral solution in pediatric patients, dosing is weight-based (mg per kg) using a calibrated measuring device (not a household teaspoon or tablespoon).

Levetiracetam tablets should be swallowed whole. Levetiracetam tablets should not be chewed or crushed.

2.2 Partial Onset Seizures

Adults 16 Years and Older

In clinical trials, daily doses of 1000 mg, 2000 mg, and 3000 mg, given as twice-daily dosing were shown to be effective. Although in some studies there was a tendency toward greater response with higher dose [see Clinical Studies (14.1)], a consistent increase in response with increased dose has not been shown.

Treatment should be initiated with a daily dose of 1000 mg/day, given as twice-daily dosing (500 mg twice daily). Additional dosing increments may be given (1000 mg/day additional every 2 weeks) to a maximum recommended daily dose of 3000 mg. Doses greater than 3000 mg/day have been used in open-label studies for periods of 6 months and longer. There is no evidence that doses greater than 3000 mg/day confer additional benefit.

Pediatric Patients

1 Month to < 6 Months

Treatment should be initiated with a daily dose of 14 mg/kg in 2 divided doses (7 mg/kg twice daily). The daily dose should be increased every 2 weeks by increments of 14 mg/kg to the recommended daily dose of 42 mg/kg (21 mg/kg twice daily). In the clinical trial, the mean daily dose was 35 mg/kg in this age group. The effectiveness of lower doses has not been studied.

6 Months to <4 Years:

Treatment should be initiated with a daily dose of 20 mg/kg in 2 divided doses (10 mg/kg twice daily). The daily dose should be increased in 2 weeks by an increment of 20 mg/kg to the recommended daily dose of 50 mg/kg (25 mg/kg twice daily). If a patient cannot tolerate a daily dose of 50 mg/kg, the daily dose may be reduced. In the clinical trial, the mean daily dose was 47 mg/kg in this age group.

4 Years to < 16 Years

Treatment should be initiated with a daily dose of 20 mg/kg in 2 divided doses (10 mg/kg twice daily). The daily dose should be increased every 2 weeks by increments of 20 mg/kg to the recommended daily dose of 60 mg/kg (30 mg/kg twice daily). If a patient cannot tolerate a daily dose of 60 mg/kg, the daily dose may be reduced. In the clinical efficacy trial, the mean daily dose was 44 mg/kg. The maximum daily dose was 3000 mg/day.

For levetiracetam tablet dosing in pediatric patients weighing 20 to 40 kg, treatment should be initiated with a daily dose of 500 mg given as twice daily dosing (250 mg twice daily). The daily dose should be increased every 2 weeks by increments of 500 mg to a maximum recommended daily dose of 1500 mg (750 mg twice daily).

For levetiracetam tablet dosing in pediatric patients weighing more than 40 kg, treatment should be initiated with a daily dose of 1000 mg/day given as twice daily dosing (500 mg twice daily). The daily dose should be increased every 2 weeks by increments of 1000 mg/day to a maximum recommended daily dose of 3000 mg (1500 mg twice daily).

Levetiracetam Oral Solution Weight-Based Dosing Calculation for Pediatric Patients

The following calculation should be used to determine the appropriate daily dose of oral solution for pediatric patients:

                                             Daily dose (mg/kg/day) x patient weight (kg)

Total daily dose (mL/day) = ----------------------------------------------------------

                                                                 100 mg/mL

2.3 Myoclonic Seizures in Patients 12 Years of Age and Older with Juvenile Myoclonic Epilepsy

Treatment should be initiated with a dose of 1000 mg/day, given as twice-daily dosing (500 mg twice daily). Dosage should be increased by 1000 mg/day every 2 weeks to the recommended daily dose of 3000 mg. The effectiveness of doses lower than 3000 mg/day has not been studied.

2.4 Primary Generalized Tonic-Clonic Seizures

Adults 16 Years and Older

Treatment should be initiated with a dose of 1000 mg/day, given as twice-daily dosing (500 mg twice daily). Dosage should be increased by 1000 mg/day every 2 weeks to the recommended daily dose of 3000 mg. The effectiveness of doses lower than 3000 mg/day has not been adequately studied.

Pediatric Patients Ages 6 to <16 Years

Treatment should be initiated with a daily dose of 20 mg/kg in 2 divided doses (10 mg/kg twice daily). The daily dose should be increased every 2 weeks by increments of 20 mg/kg to the recommended daily dose of 60 mg/kg (30 mg/kg twice daily). The effectiveness of doses lower than 60 mg/kg/day has not been adequately studied. Patients with body weight ≤20 kg should be dosed with oral solution. Patients with body weight above 20 kg can be dosed with either tablets or oral solution [see Dosage and Administration (2.1)]. Only whole tablets should be administered.

2.5 Adult Patients with Impaired Renal Function

Levetiracetam tablets dosing must be individualized according to the patient’s renal function status. Recommended doses and adjustment for dose for adults are shown in Table 1. In order to calculate the dose recommended for patients with renal impairment, creatinine clearance adjusted for body surface area must be calculated. To do this an estimate of the patient’s creatinine clearance (CLcr) in mL/min must first be calculated using the following formula:

          [140-age (years)] x weight (kg)

CLcr= -----------------------------------------     (x 0.85 for female patients)

          72 x serum creatinine (mg/dL)

Then CLcr is adjusted for body surface area (BSA) as follows:

                                        CLcr (mL/min)

CLcr (mL/min/1.73m2)= ---------------------------- x 1.73

                                     BSA subject (m2)

Table 1: Dosing Adjustment Regimen For Adult Patients With Impaired Renal Function
Group Creatinine Clearance (mL/min/1.73m2) Dosage (mg)            Frequency Normal > 80 500 to 1,500 Every 12 hours Mild 50 to 80 500 to 1,000 Every 12 hours Moderate 30 to 50 250 to 750 Every 12 hours Severe < 30 250 to 500 Every 12 hours ESRD patients using dialysis ---- 500 to 1,0001 Every 24 hours1
1 Following dialysis, a 250 to 500 mg supplemental dose is recommended.
Ropinirole

Ropinirole

2.1 General Dosing Recommendations
Ropinirole extended-release tablets are taken once daily, with or without food [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. Tablets must be swallowed whole and must not be chewed, crushed, or divided. If a significant interruption in therapy with ropinirole extended-release tablets has occurred, retitration of therapy may be warranted.
2.2 Dosing for Parkinson’s Disease

The starting dose is 2 mg taken once daily for 1 to 2 weeks, followed by increases of 2 mg/day at 1-week or longer intervals as appropriate, based on therapeutic response and tolerability. The maximum recommended dose of ropinirole extended-release tablets is 24 mg/day.

In clinical trials, dosage was initiated at 2 mg/day and gradually titrated based on individual patient therapeutic response and tolerability. Doses greater than 24 mg/day have not been studied in clinical trials. Patients should be assessed for therapeutic response and tolerability at a minimal interval of 1 week or longer after each dose increment. Monitor patients during dose titration because too rapid a rate of titration may lead to dose selection that may not provide additional benefit, but that may increase the risk of adverse reactions [see Clinical Studies (14.2)]. Due to the flexible dosing design used in clinical trials, specific dose-response information could not be determined.

Ropinirole extended-release tablets should be discontinued gradually over a 7-day period.

Renal Impairment

No dose adjustment is necessary in patients with moderate renal impairment (creatinine clearance of 30 to 50 mL/min). The recommended initial dose of ropinirole extended-release tablets for patients with end-stage renal disease on hemodialysis is 2 mg once daily. Further dose escalations should be based on tolerability and need for efficacy. The recommended maximum total daily dose is 18 mg/day in patients receiving regular dialysis. Supplemental doses after dialysis are not required. The use of ropinirole extended-release tablets in patients with severe renal impairment without regular dialysis has not been studied.

2.3 Switching From Immediate-Release Ropinirole Tablets to Ropinirole Extended-Release Tablets

Patients may be switched directly from immediate-release ropinirole to ropinirole extended-release tablets. The initial dose of ropinirole extended-release tablets should most closely match the total daily dose of the immediate-release formulation of ropinirole, as shown in Table 1.

Table 1. Conversion from Immediate-Release Ropinirole Tablets to Ropinirole Extended-Release Tablets
Immediate-Release Ropinirole Tablets Total Daily Dose (mg) Ropinirole Extended-Release Tablets Total Daily Dose (mg) 0.75 to 2.25 2 3 to 4.5 4 6 6 7.5 to 9 8 12 12 15 16 18 18 21 20 24 24
Following conversion to ropinirole extended-release tablets, the dose may be adjusted depending on therapeutic response and tolerability [see Dosage and Administration (2.2)].

2.4 Effect of Gastrointestinal Transit Time on Medication Release

Ropinirole extended-release tablets are designed to release medication over a 24-hour period. If rapid gastrointestinal transit occurs, there may be risk of incomplete release of medication and medication residue being passed in the stool.
Cetirizine Hydrochlorid...

Cetirizine Hydrochloride

adults and children 6 years and over one 10 mg tablet once daily; do not take more than one 10 mg tablet in 24 hours. A 5 mg product may be appropriate for less severe symptoms. adults 65 years and over ask a doctor children under 6 years of age ask a doctor consumers with liver or kidney disease ask a doctor
Ranitidine Hydrochlorid...

Ranitidine Hydrochloride

Active Duodenal Ulcer:

The current recommended adult oral dosage of ranitidine for duodenal ulcer is 150 mg twice daily. An alternative dosage of 300 mg once daily after the evening meal or at bedtime can be used for patients in whom dosing convenience is important. The advantages of one treatment regimen compared to the other in a particular patient population have yet to be demonstrated (see Clinical Trials: Active Duodenal Ulcer). Smaller doses have been shown to be equally effective in inhibiting gastric acid secretion in US studies, and several foreign trials have shown that 100 mg b.i.d. is as effective as the 150 mg dose.

Antacid should be given as needed for relief of pain (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Pharmacokinetics).

Maintenance of Healing Duodenal Ulcers:

The current recommended adult oral dosage is 150 mg at bedtime.

Pathological Hypersecretory Conditions (such as Zollinger-Ellison syndrome):

The current recommended adult oral dosage is 150 mg twice a day. In some patients it may be necessary to administer ranitidine 150 mg doses more frequently. Dosages should be adjusted to individual patient needs, and should continue as long as clinically indicated. Dosages up to 6 g/day have been employed in patients with severe disease.

Benign Gastric Ulcer:

The current recommended adult oral dosage is 150 mg twice a day.

Maintenance of Healing of Gastric Ulcers:

The current recommended adult oral dosage is 150 mg at bedtime.

GERD:

The current recommended adult oral dosage is 150 mg twice a day.

Erosive Esophagitis:

The current recommended adult oral dosage is 150 mg four times a day.

Maintenance of Healing of Erosive Esophagitis :

The current recommended adult oral dosage is 150 mg twice a day.

Dosage Adjustment for Patients With Impaired Renal Function

On the basis of experience with a group of subjects with severely impaired renal function treated with ranitidine, the recommended dosage in patients with a creatinine clearance <50 mL per minute is 150 mg every 24 hours. Should the patient’s condition require, the frequency of dosing may be increased to every 12 hours or even further with caution. Hemodialysis reduces the level of circulating ranitidine. Ideally, the dosing schedule should be adjusted so that the timing of a scheduled dose coincides with the end of hemodialysis.

Elderly patients are more likely to have decreased renal function, therefore caution should be exercised in dose selection, and it may be useful to monitor renal function (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Pharmacokinetics: Geriatric Useand PRECAUTIONS: Geriatric Use).
Carvedilol

Carvedilol

Carvedilol tablets should be taken with food to slow the rate of absorption and reduce the incidence of orthostatic effects.

2.2 Left Ventricular Dysfunction Following Myocardial Infarction

DOSAGE MUST BE INDIVIDUALIZED AND MONITORED DURING UP-TITRATION. Treatment with carvedilol tablets may be started as an inpatient or outpatient and should be started after the patient is hemodynamically stable and fluid retention has been minimized. It is recommended that carvedilol tablets be started at 6.25 mg twice daily and increased after 3 to 10 days, based on tolerability, to 12.5 mg twice daily, then again to the target dose of 25 mg twice daily. A lower starting dose may be used (3.125 mg twice daily) and/or the rate of up-titration may be slowed if clinically indicated (e.g., due to low blood pressure or heart rate, or fluid retention). Patients should be maintained on lower doses if higher doses are not tolerated. The recommended dosing regimen need not be altered in patients who received treatment with an IV or oral β-blocker during the acute phase of the myocardial infarction.

2.3 Hypertension

DOSAGE MUST BE INDIVIDUALIZED. The recommended starting dose of carvedilol tablets is 6.25 mg twice daily. If this dose is tolerated, using standing systolic pressure measured about 1 hour after dosing as a guide, the dose should be maintained for 7 to 14 days, and then increased to 12.5 mg twice daily if needed, based on trough blood pressure, again using standing systolic pressure one hour after dosing as a guide for tolerance. This dose should also be maintained for 7 to 14 days and can then be adjusted upward to 25 mg twice daily if tolerated and needed. The full antihypertensive effect of carvedilol tablets is seen within 7 to 14 days. Total daily dose should not exceed 50 mg.

Concomitant administration with a diuretic can be expected to produce additive effects and exaggerate the orthostatic component of carvedilol action.

2.4 Hepatic Impairment

Carvedilol tablets should not be given to patients with severe hepatic impairment [see Contraindications (4)].
Lamotrigine

Lamotrigine

2.1 General Dosing Considerations

Rash: There are suggestions, yet to be proven, that the risk of severe, potentially life-threatening rash may be increased by (1) coadministration of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) with valproate, (2) exceeding the recommended initial dose of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible), or (3) exceeding the recommended dose escalation for lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible). However, cases have occurred in the absence of these factors [see Boxed Warning]. Therefore, it is important that the dosing recommendations be followed closely.

The risk of nonserious rash may be increased when the recommended initial dose and/or the rate of dose escalation of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) is exceeded and in patients with a history of allergy or rash to other AEDs.

It is recommended that lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) not be restarted in patients who discontinued due to rash associated with prior treatment with lamotrigine, unless the potential benefits clearly outweigh the risks. If the decision is made to restart a patient who has discontinued lamotrigine, the need to restart with the initial dosing recommendations should be assessed. The greater the interval of time since the previous dose, the greater consideration should be given to restarting with the initial dosing recommendations. If a patient has discontinued lamotrigine for a period of more than 5 half-lives, it is recommended that initial dosing recommendations and guidelines be followed. The half-life of lamotrigine is affected by other concomitant medications [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Lamotrigine Added to Drugs Known to Induce or Inhibit Glucuronidation: Drugs other than those listed in the Clinical Pharmacology section [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)] have not been systematically evaluated in combination with lamotrigine. Because lamotrigine is metabolized predominantly by glucuronic acid conjugation, drugs that are known to induce or inhibit glucuronidation may affect the apparent clearance of lamotrigine and doses of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) may require adjustment based on clinical response.

Target Plasma Levels for Patients with Epilepsy or Bipolar Disorder: A therapeutic plasma concentration range has not been established for lamotrigine. Dosing of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) should be based on therapeutic response [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Women Taking Estrogen-Containing Oral Contraceptives:

Starting Lamotrigine in Women Taking Estrogen-Containing Oral Contraceptives: Although estrogen-containing oral contraceptives have been shown to increase the clearance of lamotrigine [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)], no adjustments to the recommended dose-escalation guidelines for lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) should be necessary solely based on the use of estrogen-containing oral contraceptives. Therefore, dose escalation should follow the recommended guidelines for initiating adjunctive therapy with lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) based on the concomitant AED or other concomitant medications (see Table 1 or Table 5). See below for adjustments to maintenance doses of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) in women taking estrogen-containing oral contraceptives.

Adjustments to the Maintenance Dose of Lamotrigine in Women Taking Estrogen-Containing Oral Contraceptives:

(1) Taking Estrogen-Containing Oral Contraceptives: For women not taking carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone, or other drugs such as rifampin that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)], the maintenance dose of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) will in most cases need to be increased, by as much as 2-fold over the recommended target maintenance dose, in order to maintain a consistent lamotrigine plasma level [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

(2) Starting Estrogen-Containing Oral Contraceptives: In women taking a stable dose of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) and not taking carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone, or other drugs such as rifampin that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)], the maintenance dose will in most cases need to be increased by as much as 2-fold in order to maintain a consistent lamotrigine plasma level. The dose increases should begin at the same time that the oral contraceptive is introduced and continue, based on clinical response, no more rapidly than 50 to 100 mg/day every week. Dose increases should not exceed the recommended rate (see Table 1 or Table 5) unless lamotrigine plasma levels or clinical response support larger increases. Gradual transient increases in lamotrigine plasma levels may occur during the week of inactive hormonal preparation (“pill-free” week), and these increases will be greater if dose increases are made in the days before or during the week of inactive hormonal preparation. Increased lamotrigine plasma levels could result in additional adverse reactions, such as dizziness, ataxia, and diplopia. If adverse reactions attributable to lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) consistently occur during the “pill-free” week, dose adjustments to the overall maintenance dose may be necessary. Dose adjustments limited to the “pill-free” week are not recommended. For women taking lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) in addition to carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone, or other drugs such as rifampin that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)], no adjustment to the dose of lamotrigine tablets (chewable,dispersible) should be necessary.

(3) Stopping Estrogen-Containing Oral Contraceptives: For women not taking carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone, or other drugs such as rifampin that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)], the maintenance dose of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) will in most cases need to be decreased by as much as 50% in order to maintain a consistent lamotrigine plasma level. The decrease in dose of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) should not exceed 25% of the total daily dose per week over a 2-week period, unless clinical response or lamotrigine plasma levels indicate otherwise [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. For women taking lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) in addition to carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone, or other drugs such as rifampin that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)], no adjustment to the dose of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) should be necessary.

Women and Other Hormonal Contraceptive Preparations or Hormone Replacement Therapy: The effect of other hormonal contraceptive preparations or hormone replacement therapy on the pharmacokinetics of lamotrigine has not been systematically evaluated. It has been reported that ethinylestradiol, not progestogens, increased the clearance of lamotrigine up to 2-fold, and the progestin-only pills had no effect on lamotrigine plasma levels. Therefore, adjustments to the dosage of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) in the presence of progestogens alone will likely not be needed.

Patients with Hepatic Impairment: Experience in patients with hepatic impairment is limited. Based on a clinical pharmacology study in 24 patients with mild, moderate, and severe liver impairment [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)], the following general recommendations can be made. No dosage adjustment is needed in patients with mild liver impairment. Initial, escalation, and maintenance doses should generally be reduced by approximately 25% in patients with moderate and severe liver impairment without ascites and 50% in patients with severe liver impairment with ascites. Escalation and maintenance doses may be adjusted according to clinical response.

Patients with Renal Impairment: Initial doses of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) should be based on patients' concomitant medications (see Tables 1-3 or Table 5); reduced maintenance doses may be effective for patients with significant renal impairment [see Use in Specific Populations (8.7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. Few patients with severe renal impairment have been evaluated during chronic treatment with lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible). Because there is inadequate experience in this population, lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) should be used with caution in these patients.

Discontinuation Strategy:

Epilepsy: For patients receiving lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) in combination with other AEDs, a re-evaluation of all AEDs in the regimen should be considered if a change in seizure control or an appearance or worsening of adverse reactions is observed.

If a decision is made to discontinue therapy with lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible), a step-wise reduction of dose over at least 2 weeks (approximately 50% per week) is recommended unless safety concerns require a more rapid withdrawal [see Warnings and Precautions (5.9)].

Discontinuing carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone, or other drugs such as rifampin that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation should prolong the half-life of lamotrigine; discontinuing valproate should shorten the half-life of lamotrigine.

Bipolar Disorder: In the controlled clinical trials, there was no increase in the incidence, type, or severity of adverse reactions following abrupt termination of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible). In clinical trials in patients with Bipolar Disorder, 2 patients experienced seizures shortly after abrupt withdrawal of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible). However, there were confounding factors that may have contributed to the occurrence of seizures in these bipolar patients. Discontinuation of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) should involve a step-wise reduction of dose over at least 2 weeks (approximately 50% per week) unless safety concerns require a more rapid withdrawal [see Warnings and Precautions(5.9)].

2.2 Epilepsy - Adjunctive Therapy

mThis section provides specific dosing recommendations for patients greater than 12 years of age and patients 2 to 12 years of age. Within each of these age-groups, specific dosing recommendations are provided depending upon concomitant AED or other concomitant medications (Table 1 for patients greater than 12 years of age and Table 2 for patients 2 to 12 years of age). A weight-based dosing guide for patients 2 to 12 years of age on concomitant valproate is provided in Table 3.

Patients over 12 Years of Age: Recommended dosing guidelines are summarized in Table 1.

Table 1. Escalation Regimen for Lamotrigine in Patients Over 12 Years of Age With Epilepsy
   For Patients TAKING Valproatea For Patients NOT TAKING Carbamazepine, Phenytoin, Phenobarbital, Primidoneb, or Valproatea FFor Patients TAKING Carbamazepine, Phenytoin, Phenobarbital, or Primidoneb and NOT TAKING Valproatea Weeks 1 and 2 25 mg every other day 25 mg every day 50 mg/day Weeks 3 and 4 25 mg every day 50 mg/day 100 mg/day (in 2 divided doses) Weeks 5 onwards to maintenance Increase by 25 to 50 mg/day every 1 to 2 weeks Increase by 50 mg/day every 1 to 2 weeks Increase by100 mg/day every 1 to2 weeks. Usual Maintenance Dose 100 to 200 mg/day with valproate alone 100 to 400 mg/day with valproate and other drugs that induceglucuronidation (in 1 or 2 divided doses) 225 to 375 mg/day (in 2 divided doses) 300 to 500 mg/day (in 2 divided doses)
a     Valproate has been shown to inhibit glucuronidation and decrease the apparent clearance of    lamotrigine [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

b    These drugs induce lamotrigine glucuronidation and increase clearance [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. Other drugs which have similar effects include estrogen-containing oral contraceptives [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. Dosing recommendations for oral contraceptives can be found in General Dosing Considerations [see Dosage and Administration (2.1)]. Patients on rifampin or other drugs that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation and increase clearance, should follow the same dosing titration/maintenance regimen as that used with anticonvulsants that have this effect.

Patients 2 to 12 Years of Age: Recommended dosing guidelines are summarized in Table 2.

Smaller starting doses and slower dose escalations than those used in clinical trials are recommended because of the suggestion that the risk of rash may be decreased by smaller starting doses and slower dose escalations. Therefore, maintenance doses will take longer to reach in clinical practice than in clinical trials. It may take several weeks to months to achieve an individualized maintenance dose. Maintenance doses in patients weighing less than 30 kg, regardless of age or concomitant AED, may need to be increased as much as 50%, based on clinical response.

The smallest available strength of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) is 2 mg, and only whole tablets should be administered. If the calculated dose cannot be achieved using whole tablets, the dose should be rounded down to the nearest whole tablet [seeHow Supplied/Storage and Handling (16) and Medication Guide].

Table 2. Escalation Regimen for Lamotrigine in Patients 2 to 12 Years of Age With Epilepsy
For Patients TAKING Valproatea For Patients NOT TAKING Carbamazepine, Phenytoin, Phenobarbital, Primidoneb, or Valproatea For Patients TAKING Carbamazepine, Phenytoin, Phenobarbital, or Primidoneb and NOT TAKING Valproatea Weeks 1 and 2 0.15 mg/kg/day in 1 or 2 divided doses, rounded down to the nearest whole tablet (see Table 3 for weight based dosing guide) 0.3 mg/kg/day in 1 or 2 divided doses, rounded down to the nearest whole tablet 0.6 mg/kg/day in 2 divided doses, rounded down to the nearest whole tablet Weeks 3 and 4 0.3 mg/kg/day in 1 or 2 divided doses, rounded down to the nearest whole tablet (see Table 3 for weight based dosing guide) 0.6 mg/kg/day in 2 divided doses, rounded down to the nearest whole tablet 1.2 mg/kg/day in 2 divided doses, rounded down to the nearest whole tablet Weeks 5 onwards to maintenance The dose should be increased every 1 to 2 weeks as follows: calculate 0.3 mg/kg/day, round this amount down to the nearest whole tablet, and add this amount to the previously administered daily dose The dose should be increased every 1 to 2 weeks as follows: calculate 0.6 mg/kg/day, round this amount down to the nearest whole tablet, and add this amount to the previously administered daily dose The dose should be increased every 1 to 2 weeks as follows: calculate 1.2 mg/kg/day, round this amount down to the nearest whole tablet, and add this amount to the previously administered daily dose Usual Maintenance Dose 1 to 5 mg/kg/day (maximum 200 mg/day in 1 or 2 divided doses).1 to 3 mg/kg/day with valproate alone 4.5 to 7.5 mg/kg/day(maximum 300 mg/day in 2 divided doses) 5 to 15 mg/kg/day (maximum 400 mg/day in 2 divided doses) Maintenance dose in patients less than 30 kg May need to be increased by as much as 50%, based on clinical response May need to be increased by as much as 50%, based on clinical response May need to be increased by as much as 50%, based on clinical response
Note: Only whole tablets should be used for dosing.

a     Valproate has been shown to inhibit glucuronidation and decrease the apparent clearance of lamotrigine [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

b     These drugs induce lamotrigine glucuronidation and increase clearance [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. Other drugs which have similar effects include estrogen-containing oral contraceptives [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. Dosing recommendations for oral contraceptives can be found in General Dosing Considerations [see Dosage and Administration (2.1)]. Patients on rifampin, or other drugs that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation and increase clearance should follow the same dosing titration/maintenance regimen as that used with anticonvulsants that have this effect.

Table 3. The Initial Weight-Based Dosing Guide for Patients 2 to 12 Years Taking Valproate (Weeks 1 to 4) With Epilepsy
If the patient’s weight is Give this daily dose, using the most appropriate combination of lamotrigine 2-mg and 5-mg tablets Greater than And less than Weeks 1 and 2 Weeks 3 and 4 6.7 kg 14 kg 2 mg every other day 2 mg every day 14.1 kg 27 kg 2 mg every day 4 mg every day 27.1 kg 34 kg 4 mg every day 8 mg every day 34.1 kg 40 kg 5 mg every day 10 mg every day
Usual Adjunctive Maintenance Dose for Epilepsy: The usual maintenance doses identified in Tables 1 and 2 are derived from dosing regimens employed in the placebo-controlled adjunctive studies in which the efficacy of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) was established. In patients receiving multidrug regimens employing carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, or primidone without valproate, maintenance doses of adjunctive lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) as high as 700 mg/day have been used. In patients receiving valproate alone, maintenance doses of adjunctive lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) as high as 200 mg/day have been used. The advantage of using doses above those recommended in Tables 1 through 4 has not been established in controlled trials.

2.3 Epilepsy – Conversion from Adjunctive Therapy to Monotherapy

The goal of the transition regimen is to effect the conversion to monotherapy with lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) under conditions that ensure adequate seizure control while mitigating the risk of serious rash associated with the rapid titration of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible).

The recommended maintenance dose of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) as monotherapy is 500 mg/day given in 2 divided doses.

To avoid an increased risk of rash, the recommended initial dose and subsequent dose escalations of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) should not be exceeded [see Boxed Warning].

Conversion from Adjunctive Therapy with Carbamazepine, Phenytoin, Phenobarbital, or Primidone to Monotherapy with Lamotrigine: After achieving a dose of 500 mg/day of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) according to the guidelines in Table 1, the concomitant AED should be withdrawn by 20% decrements each week over a 4-week period. The regimen for the withdrawal of the concomitant AED is based on experience gained in the controlled monotherapy clinical trial.

Conversion from Adjunctive Therapy with Valproate to Monotherapy with Lamotrigine: The conversion regimen involves 4 steps outlined in Table 4.

Table 4. Conversion From Adjunctive Therapy With Valproate to Monotherapy With Lamotrigine in Patients ≥16 Years of Age with Epilepsy
Lamotrigine Valproate Step 1 Achieve a dose of 200 mg/day according to guidelines in Table 1 (if not already on 200 mg/day). Maintain previous stable dose. Step 2 Maintain at 200 mg/day. Decrease to 500 mg/day by decrements no greater than 500 mg/day/week and then maintain the dose of 500 mg/day for 1 week. Step 3 Increase to 300 mg/day and maintain for 1 week. Simultaneously decrease to 250 mg/day and maintain for 1 week. Step 4 Increase by 100 mg/day every week to achieve maintenance dose of 500 mg/day. Discontinue.
Conversion from Adjunctive Therapy with AEDs other than Carbamazepine, Phenytoin, Phenobarbital, Primidone, or Valproate to Monotherapy with Lamotrigine: No specific dosing guidelines can be provided for conversion to monotherapy with lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) with AEDs other than carbamazepine, phenobarbital, phenytoin, primidone, or valproate.

2.4 Bipolar Disorder

The goal of maintenance treatment with lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) is to delay the time to occurrence of mood episodes (depression, mania, hypomania, mixed episodes) in patients treated for acute mood episodes with standard therapy. The target dose of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) is 200 mg/day (100 mg/day in patients taking valproate, which decreases the apparent clearance of lamotrigine, and 400 mg/day in patients not taking valproate and taking either carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone, or other drugs such as rifampin that which increase the apparent clearance of lamotrigine). In the clinical trials, doses up to 400 mg/day as monotherapy were evaluated; however, no additional benefit was seen at 400 mg/day compared with 200 mg/day [see Clinical Studies (14.2)]. Accordingly, doses above 200 mg/day are not recommended. Treatment with lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) is introduced, based on concurrent medications, according to the regimen outlined in Table 5. If other psychotropic medications are withdrawn following stabilization, the dose of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) should be adjusted. For patients discontinuing valproate, the dose of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) should be doubled over a 2-week period in equal weekly increments (see Table 6). For patients discontinuing carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone, or or other drugs such as rifampin that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation, the dose of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) should remain constant for the first week and then should be decreased by half over a 2-week period in equal weekly decrements (see Table 6). The dose of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) may then be further adjusted to the target dose (200 mg) as clinically indicated.

If other drugs are subsequently introduced, the dose of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) may need to be adjusted. In particular, the introduction of valproate requires reduction in the dose of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

To avoid an increased risk of rash, the recommended initial dose and subsequent dose escalations of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) should not be exceeded [see Boxed Warning].

Table 5. Escalation Regimen for Lamotrigine for Patients With Bipolar Disorder
For Patients TAKING Valproatea For Patients NOT TAKING Carbamazepine, Phenytoin, Phenobarbital, Primidoneb or Valproatea For Patients TAKING Carbamazepine, Phenytoin, Phenobarbital, or Primidone and NOT TAKING Valproatea Weeks 1 and 2 25 mg every other day 25 mg daily 50 mg daily Weeks 3 and 4 25 mg daily 50 mg daily 100 mg daily, in divided doses Week 5 50 mg daily 100 mg daily 200 mg daily, in divided doses Week 6 100 mg daily 200 mg daily 300 mg daily, in divided doses Week 7 100 mg daily 200 mg daily up to 400 mg daily, in divided doses
a     Valproate has been shown to inhibit glucuronidation and decrease the apparent clearance of lamotrigine [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

b     These drugs induce lamotrigine glucuronidation and increase clearance [see Drug Interactions 7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. Other drugs which have similar effects include estrogen-containing oral contraceptives [see Drug Interactions 7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. Dosing recommendations for oral contraceptives can be found in General Dosing Considerations [see Dosage and Administration (2.1)]. Patients on rifampin, or other drugs that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation and increase clearance, should follow the same dosing titration/maintenance regimen as that used with anticonvulsants that have this effect.

Table 6. Dosage Adjustments to Lamotrigine for Patients With Bipolar Disorder Following Discontinuation of Psychotropic Medications
Discontinuation of Psychotropic Drugs (excluding Carbamazepine, Phenytoin, Phenobarbital, Primidoneb ,or Valproatea) After Discontinuation of Valproatea After Discontinuation of Carbamazepine, Phenytoin, Phenobarbital, or Primidoneb Current dose of lamotrigine (mg/day) 100 Current dose of lamotrigine (mg/day) 400 Week 1 Maintain current dose of lamotrigine 150 400 Week 2 Maintain current dose of lamotrigine 200 300 Week 3 onward Maintain current dose of lamotrigine 200 200
a     Valproate has been shown to inhibit glucuronidation and decrease the apparent clearance of lamotrigine [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

b     These drugs induce lamotrigine glucuronidation and increase clearance [see Drug Interactions 7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. Other drugs which have similar effects include estrogen-containing oral contraceptives [see Drug Interactions 7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. Dosing recommendations for oral contraceptives can be found in General Dosing Considerations [see Dosage and Administration (2.1)]. Patients on rifampin, or other drugs that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation and increase clearance, should follow the same dosing titration/maintenance regimen as that used with anticonvulsants that have this effect.

The benefit of continuing treatment in patients who had been stabilized in an 8- to 16-week open-label phase with lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) was established in 2 randomized, placebo-controlled clinical maintenance trials [see Clinical Studies(14.2)]. However, the optimal duration of treatment with lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) has not been established. Thus, patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

2.5 Administration of Lamotrigine Tablets (chewable, dispersible)

Lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) may be swallowed whole, chewed, or dispersed in water or diluted fruit juice. If the tablets are chewed, consume a small amount of water or diluted fruit juice to aid in swallowing.

To disperse lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible), add the tablets to a small amount of liquid (1 teaspoon, or enough to cover the medication). Approximately 1 minute later, when the tablets are completely dispersed, swirl the solution and consume the entire quantity immediately. No attempt should be made to administer partial quantities of the dispersed tablets.
Finasteride

Finasteride

Finasteride tablets may be administered with or without meals.

2.1 Monotherapy

The recommended dose of finasteride is one tablet (5 mg) taken once a day [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].

2.2 Combination with Alpha-Blocker

The recommended dose of finasteride is one tablet (5 mg) taken once a day in combination with the alpha-blocker doxazosin [see Clinical Studies (14.2)].
Lamotrigine

Lamotrigine

2.1 General Dosing Considerations

Rash: There are suggestions, yet to be proven, that the risk of severe, potentially life-threatening rash may be increased by (1) coadministration of lamotrigine tablets with valproate, (2) exceeding the recommended initial dose of lamotrigine tablets, or (3) exceeding the recommended dose escalation for lamotrigine tablets. However, cases have occurred in the absence of these factors [see Boxed Warning]. Therefore, it is important that the dosing recommendations be followed closely.

The risk of nonserious rash may be increased when the recommended initial dose and/or the rate of dose escalation of lamotrigine tablets is exceeded and in patients with a history of allergy or rash to other AEDs.

It is recommended that lamotrigine tablets not be restarted in patients who discontinued due to rash associated with prior treatment with lamotrigine, unless the potential benefits clearly outweigh the risks. If the decision is made to restart a patient who has discontinued lamotrigine, the need to restart with the initial dosing recommendations should be assessed. The greater the interval of time since the previous dose, the greater consideration should be given to restarting with the initial dosing recommendations. If a patient has discontinued lamotrigine for a period of more than 5 half-lives, it is recommended that initial dosing recommendations and guidelines be followed. The half-life of lamotrigine is affected by other concomitant medications [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Lamotrigine Added to Drugs Known to Induce or Inhibit Glucuronidation: Drugs other than those listed in the Clinical Pharmacology section [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)] have not been systematically evaluated in combination with lamotrigine. Because lamotrigine is metabolized predominantly by glucuronic acid conjugation, drugs that are known to induce or inhibit glucuronidation may affect the apparent clearance of lamotrigine and doses of lamotrigine tablets may require adjustment based on clinical response.

Target Plasma Levels for Patients with Epilepsy or Bipolar Disorder: A therapeutic plasma concentration range has not been established for lamotrigine. Dosing of lamotrigine tablets should be based on therapeutic response [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Women Taking Estrogen-Containing Oral Contraceptives: Starting Lamotrigine in Women Taking Estrogen-Containing Oral Contraceptives: Although estrogen-containing oral contraceptives have been shown to increase the clearance of lamotrigine [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)], no adjustments to the recommended dose-escalation guidelines for lamotrigine tablets should be necessary solely based on the use of estrogen-containing oral contraceptives. Therefore, dose escalation should follow the recommended guidelines for initiating adjunctive therapy with lamotrigine tablets based on the concomitant AED or other concomitant medications (see Table 1 or Table 5). See below for adjustments to maintenance doses of lamotrigine tablets in women taking estrogen-containing oral contraceptives.

Adjustments to the Maintenance Dose of Lamotrigine in Women Taking Estrogen-Containing Oral Contraceptives:(1) Taking Estrogen-Containing Oral Contraceptives: For women not taking carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone, or other drugs such as rifampin that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)],   the maintenance dose of lamotrigine tablets will in most cases need to be increased, by as much as 2-fold over the recommended target maintenance dose, in order to maintain a consistent lamotrigine plasma level [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

(2) Starting Estrogen-Containing Oral Contraceptives: In women taking a stable dose of lamotrigine tablets and not taking carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone, or other drugs such as rifampin that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)],   the maintenance dose will in most cases need to be increased by as much as 2-fold in order to maintain a consistent lamotrigine plasma level. The dose increases should begin at the same time that the oral contraceptive is introduced and continue, based on clinical response, no more rapidly than 50 to 100 mg/day every week. Dose increases should not exceed the recommended rate (see Table 1 or Table 5) unless lamotrigine plasma levels or clinical response support larger increases. Gradual transient increases in lamotrigine plasma levels may occur during the week of inactive hormonal preparation (“pill-free” week), and these increases will be greater if dose increases are made in the days before or during the week of inactive hormonal preparation. Increased lamotrigine plasma levels could result in additional adverse reactions, such as dizziness, ataxia, and diplopia. If adverse reactions attributable to lamotrigine tablets consistently occur during the “pill-free” week, dose adjustments to the overall maintenance dose may be necessary. Dose adjustments limited to the “pill-free” week are not recommended. For women taking lamotrigine tablets in addition to carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone, or other drugs such as rifampin that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)],  no adjustment to the dose of lamotrigine tablets should be necessary.

(3) Stopping Estrogen-Containing Oral Contraceptives: For women not taking carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone, or other drugs such as rifampin that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)], the maintenance dose of lamotrigine tablets will in most cases need to be decreased by as much as 50% in order to maintain a consistent lamotrigine plasma level. The decrease in dose of lamotrigine tablets should not exceed 25% of the total daily dose per week over a 2-week period, unless clinical response or lamotrigine plasma levels indicate otherwise [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. For women taking lamotrigine tablets in addition to carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone, or other drugs such as rifampin that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)], no adjustment to the dose of lamotrigine tablets should be necessary.

Women and Other Hormonal Contraceptive Preparations or Hormone Replacement Therapy: The effect of other hormonal contraceptive preparations or hormone replacement therapy on the pharmacokinetics of lamotrigine has not been systematically evaluated. It has been reported that ethinylestradiol, not progestogens, increased the clearance of lamotrigine up to 2-fold, and the progestin-only pills had no effect on lamotrigine plasma levels. Therefore, adjustments to the dosage of lamotrigine tablets in the presence of progestogens alone will likely not be needed.

Patients with Hepatic Impairment: Experience in patients with hepatic impairment is limited. Based on a clinical pharmacology study in 24 patients with mild, moderate, and severe liver impairment [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)], the following general recommendations can be made. No dosage adjustment is needed in patients with mild liver impairment. Initial, escalation, and maintenance doses should generally be reduced by approximately 25% in patients with moderate and severe liver impairment without ascites and 50% in patients with severe liver impairment with ascites. Escalation and maintenance doses may be adjusted according to clinical response.

Patients with Renal Impairment: Initial doses of lamotrigine tablets should be based on patients' concomitant medications (see Tables 1-3 or Table 5); reduced maintenance doses may be effective for patients with significant renal impairment [see Use in Specific Populations (8.7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. Few patients with severe renal impairment have been evaluated during chronic treatment with lamotrigine tablets. Because there is inadequate experience in this population, lamotrigine tablets should be used with caution in these patients.

Discontinuation Strategy: Epilepsy: For patients receiving lamotrigine tablets in combination with other AEDs, a re-evaluation of all AEDs in the regimen should be considered if a change in seizure control or an appearance or worsening of adverse reactions is observed.

If a decision is made to discontinue therapy with lamotrigine tablets, a step-wise reduction of dose over at least 2 weeks (approximately 50% per week) is recommended unless safety concerns require a more rapid withdrawal [see Warnings and Precautions (5.9)].

Discontinuing carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone or other drugs such as rifampin that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation should prolong the half-life of lamotrigine; discontinuing valproate should shorten the half-life of lamotrigine.

Bipolar Disorder: In the controlled clinical trials, there was no increase in the incidence, type, or severity of adverse reactions following abrupt termination of lamotrigine tablets. In clinical trials in patients with Bipolar Disorder, 2 patients experienced seizures shortly after abrupt withdrawal of lamotrigine tablets. However, there were confounding factors that may have contributed to the occurrence of seizures in these bipolar patients. Discontinuation of lamotrigine tablets should involve a step-wise reduction of dose over at least 2 weeks (approximately 50% per week) unless safety concerns require a more rapid withdrawal [see Warnings and Precautions (5.9)].

2.2 Epilepsy - Adjunctive Therapy

This section provides specific dosing recommendations for patients greater than 12 years of age and patients 2 to 12 years of age. Within each of these age-groups, specific dosing recommendations are provided depending upon concomitant AED or other concomitant medications (Table 1 for patients greater than 12 years of age and Table 2 for patients 2 to 12 years of age). A weight-based dosing guide for patients 2 to 12 years of age on concomitant valproate is provided in Table 3.

Patients Over 12 Years of Age: Recommended dosing guidelines are summarized in Table 1.

Table 1. Escalation Regimen for Lamotrigine in Patients Over 12 Years of Age With Epilepsy
     For Patients TAKING Valproate a For Patients NOT TAKING Carbamazepine, Phenytoin, Phenobarbital, Primidoneb, or Valproatea For Patients TAKING Carbamazepine, Phenytoin, Phenobarbital, or Primidoneb and NOT TAKING Valproatea Weeks 1 and 2 25 mg every other day 25 mg every day 50 mg/day Weeks 3 and 4 25 mg every day 50 mg/day 100 mg/day (in 2 divided doses) Weeks 5 onwards to maintenance Increase by 25 to 50 mg/day every 1 to 2 weeks Increase by 50 mg/day every 1 to 2 weeks Increase by 100 mg/day every 1 to 2 weeks. Usual maintenance dose 100 to 200 mg/day with valproate alone 100 to 400 mg/day with valproate and other drugs that induceglucuronication (in 1 or 2 divided doses) 225 to 375 mg/day(in 2 divided doses) 300 to 500 mg/day(in 2 divided doses)
a Valproate has been shown to inhibit glucuronidation and decrease the apparent clearance of    lamotrigine [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

b   These drugs induce glucuronidation and increase clearance [see Drug Interactions (7) Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. Other drugs, that have similar effects include estrogen-containing oral contraceptives [see Drug Interactions (7),Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Dosing recommendations for oral contraceptives can be found in General Dosing Considerations [see Dosage and Administration (2.1)]. Patients on rifampin or other drugs that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation and increase clearance, should follow the same dosing titration/maintenance regimen as that used with anticonvulsants that have this effect..

Patients 2 to 12 Years of Age: Recommended dosing guidelines are summarized in Table 2. Smaller starting doses and slower dose escalations than those used in clinical trials are recommended because of the suggestion that the risk of rash may be decreased by smaller starting doses and slower dose escalations. Therefore, maintenance doses will take longer to reach in clinical practice than in clinical trials. It may take several weeks to months to achieve an individualized maintenance dose. Maintenance doses in patients weighing less than 30 kg, regardless of age or concomitant AED, may need to be increased as much as 50%, based on clinical response.

Table 2. Escalation Regimen for Lamotrigine in Patients 2 to 12 Years of Age With Epilepsy
For Patients TAKING Valproatea For Patients NOT TAKING Carbamazepine, Phenytoin, Phenobarbital, Primidoneb, or Valproatea For Patients TAKING Carbamazepine, Phenytoin, Phenobarbital, or Primidoneb and NOT TAKING Valproatea Weeks 1 and 2 0.15 mg/kg/day in 1 or 2 divided doses, rounded down to the nearest whole tablet (see Table 3 for weight-based dosing guide) 0.3 mg/kg/day in 1 or 2 divided doses, rounded down to the nearest whole tablet 0.6 mg/kg/dayin 2 divided doses, rounded down to the nearest whole tablet Weeks 3 and 4 0.3 mg/kg/dayin 1 or 2 divided doses, rounded down to the nearest whole tablet (see Table 3 for weight-based dosing guide) 0.6 mg/kg/dayin 2 divided doses, rounded down to the nearest whole tablet 1.2 mg/kg/dayin 2 divided doses, rounded down to the nearest whole tablet Weeks 5 onwards to maintenance The dose should be increased every 1 to 2 weeks as follows: calculate 0.3 mg/kg/day, round this amount down to the nearest whole tablet, and add this amount to the previously administered daily dose The dose should be increased every 1 to 2 weeks as follows: calculate 0.6 mg/kg/day, round this amount down to the nearest whole tablet, and add this amount to the previously administered daily dose The dose should be increased every 1 to 2 weeks as follows: calculate 1.2 mg/kg/day, round this amount down to the nearest whole tablet, and add this amount to the previously administered daily dose Usual maintenance dose 1 to 5 mg/kg/day(maximum 200 mg/day in 1 or 2 divided doses).1 to 3 mg/kg/day with valproate alone 4.5 to 7.5 mg/kg/day(maximum 300 mg/day in 2 divided doses) 5 to 15 mg/kg/day (maximum 400 mg/day in 2 divided doses) Maintenance dose in patients less than 30 kg May need to be increased by as such much as 50%, based on clinical response May need to be increased by as much as 50%, based on clinical response May need to be increased by as much as 50%, based on clinical response
Note: Only whole tablets should be used for dosing.

a    Valproate has been shown to inhibit glucuronidation and decrease the apparent clearance of lamotrigine [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

b    These drugs induce glucuronidation and increase clearance [see Drug Interactions (7)Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. Other drugs, that have similar effects include estrogen-containing oral contraceptives and rifampin [see Drug Interactions (7),Clinical Pharmacology Pharmacokinetics (12.3)]. Dosing recommendations for oral contraceptives can be found in General Dosing Considerations [see Dosage and Administration (2.1)]. Patients on rifampin or other drugs that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation and increase clearance, should follow the same dosing titration/maintenance regimen as that used with anticonvulsants that have this effect..

Table 3. The Initial Weight-Based Dosing Guide for Patients 2 to 12 Years Taking Valproate (Weeks 1 to 4) With Epilepsy
If the patient’s weight is Give this daily dose, using the most appropriate combination of lamotrigine 2 mg and 5 mg tablets Greater than And less than Weeks 1 and 2 Weeks 3 and 4 6.7 kg 14 kg 2 mg every other day 2 mg every day 14.1 kg 27 kg 2 mg every day 4 mg every day 27.1 kg 34 kg 4 mg every day 8 mg every day 34.1 kg 40 kg 5 mg every day 10 mg every day
Usual Adjunctive Maintenance Dose for Epilepsy: The usual maintenance doses identified in Tables 1 and 2 are derived from dosing regimens employed in the placebo-controlled adjunctive studies in which the efficacy of lamotrigine tablets was established. In patients receiving multidrug regimens employing carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, or primidone without valproate, maintenance doses of adjunctive lamotrigine tablets as high as 700 mg/day have been used. In patients receiving valproate alone, maintenance doses of adjunctive lamotrigine tablets as high as 200 mg/day have been used. The advantage of using doses above those recommended in Tables 1 through 4 has not been established in controlled trials.

2.3 Epilepsy - Conversion from Adjunctive Therapy to Monotherapy

The goal of the transition regimen is to effect the conversion to monotherapy with lamotrigine tablets under conditions that ensure adequate seizure control while mitigating the risk of serious rash associated with the rapid titration of lamotrigine tablets.

The recommended maintenance dose of lamotrigine tablets as monotherapy is 500 mg/day given in 2 divided doses.

To avoid an increased risk of rash, the recommended initial dose and subsequent dose escalations of lamotrigine tablets should not be exceeded [see Boxed Warning].

Conversion from Adjunctive Therapy with Carbamazepine, Phenytoin, Phenobarbital, or Primidone to Monotherapy with Lamotrigine: After achieving a dose of 500 mg/day of lamotrigine tablets according to the guidelines in Table 1, the concomitant AED should be withdrawn by 20% decrements each week over a 4-week period. The regimen for the withdrawal of the concomitant AED is based on experience gained in the controlled monotherapy clinical trial.

Conversion from Adjunctive Therapy with Valproate to Monotherapy with Lamotrigine: The conversion regimen involves 4 steps outlined in Table 4.

Table 4. Conversion From Adjunctive Therapy With Valproate to Monotherapy With Lamotrigine in Patients ≥16 Years of Age with Epilepsy
Lamotrigine Valproate Step 1 Achieve a dose of 200 mg/day according to guidelines in Table 1 (if not already on 200 mg/day). Maintain previous stable dose. Step 2 Maintain at 200 mg/day. Decrease to 500 mg/day by decrements no greater than 500 mg/day/week and then maintain the dose of 500 mg/day for 1 week. Step 3 Increase to 300 mg/day and maintain for 1 week. Simultaneously decrease to 250 mg/day and maintain for 1 week. Step 4 Increase by 100 mg/day every week to achieve maintenance dose of 500 mg/day. Discontinue.
Conversion from Adjunctive Therapy with Antiepileptic Drugs other than Carbamazepine, Phenytoin, Phenobarbital, Primidone, or Valproate to Monotherapy with Lamotrigine: No specific dosing guidelines can be provided for conversion to monotherapy with lamotrigine tablets with AEDs other than carbamazepine, phenobarbital, phenytoin, primidone, or valproate.

2.4 Bipolar Disorder

The goal of maintenance treatment with lamotrigine tablets is to delay the time to occurrence of mood episodes (depression, mania, hypomania, mixed episodes) in patients treated for acute mood episodes with standard therapy. The target dose of lamotrigine tablets is 200 mg/day (100 mg/day in patients taking valproate, which decreases the apparent clearance of lamotrigine, and 400 mg/day in patients not taking valproate and taking either carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone, or other drugs such as rifampin that increase the apparent clearance of lamotrigine). In the clinical trials, doses up to 400 mg/day as monotherapy were evaluated; however, no additional benefit was seen at 400 mg/day compared with 200 mg/day [see Clinical Studies (14.2)]. Accordingly, doses above 200 mg/day are not recommended. Treatment with lamotrigine tablets is introduced, based on concurrent medications, according to the regimen outlined in Table 5. If other psychotropic medications are withdrawn following stabilization, the dose of lamotrigine tablets should be adjusted. For patients discontinuing valproate, the dose of lamotrigine tablets should be doubled over a 2-week period in equal weekly increments (see Table 6). For patients discontinuing carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone, or other drugs such as rifampin that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation, the dose of lamotrigine tablets should remain constant for the first week and then should be decreased by half over a 2-week period in equal weekly decrements (see Table 6). The dose of lamotrigine tablets may then be further adjusted to the target dose (200 mg) as clinically indicated.

If other drugs are subsequently introduced, the dose of lamotrigine tablets may need to be adjusted. In particular, the introduction of valproate requires reduction in the dose of lamotrigine tablets [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

To avoid an increased risk of rash, the recommended initial dose and subsequent dose escalations of lamotrigine tablets should not be exceeded [see Boxed Warning].

Table 5. Escalation Regimen for Lamotrigine for Patients with Bipolar Disorder
For Patients TAKING Valproatea For Patients NOT TAKING Carbamazepine, Phenytoin, Phenobarbital, Primidoneb, Valproatea For Patients TAKING Carbamazepine, Phenytoin, Phenobarbital, or Primidoneb, and NOT TAKING Valproatea Weeks 1 and 2 25 mg every other day 25 mg daily 50 mg daily Weeks 3 and 4 25 mg daily 50 mg daily 100 mg daily, in divided doses Week 5 50 mg daily 100 mg daily 200 mg daily, in divided doses Week 6 100 mg daily 200 mg daily 300 mg daily, in divided doses Week 7 100 mg daily 200 mg daily up to 400 mg daily, in divided doses
a Valproate has been shown to inhibit glucuronidation and decrease the apparent clearance of lamotrigine [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

b These drugs induce lamotrigine glucuronidation and increase clearance [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. Other drugs that have similar effects include estrogen containing oral contraceptives [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. Dosing recommendations for oral contraceptives can be found in General Dosing Considerations [see Dosage and Administration (2.1)]. Patients on rifampin, or other drugs that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation and increase clearance, should follow the same dosing titration/maintenance regimen as that used with anticonvulsants that have this effect.

Table 6. Dosage Adjustments to Lamotrigine for Patients with Bipolar Disorder Following Discontinuation of Psychotropic Medications
Discontinuation of Psychotropic Drugs (excluding Carbamazepine, Phenytoin, Phenobarbital, Primidoneb, or Valproatea) After Discontinuation of Valproatea After Discontinuation of Valproatea Current dose of lamotrigine (mg/day) 100 Current dose of lamotrigine (mg/day) 400 Week 1 Maintain current dose of lamotrigine 150 400 Week 2 Maintain current dose of lamotrigine 200 300 Week 3 onward Maintain current dose of lamotrigine 200 200
a Valproate has been shown to inhibit glucuronidation and decrease the apparent clearance of lamotrigine [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

b These drugs induce lamotrigine glucuronidation and increase clearance [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. Other drugs that have similar effects include estrogen containing oral contraceptives [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. Dosing recommendations for oral contraceptives can be found in General Dosing Considerations [see Dosage and Administration (2.1)]. Patients on rifampin, or other drugs that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation and increase clearance, should follow the same dosing titration/maintenance regimen as that used with anticonvulsants that have this effect.

The benefit of continuing treatment in patients who had been stabilized in an 8- to 16-week open-label phase with lamotrigine tablets was established in 2 randomized, placebo-controlled clinical maintenance trials [see Clinical Studies (14.2)]. However, the optimal duration of treatment with lamotrigine tablets has not been established. Thus, patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.
Terbinafine Hydrochlori...

Terbinafine Hydrochloride

Fingernail onychomycosis: One 250 mg tablet once daily for 6 weeks.

Toenail onychomycosis: One 250 mg tablet once daily for 12 weeks.

The optimal clinical effect is seen some months after mycological cure and cessation of treatment. This is related to the period required for outgrowth of healthy nail.
Omeprazole Magnesium

Omeprazole Magnesium

• for adults 18 years of age and older

• this product is to be used once a day (every 24 hours), every day for 14 days

• it may take 1 to 4 days for full effect; some people get complete relief of symptoms within 24 hours

14- day Course of Treatment

• swallow 1 capsule with a glass of water before eating in the morning

• take every day for 14 days

• do not take more than 1 capsule a day

• do not use for more than 14 days unless directed by your doctor

• swallow whole. Do not chew or crush capsules

Repeated 14-Day Courses (if needed)

• you may repeat a 14-day course every 4 months

• do not take for more than 14 days or more often than every 4 months unless directed by a doctor

• children under 18 years of age: ask a doctor. Heartburn in children may sometimes be caused by a serious condition.
Lansoprazole

Lansoprazole

adults 18 years of age and older this product is to be used once a day (every 24 hours), every day for 14 days it may take 1 to 4 days for full effect, although some people get complete relief of symptoms within 24 hours
14-Day Course of Treatment
swallow 1 capsule with a glass of water before eating in the morning take every day for 14 days do not take more than 1 capsule a days swallow whole. Do not crush or chew capsules. do not use for more than 14 days unless directed by your doctor
Repeated 14-Day Courses (if needed)
you may repeat a 14-day course every 4 months do not take for more than 14 days or more often than every 4 months unless directed by a doctor children under 18 years of age: ask a doctor before use. Heartburn in children may sometimes be caused by a serious condition.
Donepezil Hydrochloride...

Donepezil Hydrochloride

Donepezil hydrochloride tablets should be taken in the evening, just prior to retiring.

Donepezil hydrochloride tablets can be taken with or without food.

2.1.      Mild to Moderate Alzheimer’s Disease

The dosages of donepezil hydrochloride shown to be effective in controlled clinical trials are 5 mg and 10 mg administered once per day.

The higher dose of 10 mg did not provide a statistically significantly greater clinical benefit than 5 mg. There is a suggestion, however, based upon order of group mean scores and dose trend analyses of data from these clinical trials, that a daily dose of 10 mg of donepezil hydrochloride might provide additional benefit for some patients. Accordingly, whether or not to employ a dose of 10 mg is a matter of prescriber and patient preference.

2.2.     Severe Alzheimer’s Disease

Donepezil hydrochloride tablets has been shown to be effective in controlled clinical trials at doses of 10 mg administered once daily.

2.3.      Titration

The recommended starting dose of donepezil hydrochloride tablets is 5 mg once daily. Evidence from the controlled trials in mild to moderate Alzheimer’s disease indicates that the 10 mg dose, with a one week titration, is likely to be associated with a higher incidence of cholinergic adverse events compared to the 5 mg dose. In open-label trials using a 6 week titration, the type and frequency of these same adverse events were similar between the 5 mg and 10 mg dose groups. Therefore, because donepezil hydrochloride steady state is achieved about 15 days after it is started and because the incidence of untoward effects may be influenced by the rate of dose escalation, a dose of 10 mg should not be administered until patients have been on a daily dose of 5 mg for 4 to 6 weeks.
Sildenafil

Sildenafil

2.1 Sildenafil Tablets

The recommended dose of sildenafil tablets is 20 mg three times a day. Administer sildenafil doses 4 to 6 hours apart.

In the clinical trial no greater efficacy was achieved with the use of higher doses. Treatment with doses higher than 20 mg three times a day is not recommended.
Amlodipine Besylate And...

Amlodipine Besylate And Benazepril Hydrochloride

2.1 General Considerations

The recommended initial dose of amlodipine besylate and benazepril hydrochloride capsules is 1 capsule of amlodipine 2.5 mg/benazepril 10 mg orally once-daily.

It is usually appropriate to begin therapy with amlodipine besylate and benazepril hydrochloride capsules only after a patient has either (a) failed to achieve the desired antihypertensive effect with amlodipine or benazepril monotherapy, or (b) demonstrated inability to achieve adequate antihypertensive effect with amlodipine therapy without developing edema.

The antihypertensive effect of amlodipine besylate and benazepril hydrochloride capsules is largely attained within 2 weeks. If blood pressure remains uncontrolled, the dose may be titrated up to amlodipine 10 mg/benazepril 40 mg once-daily. The dosing should be individualized and adjusted according to the patient’s clinical response.

Amlodipine is an effective treatment of hypertension in once-daily doses of 2.5 mg to 10 mg while benazepril is effective in doses of 10 mg to 80 mg. In clinical trials of amlodipine/benazepril combination therapy using amlodipine doses of 2.5 mg to 10 mg and benazepril doses of 10 mg to 40 mg, the antihypertensive effects increased with increasing dose of amlodipine in all patient groups, and the effects increased with increasing dose of benazepril in nonblack groups.

2.2 Dosage Adjustment in Renal Impairment

Renal Impairment: Amlodipine besylate and benazepril hydrochloride capsules are not recommended in patients with creatinine clearance (CrCl) less than or equal to 30 mL/min. No dose adjustment of amlodipine besylate and benazepril hydrochloride capsules is required in patients with CrCl greater than 30 mL/min/1.73m2 (serum creatinine roughly less than or equal to 3 mg/dL or 265 micromol/L). [see Warnings and Precautions (5.7), Use in Specific Populations (8.7), and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.3 Replacement Therapy

Amlodipine besylate and benazepril hydrochloride capsules may be substituted for the titrated components.
Amlodipine Besylate And...

Amlodipine Besylate And Benazepril Hydrochloride

2.1 General Considerations

The recommended initial dose of amlodipine besylate and benazepril hydrochloride capsules is 1 capsule of amlodipine 2.5 mg/benazepril 10 mg orally once-daily.

It is usually appropriate to begin therapy with amlodipine besylate and benazepril hydrochloride capsules only after a patient has either (a) failed to achieve the desired antihypertensive effect with amlodipine or benazepril monotherapy, or (b) demonstrated inability to achieve adequate antihypertensive effect with amlodipine therapy without developing edema.

The antihypertensive effect of amlodipine besylate and benazepril hydrochloride capsules is largely attained within 2 weeks. If blood pressure remains uncontrolled, the dose may be titrated up to amlodipine 10 mg/benazepril 40 mg once-daily. The dosing should be individualized and adjusted according to the patient’s clinical response.

Amlodipine is an effective treatment of hypertension in once-daily doses of 2.5 mg to 10 mg while benazepril is effective in doses of 10 mg to 80 mg. In clinical trials of amlodipine/benazepril combination therapy using amlodipine doses of 2.5 mg to 10 mg and benazepril doses of 10 mg to 40 mg, the antihypertensive effects increased with increasing dose of amlodipine in all patient groups, and the effects increased with increasing dose of benazepril in nonblack groups.

2.2 Dosage Adjustment in Renal Impairment

Renal Impairment: Amlodipine besylate and benazepril hydrochloride capsules are not recommended in patients with creatinine clearance (CrCl) less than or equal to 30 mL/min. No dose adjustment of amlodipine besylate and benazepril hydrochloride capsules is required in patients with CrCl greater than 30 mL/min/1.73m2 (serum creatinine roughly less than or equal to 3 mg/dL or 265 micromol/L). [see Warnings and Precautions (5.7), Use in Specific Populations (8.7), and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.3 Replacement Therapy

Amlodipine besylate and benazepril hydrochloride capsules may be substituted for the titrated components.
Thiothixene

Thiothixene

2.1 General Dosing Information

The patient should be placed on a standard cholesterol-lowering diet before receiving pravastatin sodium tablets and should continue on this diet during treatment with pravastatin sodium tablets [see NCEP Treatment Guidelines for details on dietary therapy].

2.2 Adult Patients

The recommended starting dose is 40 mg once daily. If a daily dose of 40 mg does not achieve desired cholesterol levels, 80 mg once daily is recommended. In patients with significant renal impairment, a starting dose of 10 mg daily is recommended. Pravastatin sodium tablets can be administered orally as a single dose at any time of the day, with or without food. Since the maximal effect of a given dose is seen within 4 weeks, periodic lipid determinations should be performed at this time and dosage adjusted according to the patient’s response to therapy and established treatment guidelines.

2.3 Pediatric Patients

Children (Ages 8 to 13 Years, Inclusive)

The recommended dose is 20 mg once daily in children 8 to 13 years of age. Doses greater than20 mg have not been studied in this patient population.

Adolescents (Ages 14 to 18 Years)

The recommended starting dose is 40 mg once daily in adolescents 14 to 18 years of age. Doses greater than 40 mg have not been studied in this patient population.

Children and adolescents treated with pravastatin should be reevaluated in adulthood and appropriate changes made to their cholesterol-lowering regimen to achieve adult goals for LDL-C [see Indications and Usage (1.2)].

2.4 Concomitant Lipid-Altering Therapy

Pravastatin sodium tablets may be used with bile acid resins. When administering a bile-acid-binding resin (e.g., cholestyramine, colestipol) and pravastatin, pravastatin sodium tablets should be given either 1 hour or more before or at least 4 hours following the resin. [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3).]

2.5 Dosage in Patients Taking Cyclosporine

In patients taking immunosuppressive drugs such as cyclosporine concomitantly with pravastatin, therapy should begin with 10 mg of pravastatin sodium once-a-day at bedtime and titration to higher doses should be done with caution. Most patients treated with this combination received a maximum pravastatin sodium dose of 20 mg/day. In patients taking cyclosporine, therapy should be limited to 20 mg of pravastatin sodium once daily [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1) and Drug Interactions (7.1)].

2.6 Dosage in Patients Taking Clarithromycin

In patients taking clarithromycin, therapy should be limited to 40 mg of pravastatin sodium once daily [see Drug Interactions (7.2)].
Atorvastatin Calcium

Atorvastatin Calcium

2.1 Hyperlipidemia (Heterozygous Familial and Nonfamilial) and Mixed Dyslipidemia (Fredrickson Types IIa and IIb)

The recommended starting dose of atorvastatin calcium tablets is 10 or 20 mg once daily. Patients who require a large reduction in LDL-C (more than 45%) may be started at 40 mg once daily. The dosage range of atorvastatin calcium tablets is 10 to 80 mg once daily. Atorvastatin calcium tablets can be administered as a single dose at any time of the day, with or without food. The starting dose and maintenance doses of atorvastatin calcium tablets should be individualized according to patient characteristics such as goal of therapy and response (see current NCEP Guidelines). After initiation and/or upon titration of atorvastatin calcium tablets, lipid levels should be analyzed within 2 to 4 weeks and dosage adjusted accordingly.

2.2 Heterozygous Familial Hypercholesterolemia in Pediatric Patients (10 to 17 years of age)

The recommended starting dose of atorvastatin calcium tablets is 10 mg/day; the maximum recommended dose is 20 mg/day (doses greater than 20 mg have not been studied in this patient population). Doses should be individualized according to the recommended goal of therapy [see current NCEP Pediatric Panel Guidelines, Clinical Pharmacology (12), and Indications and Usage (1.2)]. Adjustments should be made at intervals of 4 weeks or more.

2.3 Homozygous Familial Hypercholesterolemia

The dosage of atorvastatin calcium tablets in patients with homozygous FH is 10 to 80 mg daily. Atorvastatin calcium tablets should be used as an adjunct to other lipid-lowering treatments (e.g., LDL apheresis) in these patients or if such treatments are unavailable.

2.4 Concomitant Lipid-Lowering Therapy

Atorvastatin calcium tablets may be used with bile acid resins. The combination of HMG-CoA reductase inhibitors (statins) and fibrates should generally be used with caution [see Warnings and Precautions, Skeletal Muscle (5.1), Drug Interactions (7)].

2.5 Dosage in Patients with Renal Impairment

Renal disease does not affect the plasma concentrations nor LDL-C reduction of atorvastatin calcium tablets; thus, dosage adjustment in patients with renal dysfunction is not necessary [see Warnings and Precautions, Skeletal Muscle (5.1), Clinical Pharmacology, Pharmacokinetics (12.3)].

2.6 Dosage in Patients Taking Cyclosporine, Clarithromycin, Itraconazole, or Certain Protease Inhibitors

In patients taking cyclosporine or the HIV protease inhibitors (tipranavir plus ritonavir) or the hepatitis C protease inhibitor (telaprevir), therapy with atorvastatin calcium tablets should be avoided. In patients with HIV taking lopinavir plus ritonavir, caution should be used when prescribing atorvastatin calcium tablets and the lowest dose necessary employed. In patients taking clarithromycin, itraconazole, or in patients with HIV taking a combination of saquinavir plus ritonavir, darunavir plus ritonavir, fosamprenavir, or fosamprenavir plus ritonavir, therapy with atorvastatin calcium tablets should be limited to 20 mg, and appropriate clinical assessment is recommended to ensure that the lowest dose necessary of atorvastatin calcium is employed. In patients taking the HIV protease inhibitor nelfinavir or the hepatitis C protease inhibitor boceprevir, therapy with atorvastatin calcium tablets should be limited to 40 mg, and appropriate clinical assessment is recommended to ensure that the lowest dose necessary of atorvastatin calcium tablets is employed [see Warnings and Precautions, Skeletal Muscle (5.1), Drug Interactions (7)].
Metoprolol Succinate

Metoprolol Succinate

Metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets intended for once daily administration. For treatment of hypertension and angina, when switching from immediate release metoprolol to metoprolol succinate extended-release, use the same total daily dose of metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets. Individualize the dosage of metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets. Titration may be needed in some patients.

Metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets are scored and can be divided; however, do not crush or chew the whole or half tablet.

2.1 Hypertension

Adults: The usual initial dosage is 25 mg to 100 mg daily in a single dose. The dosage may be increased at weekly (or longer) intervals until optimum blood pressure reduction is achieved. In general, the maximum effect of any given dosage level will be apparent after 1 week of therapy. Dosages above 400 mg per day have not been studied.

Pediatric Hypertensive Patients ≥ 6 Years of age: A pediatric clinical hypertension study in patients 6 to 16 years of age did not meet its primary endpoint (dose response for reduction in SBP); however some other endpoints demonstrated effectiveness [see Use in Specific Populations (8.4)]. If selected for treatment, the recommended starting dose of metoprolol succinate extended-release is 1 mg/kg once daily, but the maximum initial dose should not exceed 50 mg once daily. Dosage should be adjusted according to blood pressure response. Doses above 2 mg/kg (or in excess of 200 mg) once daily have not been studied in pediatric patients [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Metoprolol succinate extended-release is not recommended in pediatric patients < 6 years of age [see Use in Specific Populations (8.4)].

2.2 Angina Pectoris

Individualize the dosage of metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets. The usual initial dosage is 100 mg daily, given in a single dose. Gradually increase the dosage at weekly intervals until optimum clinical response has been obtained or there is a pronounced slowing of the heart rate. Dosages above 400 mg per day have not been studied. If treatment is to be discontinued, reduce the dosage gradually over a period of 1 to 2 weeks [see Warnings and Precautions (5)].

2.3 Heart Failure

Dosage must be individualized and closely monitored during up-titration. Prior to initiation of metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets, stabilize the dose of other heart failure drug therapy. The recommended starting dose of metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets is 25 mg once daily for two weeks in patients with NYHA Class II heart failure and 12.5 mg once daily in patients with more severe heart failure. Double the dose every two weeks to the highest dosage level tolerated by the patient or up to 200 mg of metoprolol succinate extended-release. Initial difficulty with titration should not preclude later attempts to introduce metoprolol succinate extended-release. If patients experience symptomatic bradycardia, reduce the dose of metoprolol succinate extended-release. If transient worsening of heart failure occurs, consider treating with increased doses of diuretics, lowering the dose of metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets or temporarily discontinuing it. The dose of metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets should not be increased until symptoms of worsening heart failure have been stabilized.
Metoprolol Succinate

Metoprolol Succinate

Metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets intended for once daily administration. For treatment of hypertension and angina, when switching from immediate release metoprolol to metoprolol succinate extended-release, use the same total daily dose of metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets. Individualize the dosage of metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets. Titration may be needed in some patients.

Metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets are scored and can be divided; however, do not crush or chew the whole or half tablet.

2.1 Hypertension

Adults: The usual initial dosage is 25 mg to 100 mg daily in a single dose. The dosage may be increased at weekly (or longer) intervals until optimum blood pressure reduction is achieved. In general, the maximum effect of any given dosage level will be apparent after 1 week of therapy. Dosages above 400 mg per day have not been studied.

Pediatric Hypertensive Patients ≥ 6 Years of age: A pediatric clinical hypertension study in patients 6 to 16 years of age did not meet its primary endpoint (dose response for reduction in SBP); however some other endpoints demonstrated effectiveness [see Use in Specific Populations (8.4)]. If selected for treatment, the recommended starting dose of metoprolol succinate extended-release is 1 mg/kg once daily, but the maximum initial dose should not exceed 50 mg once daily. Dosage should be adjusted according to blood pressure response. Doses above 2 mg/kg (or in excess of 200 mg) once daily have not been studied in pediatric patients [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Metoprolol succinate extended-release is not recommended in pediatric patients < 6 years of age [see Use in Specific Populations (8.4)].

2.2 Angina Pectoris

Individualize the dosage of metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets. The usual initial dosage is 100 mg daily, given in a single dose. Gradually increase the dosage at weekly intervals until optimum clinical response has been obtained or there is a pronounced slowing of the heart rate. Dosages above 400 mg per day have not been studied. If treatment is to be discontinued, reduce the dosage gradually over a period of 1 to 2 weeks [see Warnings and Precautions (5)].

2.3 Heart Failure

Dosage must be individualized and closely monitored during up-titration. Prior to initiation of metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets, stabilize the dose of other heart failure drug therapy. The recommended starting dose of metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets is 25 mg once daily for two weeks in patients with NYHA Class II heart failure and 12.5 mg once daily in patients with more severe heart failure. Double the dose every two weeks to the highest dosage level tolerated by the patient or up to 200 mg of metoprolol succinate extended-release. Initial difficulty with titration should not preclude later attempts to introduce metoprolol succinate extended-release. If patients experience symptomatic bradycardia, reduce the dose of metoprolol succinate extended-release. If transient worsening of heart failure occurs, consider treating with increased doses of diuretics, lowering the dose of metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets or temporarily discontinuing it. The dose of metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets should not be increased until symptoms of worsening heart failure have been stabilized.
Simvastatin

Simvastatin

2.1 Recommended Dosing

The usual dosage range is 5 to 40 mg/day. In patients with CHD or at high risk of CHD, simvastatin can be started simultaneously with diet. The recommended usual starting dose is 10 or 20 mg once a day in the evening. For patients at high risk for a CHD event due to existing CHD, diabetes, peripheral vessel disease, history of stroke or other cerebrovascular disease, the recommended starting dose is 40 mg/day. Lipid determinations should be performed after 4 weeks of therapy and periodically thereafter.

2.2 Restricted Dosing for 80 mg

Due to the increased risk of myopathy, including rhabdomyolysis, particularly during the first year of treatment, use of the 80-mg dose of simvastatin should be restricted to patients who have been taking simvastatin 80 mg chronically (e.g., for 12 months or more) without evidence of muscle toxicity [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1)].

Patients who are currently tolerating the 80-mg dose of simvastatin who need to be initiated on an interacting drug that is contraindicated or is associated with a dose cap for simvastatin should be switched to an alternative statin with less potential for the drug-drug interaction.

Due to the increased risk of myopathy, including rhabdomyolysis, associated with the 80-mg dose of simvastatin, patients unable to achieve their LDL-C goal utilizing the 40-mg dose of simvastatin should not be titrated to the 80-mg dose, but should be placed on alternative LDL-C-lowering treatment(s) that provides greater LDL-C lowering.

2.3 Coadministration with Other Drugs

Patients taking Verapamil, Diltiazem, or Dronedarone

• The dose of simvastatin should not exceed 10 mg/day [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1), Drug Interactions (7.3), and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Patients taking Amiodarone, amlodipine or Ranolazine

• The dose of simvastatin should not exceed 20 mg/day [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1), Drug Interactions (7.3), and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.4 Patients with Homozygous Familial Hypercholesterolemia

The recommended dosage is 40 mg/day in the evening [see Dosage and Administration, Restricted Dosing for 80 mg (2.2)]. Simvastatin should be used as an adjunct to other lipid-lowering treatments (e.g., LDL apheresis) in these patients or if such treatments are unavailable.

2.5 Adolescents (10-17 years of age) with Heterozygous Familial Hypercholesterolemia

The recommended usual starting dose is 10 mg once a day in the evening. The recommended dosing range is 10 to 40 mg/day; the maximum recommended dose is 40 mg/day. Doses should be individualized according to the recommended goal of therapy [see NCEP Pediatric Panel Guidelines1 and Clinical Studies (14.2)]. Adjustments should be made at intervals of 4 weeks or more.
1 National Cholesterol Education Program (NCEP): Highlights of the Report of the Expert Panel on Blood Cholesterol Levels in Children and Adolescents. Pediatrics. 89(3):495-501. 1992.
2.6 Patients with Renal Impairment

Because simvastatin does not undergo significant renal excretion, modification of dosage should not be necessary in patients with mild to moderate renal impairment. However, caution should be exercised when simvastatin is administered to patients with severe renal impairment; such patients should be started at 5 mg/day and be closely monitored [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.7 Chinese Patients Taking Lipid-Modifying Doses (≥1 g/day Niacin) of Niacin-Containing Products

Because of an increased risk for myopathy, in Chinese patients taking simvastatin 40 mg coadministered with lipid-modifying doses (≥1 g/day niacin) of niacin-containing products, caution should be used when treating Chinese patients with simvastatin doses exceeding 20 mg/day coadministered with lipid-modifying doses of niacin-containing products. Because the risk for myopathy is dose-related, Chinese patients should not receive simvastatin 80 mg coadministered with lipid-modifying doses of niacin-containing products. The cause of the increased risk of myopathy is not known. It is also unknown if the risk for myopathy with coadministration of simvastatin with lipid-modifying doses of niacin-containing products observed in Chinese patients applies to other Asian patients. [See Warnings and Precautions (5.1).]
Citalopram Hydrobromide...

Citalopram Hydrobromide

Citalopram should be administered once daily, in the morning or evening, with or without food.

Initial Treatment

Citalopram should be administered at an initial dose of 20 mg once daily, with an increase to a maximum dose of 40 mg/day at an interval of no less than one week. Doses above 40 mg/day are not recommended due to the risk of QT prolongation. Additionally, only study pertinent to dose response for effectiveness did not demonstrate an advantage for the 60 mg/day dose over the 40 mg/day dose.

Special Populations

20 mg/day is the maximum recommended dose for patients who are greater than 60 years of age, patients with hepatic impairment, and for CYP2C19 poor metabolizers or those patients taking cimetidine or another CYP2C19 inhibitor. (see WARNINGS)

No dosage adjustment is necessary for patients with mild or moderate renal impairment. Citalopram should be used with caution in patients with severe renal impairment.

Treatment of Pregnant Women During the Third Trimester

Neonates exposed to citalopram and other SSRIs or SNRIs, late in the third trimester, have developed complications requiring prolonged hospitalization, respiratory support, and tube feeding (see PRECAUTIONS). When treating pregnant women with citalopram during the third trimester, the physician should carefully consider the potential risks and benefits of treatment.

Maintenance Treatment

It is generally agreed that acute episodes of depression require several months or longer of sustained pharmacologic therapy. Systematic evaluation of citalopram in two studies has shown that its antidepressant efficacy is maintained for periods of up to 24 weeks following 6 or 8 weeks of initial treatment (32 weeks total). In one study, patients were assigned randomly to placebo or to the same dose of citalopram (20-60 mg/day) during maintenance treatment as they had received during the acute stabilization phase, while in the other study, patients were assigned randomly to continuation of citalopram 20 or 40 mg/day, or placebo, for maintenance treatment. In the latter study, the rates of relapse to depression were similar for the two dose groups (see Clinical Trials under CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY). Based on these limited data, it is not known whether the dose of citalopram needed to maintain euthymia is identical to the dose needed to induce remission. If adverse reactions are bothersome, a decrease in dose to 20 mg/day can be considered.

Discontinuation of Treatment with Citalopram

Symptoms associated with discontinuation of citalopram and other SSRIs and SNRIs have been reported (see PRECAUTIONS). Patients should be monitored for these symptoms when discontinuing treatment. A gradual reduction in the dose rather than abrupt cessation is recommended whenever possible. If intolerable symptoms occur following a decrease in the dose or upon discontinuation of treatment, then resuming the previously prescribed dose may be considered. Subsequently, the physician may continue decreasing the dose but at a more gradual rate.

Switching Patients To or From a Monoamine Oxidase Inhibitor (MAOI) Intended to Treat Psychiatric Disorders

At least 14 days should elapse between discontinuation of an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders and initiation of therapy with citalopram. Conversely, at least 14 days should be allowed after stopping citalopram before starting an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders (see CONTRAINDICATIONS).

Use of Citalopram with Other MAOIs, Such as Linezolid or Methylene Blue Do not start citalopram in a patient who is being treated with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue because there is an increased risk of serotonin syndrome. In a patient who requires more urgent treatment of a psychiatric condition, other interventions, including hospitalization, should be considered (see CONTRAINDICATIONS).

In some cases, a patient already receiving citalopram therapy may require urgent treatment with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue. If acceptable alternatives to linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are not available and the potential benefits of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are judged to outweigh the risks of serotonin syndrome in a particular patient, citalopram should be stopped promptly, and linezolid or intravenous methylene blue can be administered. The patient should be monitored for symptoms of serotonin syndrome for 2 weeks or until 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue, whichever comes first. Therapy with citalopram may be resumed 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue (see WARNINGS).

The risk of administering methylene blue by non-intravenous routes (such as oral tablets or by local injection) or in intravenous doses much lower than 1 mg/kg with citalopram is unclear. The clinician should, nevertheless, be aware of the possibility of emergent symptoms of serotonin syndrome with such use (see WARNINGS).
Finasteride

Finasteride

Finastedride tablets may be administered with or without meals.

The recommended dose of finasteride tablets is one tablet (1 mg) taken once daily.

In general, daily use for three months or more is necessary before benefit is observed. Continued use is recommended to sustain benefit, which should be re-evaluated periodically. Withdrawal of treatment leads to reversal of effect within 12 months.
Venlafaxine Hydrochlori...

Venlafaxine Hydrochloride

Initial Treatment

The recommended starting dose for venlafaxine tablets are 75 mg/day, administered in two or three divided doses, taken with food. Depending on tolerability and the need for further clinical effect, the dose may be increased to 150 mg/day. If needed, the dose should be further increased up to 225 mg/day. When increasing the dose, increments of up to 75 mg/day should be made at intervals of no less than 4 days. In outpatient settings there was no evidence of usefulness of doses greater than 225 mg/day for moderately depressed patients, but more severely depressed inpatients responded to a mean dose of 350 mg/day. Certain patients, including more severely depressed patients, may therefore respond more to higher doses, up to a maximum of 375 mg/day, generally in three divided doses (see PRECAUTIONS, General, Use in Patients with Concomitant Illness).

Special Populations

Treatment of Pregnant Women During the Third Trimester

Neonates exposed to venlafaxine tablets, other SNRIs, or SSRIs, late in the third trimester have developed complications requiring prolonged hospitalization, respiratory support, and tube feeding (see PRECAUTIONS). When treating pregnant women with venlafaxine tablets during the third trimester, the physician should carefully consider the potential risks and benefits of treatment..

Dosage for Patients with Hepatic Impairment

Given the decrease in clearance and increase in elimination half-life for both venlafaxine and ODV that is observed in patients with hepatic cirrhosis and mild and moderate hepatic impairment compared to normal subjects (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY), it is recommended that the total daily dose be reduced by 50% in patients with mild to moderate hepatic impairment. Since there was much individual variability in clearance between subjects with cirrhosis, it may be necessary to reduce the dose even more than 50%, and individualization of dosing may be desirable in some patients.

Dosage for Patients with Renal Impairment

Given the decrease in clearance for venlafaxine and the increase in elimination half-life for both venlafaxine and ODV that is observed in patients with renal impairment (GFR = 10 to 70 mL/min) compared to normals (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY), it is recommended that the total daily dose be reduced by 25% in patients with mild to moderate renal impairment. It is recommended that the total daily dose be reduced by 50% in patients undergoing hemodialysis. Since there was much individual variability in clearance between patients with renal impairment, individualization of dosing may be desirable in some patients.

Dosage for Elderly Patients

No dose adjustment is recommended for elderly patients on the basis of age. As with any antidepressant, however, caution should be exercised in treating the elderly. When individualizing the dosage, extra care should be taken when increasing the dose.

Maintenance Treatment

It is generally agreed that acute episodes of major depressive disorder require several months or longer of sustained pharmacological therapy beyond response to the acute episode. In one study, in which patients responding during 8 weeks of acute treatment with venlafaxine extended-release capsules were assigned randomly to placebo or to the same dose of venlafaxine extended-release capsules (75, 150, or 225 mg/day, qAM) during 26 weeks of maintenance treatment as they had received during the acute stabilization phase, longer-term efficacy was demonstrated. A second longer-term study has demonstrated the efficacy of venlafaxine tablets in maintaining an antidepressant response in patients with recurrent depression who had responded and continued to be improved during an initial 26 weeks of treatment and were then randomly assigned to placebo or venlafaxine tablets for periods of up to 52 weeks on the same dose (100 to 200 mg/day, on a b.i.d. schedule) (see CLINICAL TRIALS). Based on these limited data, it is not known whether or not the dose of venlafaxine tablets/ venlafaxine extended-release capsules needed for maintenance treatment is identical to the dose needed to achieve an initial response. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment and the appropriate dose for such treatment.

Discontinuing Venlafaxine Hydrochloride

Symptoms associated with discontinuation of venlafaxine tablets, other SNRIs, and SSRIs, have been reported (see PRECAUTIONS). Patients should be monitored for these symptoms when discontinuing treatment. A gradual reduction in the dose rather than abrupt cessation is recommended whenever possible. If intolerable symptoms occur following a decrease in the dose or upon discontinuation of treatment, then resuming the previously prescribed dose may be considered. Subsequently, the physician may continue decreasing the dose but at a more gradual rate.

Switching a Patient To or From a Monoamine Oxidase Inhibitor (MAOI) Intended to Treat Psychiatric Disorders.

At least 14 days should elapse between discontinuation of an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders and initiation of therapy with venlafaxine hydrochloride. Conversely, at least 7 days should be allowed after stopping venlafaxine hydrochloride before starting an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders (see CONTRAINDICATIONS).

Use of Venlafaxine Hydrochloride with Other MAOIs, Such as Linezolid or Methylene Blue:

Do not start venlafaxine hydrochloride in a patient who is being treated with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue because there is increased risk of serotonin syndrome. In a patient who requires more urgent treatment of a psychiatric condition, other interventions, including hospitalization, should be considered (see CONTRAINDICATIONS).

In some cases, a patient already receiving therapy with venlafaxine hydrochloride may require urgent treatment with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue. If acceptable alternatives to linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are not available and the potential benefits of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are judged to outweigh the risks of serotonin syndrome in a particular patient, venlafaxine hydrochloride should be stopped promptly, and linezolid or intravenous methylene blue can be administered. The patient should be monitored for symptoms of serotonin syndrome for 7 days or until 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue, whichever comes first. Therapy with venlafaxine hydrochloride may be resumed 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue (see WARNINGS).

The risk of administering methylene blue by non-intravenous routes (such as oral tablets or by local injection) or in intravenous doses much lower than 1 mg/kg with venlafaxine hydrochloride is unclear. The clinician should, nevertheless, be aware of the possibility of emergent symptoms of serotonin syndrome with such use (see WARNINGS).
Ibandronate Sodium

Ibandronate Sodium

2.1 Dosage Information

The dose of ibandronate sodium tablet is one 150 mg tablet taken once monthly on the same date each month.

2.2 Important Administration Instructions

Instruct Patients to do the following:
Take ibandronate sodium tablets at least 60 minutes before the first food or drink (other than water) of the day or before taking any oral medication or supplementation, including calcium, antacids, or vitamins to maximize absorption and clinical benefit, (see Drug Interactions [7.1]). Avoid the use of water with supplements including mineral water because they may have a higher concentration of calcium. Swallow ibandronate sodium tablets whole with a full glass of plain water (6 to 8 oz) while standing or sitting in an upright position to reduce the potential for esophageal irritation. Avoid lying down for 60 minutes after taking ibandronate sodium tablets (see Warnings and Precautions [5.1]). Do not chew or suck the tablet because of a potential for oropharyngeal ulceration. Do not eat, drink anything except plain water, or take other medications for at least 60 minutes after taking ibandronate sodium tablets.
2.3 Recommendations for Calcium and Vitamin D Supplementation

Instruct patients to take supplemental calcium and vitamin D if their dietary intake is inadequate. Avoid the use of calcium supplements within 60 minutes of ibandronate sodium tablets administration because co-administration of ibandronate sodium tablets and calcium may interfere with the absorption of ibandronate sodium (see Drug Interactions [7.1]).

2.4 Administration Instructions for Missed Once-Monthly Doses

If the once-monthly dose is missed, instruct patients to do the following:
If the next scheduled ibandronate sodium tablets day is more than 7 days away, take one ibandronate sodium tablet, 150 mg (acid) in the morning following the date that it is remembered. If the next scheduled ibandronate sodium tablets day is only 1 to 7 days away, wait until the subsequent month’s scheduled ibandronate sodium tablets day to take their tablet.
For subsequent monthly doses for both of the above scenarios, instruct patients to return to their original schedule by taking one ibandronate sodium tablet, 150 mg (acid) every month on their previous chosen day.
Mucinex Fast-max Cold

Mucinex Fast-max Cold

Sirolimus tablets are to be administered orally once daily, consistently with or without food [see Dosage and Administration (2.4), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Tablets should not be crushed, chewed or split. Patients unable to take the tablets should be prescribed the solution and instructed in its use.

The initial dose of sirolimus tablets should be administered as soon as possible after transplantation. It is recommended that sirolimus tablets be taken 4 hours after administration of cyclosporine oral solution (MODIFIED) and or/cyclosporine capsules (MODIFIED) [see Drug Interactions (7.2)].

Frequent sirolimus tablets dose adjustments based on non-steady-state sirolimus concentrations can lead to overdosing or underdosing because sirolimus has a long half-life. Once sirolimus tablets maintenance dose is adjusted, patients should continue on the new maintenance dose for at least 7 to 14 days before further dosage adjustment with concentration monitoring. In most patients, dose adjustments can be based on simple proportion: new sirolimus tablets dose = current dose x (target concentration/current concentration). A loading dose should be considered in addition to a new maintenance dose when it is necessary to increase sirolimus trough concentrations: sirolimus tablets loading dose = 3 x (new maintenance dose - current maintenance dose). The maximum sirolimus tablets dose administered on any day should not exceed 40 mg. If an estimated daily dose exceeds 40 mg due to the addition of a loading dose, the loading dose should be administered over 2 days. Sirolimus trough concentrations should be monitored at least 3 to 4 days after a loading dose(s).

Two milligrams (2 mg) of sirolimus oral solution have been demonstrated to be clinically equivalent to 2 mg sirolimus tablets; hence, are interchangeable on a mg-to-mg basis. However, it is not known if higher doses of sirolimus oral solution are clinically equivalent to higher doses of sirolimus tablets on a mg-to-mg basis [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.1 Patients at Low- to Moderate-Immunologic Risk

Sirolimus Tablets and Cyclosporine Combination Therapy

For de novo renal transplant patients, it is recommended that sirolimus oral solution and tablets be used initially in a regimen with cyclosporine and corticosteroids. A loading dose of sirolimus tablets equivalent to 3 times the maintenance dose should be given, i.e. a daily maintenance dose of 2 mg should be preceded with a loading dose of 6 mg. Therapeutic drug monitoring should be used to maintain sirolimus drug concentrations within the target-range [see Dosage and Administration (2.3)].

Sirolimus Tablets Following Cyclosporine Withdrawal

At 2 to 4 months following transplantation, cyclosporine should be progressively discontinued over 4 to 8 weeks, and the sirolimus tablets dose should be adjusted to obtain sirolimus whole blood trough concentrations within the target-range [see Dosage and Administration (2.3)]. Because cyclosporine inhibits the metabolism and transport of sirolimus, sirolimus concentrations may decrease when cyclosporine is discontinued, unless the sirolimus tablets dose is increased [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.2 Patients at High-Immunologic Risk

In patients with high-immunologic risk, it is recommended that sirolimus tablets be used in combination with cyclosporine and corticosteroids for the first 12 months following transplantation [see Clinical Studies (14.3)]. The safety and efficacy of this combination in high- immunologic risk patients has not been studied beyond the first 12 months. Therefore, after the first 12 months following transplantation, any adjustments to the immunosuppressive regimen should be considered on the basis of the clinical status of the patient.

For patients receiving sirolimus tablets with cyclosporine, sirolimus tablets therapy should be initiated with a loading dose of up to 15 mg on day 1 post-transplantation. Beginning on day 2, an initial maintenance dose of 5 mg/day should be given. A trough level should be obtained between days 5 and 7, and the daily dose of sirolimus tablets should thereafter be adjusted [see Dosage and Administration (2.3)].

The starting dose of cyclosporine should be up to 7 mg/kg/day in divided doses and the dose should subsequently be adjusted to achieve target whole blood trough concentrations [see Dosage and Administration (2.3)]. Prednisone should be administered at a minimum of 5 mg/day.

Antibody induction therapy may be used.

2.3 Therapeutic Drug Monitoring

Monitoring of sirolimus trough concentrations is recommended for all patients, especially in those patients likely to have altered drug metabolism, in patients ≥ 13 years who weigh less than 40 kg, in patients with hepatic impairment, when a change in the sirolimus tablets dosage form is made, and during concurrent administration of strong CYP3A4 inducers and inhibitors [see Drug Interactions (7)].

Therapeutic drug monitoring should not be the sole basis for adjusting sirolimus tablets therapy. Careful attention should be made to clinical signs/symptoms, tissue biopsy findings, and laboratory parameters.

When used in combination with cyclosporine, sirolimus trough concentrations should be maintained within the target-range [see Clinical Studies (14), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. Following cyclosporine withdrawal in transplant patients at low- to moderate-immunologic risk, the target sirolimus trough concentrations should be 16 to 24 ng/mL for the first year following transplantation. Thereafter, the target sirolimus concentrations should be 12 to 20 ng/mL.

The above recommended 24-hour trough concentration ranges for sirolimus are based on chromatographic methods. Currently in clinical practice, sirolimus whole blood concentrations are being measured by both chromatographic and immunoassay methodologies. Because the measured sirolimus whole blood concentrations depend on the type of assay used, the concentrations obtained by these different methodologies are not interchangeable [see Warnings and Precautions (5.15), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. Adjustments to the targeted range should be made according to the assay utilized to determine sirolimus trough concentrations. Since results are assay and laboratory dependent, and the results may change over time, adjustments to the targeted therapeutic range must be made with a detailed knowledge of the site-specific assay used. Therefore, communication should be maintained with the laboratory performing the assay. A discussion of different assay methods is contained in Clinical Therapeutics, Volume 22, Supplement B, April 2000 [see References (15)].

2.4 Patients with Low Body Weight

The initial dosage in patients ≥ 13 years who weigh less than 40 kg should be adjusted, based on body surface area, to 1 mg/m2/day. The loading dose should be 3 mg/m2.

2.5 Patients with Hepatic Impairment

It is recommended that the maintenance dose of sirolimus tablets be reduced by approximately one third in patients with mild or moderate hepatic impairment and by approximately one half in patients with severe hepatic impairment. It is not necessary to modify the sirolimus tablets loading dose [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.6 Patients with Renal Impairment

Dosage adjustment is not needed in patients with impaired renal function [see Use in Specific Populations (8.7)].
Ramipril

Ramipril

2.1 Hypertension

The recommended initial dose for patients not receiving a diuretic is 2.5 mg once a day. Adjust dose according to blood pressure response. The usual maintenance dosage range is 2.5 mg to 20 mg per day administered as a single dose or in two equally divided doses. In some patients treated once daily, the antihypertensive effect may diminish toward the end of the dosing interval. In such patients, consider an increase in dosage or twice daily administration. If blood pressure is not controlled with ramipril alone, a diuretic can be added.

2.4 General Dosing Information

Generally, swallow ramipril capsules whole. The ramipril capsule can also be opened and the contents sprinkled on a small amount (about 4 oz.) of applesauce or mixed in 4 oz. (120 mL) of water or apple juice. To be sure that ramipril is not lost when such a mixture is used, consume the mixture in its entirety. The described mixtures can be pre-prepared and stored for up to 24 hours at room temperature or up to 48 hours under refrigeration.

Concomitant administration of ramipril with potassium supplements, potassium salt substitutes, or potassium-sparing diuretics can lead to increases of serum potassium [see Warnings and Precautions (5.8)].

2.5 Dosage Adjustment

Renal Impairment

Establish baseline renal function in patients initiating ramipril usual regimens of therapy with ramipril may be followed in patients with estimated creatinine clearance >40 mL/min. However, in patients with worse impairment, 25% of the usual dose of ramipril is expected to produce full therapeutic levels of ramiprilat [see Use in Specific Population (8.6)].

Hypertension

For patients with hypertension and renal impairment, the recommended initial dose is 1.25 mg ramipril once daily. Dosage may be titrated upward until blood pressure is controlled or to a maximum total daily dose of 5 mg.

Volume Depletion or Renal Artery Stenosis

Blood pressure decreases associated with any dose of ramipril depend, in part, on the presence or absence of volume depletion (e.g., past and current diuretic use) or the presence or absence of renal artery stenosis. If such circumstances are suspected to be present, initiate dosing at 1.25 mg once daily. Adjust dosage according to blood pressure response.
Zolpidem Tartrate

Zolpidem Tartrate

The dose of zolpidem tartrate tablets should be individualized.

2.1 Dosage in Adults

The recommended dose for adults is 10 mg once daily immediately before bedtime. The total zolpidem tartrate tablets dose should not exceed 10 mg per day.

2.2 Special Populations

Elderly or debilitated patients may be especially sensitive to the effects of zolpidem tartrate tablets. Patients with hepatic insufficiency do not clear the drug as rapidly as normal subjects. The recommended dose of zolpidem tartrate tablets in both of these patient populations is 5 mg once daily immediately before bedtime (see WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5.6)).

2.3 Use with CNS Depressants

Dosage adjustment may be necessary when zolpidem tartrate tablets are combined with other CNS depressant drugs because of the potentially additive effects (see WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5.5)).

2.4 Administration

The effect of zolpidem tartrate tablets may be slowed by ingestion with or immediately after meal.
Risperidone

Risperidone

2.1 Schizophrenia

Adults

Usual Initial Dose

Risperidone tablets can be administered once or twice daily. Initial dosing is generally 2 mg/day. Dose increases should then occur at intervals not less than 24 hours, in increments of 1-2 mg/day, as tolerated, to a recommended dose of 4-8 mg/day. In some patients, slower titration may be appropriate. Efficacy has been demonstrated in a range of 4-16 mg/day [see Clinical Studies (14.1)]. However, doses above 6 mg/day for twice daily dosing were not demonstrated to be more efficacious than lower doses, were associated with more extrapyramidal symptoms and other adverse effects, and are generally not recommended. In a single study supporting once-daily dosing, the efficacy results were generally stronger for 8 mg than for 4 mg. The safety of doses above 16 mg/day has not been evaluated in clinical trials.

Maintenance Therapy

While it is unknown how long a patient with schizophrenia should remain on risperidone, the effectiveness of risperidone 2 mg/day to 8 mg/day at delaying relapse was demonstrated in a controlled trial in patients who had been clinically stable for at least 4 weeks and were then followed for a period of 1 to 2 years [see Clinical Studies(14.1)]. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment with an appropriate dose.

Adolescents

The dosage of risperidoneshould be initiated at 0.5 mg once daily, administered as a single-daily dose in either the morning or evening. Dosage adjustments, if indicated, should occur at intervals not less than 24 hours, in increments of 0.5 or 1 mg/day, as tolerated, to a recommended dose of 3 mg/day. Although efficacy has been demonstrated in studies of adolescent patients with schizophrenia at doses between 1 and 6 mg/day, no additional benefit was seen above 3 mg/day, and higher doses were associated with more adverse events. Doses higher than 6 mg/day have not been studied.

Patients experiencing persistent somnolence may benefit from administering half the daily dose twice daily.

There are no controlled data to support the longer term use of risperidone beyond 8 weeks in adolescents with schizophrenia. The physician who elects to use risperidone for extended periods in adolescents with schizophrenia should periodically re-evaluate the long-term risks and benefits of the drug for the individual patient.

Reinitiation of Treatment in Patients Previously Discontinued

Although there are no data to specifically address reinitiation of treatment, it is recommended that after an interval off risperidone, the initial titration schedule should be followed.

Switching From Other Antipsychotics

There are no systematically collected data to specifically address switching schizophrenic patients from other antipsychotics to risperidone, or treating patients with concomitant antipsychotics. While immediate discontinuation of the previous antipsychotic treatment may be acceptable for some schizophrenic patients, more gradual discontinuation may be most appropriate for others. The period of overlapping antipsychotic administration should be minimized. When switching schizophrenic patients from depot antipsychotics, initiate risperidone therapy in place of the next scheduled injection. The need for continuing existing EPS medication should be re-evaluated periodically.

2.2 Bipolar Mania

Usual Dose

Adults

Risperidone should be administered on a once-daily schedule, starting with 2 mg to 3 mg per day. Dosage adjustments, if indicated, should occur at intervals of not less than 24 hours and in dosage increments/decrements of 1 mg per day, as studied in the short-term, placebo-controlled trials. In these trials, short-term (3 week) anti-manic efficacy was demonstrated in a flexible dosage range of 1-6 mg per day [see Clinical Studies(14.2, 14.3)]. Risperidone doses higher than 6 mg per day were not studied.

Pediatrics

The dosage of risperidoneshould be initiated at 0.5 mg once daily, administered as a single-daily dose in either the morning or evening. Dosage adjustments, if indicated, should occur at intervals not less than 24 hours, in increments of 0.5 or 1 mg/day, as tolerated, to a recommended dose of 2.5 mg/day. Although efficacy has been demonstrated in studies of pediatric patients with bipolar mania at doses between 0.5 and 6 mg/day, no additional benefit was seen above 2.5 mg/day, and higher doses were associated with more adverse events. Doses higher than 6 mg/day have not been studied.

Patients experiencing persistent somnolence may benefit from administering half the daily dose twice daily.

Maintenance Therapy

There is no body of evidence available from controlled trials to guide a clinician in the longer-term management of a patient who improves during treatment of an acute manic episode with risperidone. While it is generally agreed that pharmacological treatment beyond an acute response in mania is desirable, both for maintenance of the initial response and for prevention of new manic episodes, there are no systematically obtained data to support the use of risperidone in such longer-term treatment (i.e., beyond 3 weeks). The physician who elects to use risperidone for extended periods should periodically re-evaluate the long-term risks and benefits of the drug for the individual patient.

2.3 Irritability Associated with Autistic Disorder – Pediatrics (Children and Adolescents)

The safety and effectiveness of risperidone in pediatric patients with autistic disorder less than 5 years of age have not been established.

The dosage of risperidone should be individualized according to the response and tolerability of the patient. The total daily dose of risperidone can be administered once daily, or half the total daily dose can be administered twice daily.

Dosing should be initiated at 0.25 mg per day for patients < 20 kg and 0.5 mg per day for patients ≥ 20 kg. After a minimum of four days from treatment initiation, the dose may be increased to the recommended dose of 0.5 mg per day for patients < 20 kg and 1 mg per day for patients ≥ 20 kg. This dose should be maintained for a minimum of 14 days. In patients not achieving sufficient clinical response, dose increases may be considered at ≥ 2-week intervals in increments of 0.25 mg per day for patients < 20 kg or 0.5 mg per day for patients ≥ 20 kg. Caution should be exercised with dosage for smaller children who weigh less than 15 kg.

In clinical trials, 90% of patients who showed a response (based on at least 25% improvement on ABC-I, [see Clinical Studies (14.4)]) received doses of risperidonebetween 0.5 mg and 2.5 mg per day. The maximum daily dose of risperidonein one of the pivotal trials, when the therapeutic effect reached plateau, was 1 mg in patients < 20 kg, 2.5 mg in patients ≥ 20 kg, or 3 mg in patients > 45 kg. No dosing data is available for children who weighed less than 15 kg.

Once sufficient clinical response has been achieved and maintained, consideration should be given to gradually lowering the dose to achieve the optimal balance of efficacy and safety. The physician who elects to use risperidonefor extended periods should periodically re-evaluate the long-term risks and benefits of the drug for the individual patient.

Patients experiencing persistent somnolence may benefit from a once-daily dose administered at bedtime or administering half the daily dose twice daily, or a reduction of the dose.

2.4 Dosage in Special Populations

The recommended initial dose is 0.5 mg twice daily in patients who are elderly or debilitated, patients with severe renal or hepatic impairment, and patients either predisposed to hypotension or for whom hypotension would pose a risk. Dosage increases in these patients should be in increments of no more than 0.5 mg twice daily. Increases to dosages above 1.5 mg twice daily should generally occur at intervals of at least 1 week. In some patients, slower titration may be medically appropriate.

Elderly or debilitated patients, and patients with renal impairment, may have less ability to eliminate risperidone than normal adults. Patients with impaired hepatic function may have increases in the free fraction of risperidone, possibly resulting in an enhanced effect [see ClinicalPharmacology(12.3)]. Patients with a predisposition to hypotensive reactions or for whom such reactions would pose a particular risk likewise need to be titrated cautiously and carefully monitored [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2,5.7,5.17)]. If a once-daily dosing regimen in the elderly or debilitated patient is being considered, it is recommended that the patient be titrated on a twice-daily regimen for 2-3 days at the target dose. Subsequent switches to a once-daily dosing regimen can be done thereafter.

2.5 Co-Administration of Risperidone with Certain Other Medications

Co-administration of carbamazepine and other enzyme inducers (e.g., phenytoin, rifampin, phenobarbital) with risperidone would be expected to cause decreases in the plasma concentrations of the sum of risperidone and 9-hydroxyrisperidone combined, which could lead to decreased efficacy of risperidone treatment. The dose of risperidone needs to be titrated accordingly for patients receiving these enzyme inducers, especially during initiation or discontinuation of therapy with these inducers [see Drug Interactions (7.11)].

Fluoxetine and paroxetine have been shown to increase the plasma concentration of risperidone 2.5-2.8 fold and 3-9 fold, respectively. Fluoxetine did not affect the plasma concentration of 9-hydroxyrisperidone. Paroxetine lowered the concentration of 9-hydroxyrisperidone by about 10%. The dose of risperidone needs to be titrated accordingly when fluoxetine or paroxetine is co-administered [see Drug Interactions (7.10)].
Tacrolimus

Tacrolimus

2.1 Dosage in Adult Kidney, Liver. or Heart Transplant Patients

The initial oral dosage recommendations for adult patients with kidney, liver, or heart transplants along with recommendations for whole blood trough concentrations are shown in Table 1. The initial dose of tacrolimus capsules should be administered no sooner than 6 hours after transplantation in the liver and heart transplant patients. In kidney transplant patients, the initial dose of tacrolimus capsules may be administered within 24 hours of transplantation, but should be delayed until renal function has recovered. For blood concentration monitoring details see Dosage and Administration (2.6).

Table 1. Summary of Initial Oral Dosage Recommendations and Observed Whole Blood Trough Concentrations in Adults
Patient Population Recommended Tacrolimus Initial Oral Dosage Note: daily doses should be administered as two divided doses, every 12 hours Observed Tacrolimus Whole Blood Trough Concentrations Adult kidney transplant patients In combination with azathioprine In combination with MMF/IL-2 receptor antagonist a 0.2 mg/kg/day 0.1 mg/kg/day month 1 to 3: 7 to 20 ng/mLmonth 4 to 12: 5 to 15 ng/mL month 1 to 12: 4 to 11 ng/mL Adult liver transplant patients 0.10 to 0.15 mg/kg/day month 1 to 12: 5 to 20 ng/mL Adult heart transplant patients 0.075 mg/kg/day month 1 to 3: 10 to 20 ng/mL month ≥4: 5 to 15 ng/mL
In a second smaller trial, the initial dose of tacrolimus was 0.15 to 0.2 mg/kg/day and observed tacrolimus concentrations were 6 to 16 ng/mL during month 1 to 3 and 5 to 12 ng/mL during month 4 to 12 [seeClinical Studies (14.1)]. Dosing should be titrated based on clinical assessments of rejection and tolerability. Lower tacrolimus capsule dosages than the recommended initial dosage may be sufficient as maintenance therapy. Adjunct therapy with adrenal corticosteroids is recommended early post-transplant. The data in kidney transplant patients indicate that the Black patients required a higher dose to attain comparable trough concentrations compared to Caucasian patients (Table 2).

Table 2. Comparative Dose and Trough Concentrations Based on Race
Time After Transplant Caucasian n=114 Black n=56 Dose(mg/kg) Trough Concentrations(ng/mL) Dose (mg/kg) Trough Concentrations(ng/mL) Day 7 0.18 12.0 0.23 10.9 Month 1 0.17 12.8 0.26 12.9 Month 6 0.14 11.8 0.24 11.5 Month 12 0.13 10.1 0.19 11.0
Initial Dose – Injection

Tacrolimus injection should be used only as a continuous IV infusion and when the patient cannot tolerate oral administration of tacrolimus capsules.Tacrolimus injection should be discontinued as soon as the patient can tolerate oral administration of tacrolimus capsules, usually within 2 to 3 days. In a patient receiving an IV infusion, the first dose of oral therapy should be given 8 to 12 hours after discontinuing the IV infusion.

The observed trough concentrations described above pertain to oral administration of tacrolimus only; while monitoring tacrolimus concentrations in patients receiving tacrolimus injection as a continuous IV infusion may have some utility, the observed concentrations will not represent comparable exposures to those estimated by the trough concentrations observed in patients on oral therapy.

The recommended starting dose of tacrolimus injection is 0.03 to 0.05 mg/kg/day in kidney and liver transplant and 0.01 mg/kg/day in heart transplant given as a continuous IV infusion. Adult patients should receive doses at the lower end of the dosing range. Concomitant adrenal corticosteroid therapy is recommended early post-transplantation.

Anaphylactic reactions have occurred with injectables containing castor oil derivatives, such as tacrolimus injection [see Warnings and Precautions (5.11)].

2.2 Dosage in Pediatric Liver Transplant Patients

The initial oral dosage recommendations for pediatric patients with liver transplants along with recommendations for whole blood trough concentrations are shown in Table 3. For blood concentration monitoring details see Dosage and Administration (2.6). If necessary, pediatric patients may start on an IV dose of 0.03 to 0.05 mg/kg/day.

Table 3. Summary of Initial Oral Dosage Recommendations and Observed Whole Blood Trough Concentrations in Children
Patient Population Recommended Tacrolimus Initial Oral Dosage Observed Tacrolimus Whole Blood Trough Concentrations Note: daily doses should be administered as two divided doses, every 12 hours Pediatric liver transplant patients 0.15 to 0.20 mg/kg/day Month 1 to 12: 5 to 20 ng/mL
Pediatric liver transplantation patients without pre-existing renal or hepatic dysfunction have required and tolerated higher doses than adults to achieve similar blood concentrations.

Experience in pediatric kidney and heart transplantation patients is limited.

2.3 Dosage Adjustment in Patients with Renal Impairment

Due to its potential for nephrotoxicity, consideration should be given to dosing tacrolimus capsules at the lower end of the therapeutic dosing range in patients who have received a liver transplant and have pre-existing renal impairment. Further reductions in dose below the targeted range may be required.

In kidney transplant patients with post-operative oliguria, the initial dose of tacrolimus capsules should be administered no sooner than 6 hours and within 24 hours of transplantation, but may be delayed until renal function shows evidence of recovery.

2.4 Dosage Adjustments in Patients with Hepatic Impairment

Due to the reduced clearance and prolonged half-life, patients with severe hepatic impairment (Child Pugh ≥ 10) may require lower doses of tacrolimus capsules. Close monitoring of blood concentrations is warranted.

The use of tacrolimus capsules in liver transplant recipients experiencing post-transplant hepatic impairment may be associated with increased risk of developing renal insufficiency related to high whole-blood concentrations of tacrolimus. These patients should be monitored closely and dosage adjustments should be considered. Some evidence suggests that lower doses should be used in these patients [see Dosage and Administration (2.1), Use in Specific Populations (8.7) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.5 Administration Instructions

It is recommended that patients initiate oral therapy with tacrolimus capsules if possible.

Initial dosage and observed tacrolimus whole blood trough concentrations for adults are shown in Table 1 and for pediatrics in Table 3 [see Dosage and Administration (2.1, 2.2)]; for blood concentration monitoring details in kidney transplant patients [see Dosage and Administration (2.1)].

It is important to take tacrolimus capsules consistently every day either with or without food because the presence and composition of food decreases the bioavailability of tacrolimus capsules [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Patients should not eat grapefruit or drink grapefruit juice in combination with tacrolimus capsules [see Drug Interactions (7.2)].

Tacrolimus capsules should not be used simultaneously with cyclosporine. Tacrolimus capsules or cyclosporine should be discontinued at least 24 hours before initiating the other. In the presence of elevated tacrolimus capsules or cyclosporine concentrations, dosing with the other drug usually should be further delayed.

In patients unable to take oral tacrolimus capsules, therapy may be initiated with tacrolimus injection as a continuous IV infusion. If IV therapy is necessary, conversion from IV to oral tacrolimus capsules is recommended as soon as oral therapy can be tolerated. This usually occurs within 2 to 3 days. In patients receiving an IV infusion, the first dose of oral therapy should be given 8 to 12 hours after discontinuing the IV infusion.

2.6 Therapeutic Drug Monitoring

Monitoring of tacrolimus blood concentrations in conjunction with other laboratory and clinical parameters is considered an essential aid to patient management for the evaluation of rejection, toxicity, dose adjustments and compliance. Observed whole blood trough concentrations can be found in Table 1. Factors influencing frequency of monitoring include but are not limited to hepatic or renal dysfunction, the addition or discontinuation of potentially interacting drugs and the post-transplant time. Blood concentration monitoring is not a replacement for renal and liver function monitoring and tissue biopsies. Data from clinical trials show that tacrolimus whole blood concentrations were most variable during the first week post-transplantation.

The relative risks of toxicity and efficacy failure are related to tacrolimus whole blood trough concentrations. Therefore, monitoring of whole blood trough concentrations is recommended to assist in the clinical evaluation of toxicity and efficacy failure.

Methods commonly used for the assay of tacrolimus include high performance liquid chromatography with tandem mass spectrometric detection (HPLC/MS/MS) and immunoassays. Immunoassays may react with metabolites as well as parent compound. Therefore assay results obtained with immunoassays may have a positive bias relative to results of HPLC/MS. The bias may depend upon the specific assay and laboratory. Comparison of the concentrations in published literature to patient concentrations using the current assays must be made with detailed knowledge of the assay methods and biological matrices employed. Whole blood is the matrix of choice and specimens should be collected into tubes containing ethylene diamine tetraacetic acid (EDTA) anti-coagulant. Heparin anti-coagulation is not recommended because of the tendency to form clots on storage. Samples which are not analyzed immediately should be stored at room temperature or in a refrigerator and assayed within 7 days; see assay instructions for specifics. If samples are to be kept longer they should be deep frozen at -20° C. One study showed drug recovery >90% for samples stored at -20° C for 6 months, with reduced recovery observed after 6 months.
Injuries

Injuries

Esomeprazole magnesium is supplied as delayed-release capsules for oral administration. The recommended dosages are outlined in Table 1. Esomeprazole magnesium delayed-release capsules should be taken at least one hour before meals. The duration of proton pump inhibitor administration should be based on available safety and efficacy data specific to the defined indication and dosing frequency, as described in the prescribing information, and individual patient medical needs. Proton pump inhibitor treatment should only be initiated and continued if the benefits outweigh the risks of treatment.

Table 1: Recommended Dosage Schedule of Esomeprazole Magnesium Delayed-Release Capsules
Indication Dose Frequency Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease (GERD) Healing of Erosive Esophagitis 20 mg or 40 mg Once Daily for 4 to 8 Weeks* Maintenance of Healing of Erosive Esophagitis 20 mg Once Daily** Symptomatic Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease 20 mg Once Daily for 4 Weeks*** Pediatric GERD 12 to 17 Year Olds Healing of Erosive Esophagitis 20 mg or 40 mg Once Daily for 4 to 8 Weeks Symptomatic GERD 20 mg Once Daily for 4 Weeks 1 to 11 Year Olds+ Short-term Treatment of Symptomatic GERD 10 mg Once Daily for up to 8 Weeks Healing of Erosive Esophagitis weight < 20 kg 10 mg Once Daily for 8 Weeks weight ≥ 20 kg 10 mg or 20 mg Once Daily for 8 Weeks 1 month to < 1 year old‡‡‡ Erosive esophagitis due to acid- mediated GERD weight 3 kg to 5 kg 2.5 mg Once Daily for up to 6 Weeks weight > 5 kg to 7.5 kg 5 mg Once Daily for up to 6 Weeks weight >7.5 kg to 12 kg 10 mg Once Daily for up to 6 Weeks Risk Reduction of NSAID- Associated Gastric Ulcer 20 mg or 40 mg Once Daily for up to 6 months** Pathological Hypersecretory Conditions Including Zollinger-Ellison Syndrome 40 mg† ‡Twice Daily
*[See Clinical Studies. (14.1).] The majority of patients are healed within 4 to 8 weeks. For patients who do not heal after 4 to 8 weeks, an additional 4 to 8 weeks of treatment may be considered.

**Controlled studies did not extend beyond six months.

***If symptoms do not resolve completely after 4 weeks, an additional 4 weeks of treatment may be considered.

+Doses over 1 mg/kg/day have not been studied.

†The dosage of esomeprazole magnesium delayed-release capsules in patients with pathological hypersecretory conditions varies with the individual patient. Dosage regimens should be adjusted to individual patient needs.

‡Doses up to 240 mg daily have been administered [see Drug Interactions (7)].

‡‡‡Doses over 1.33 mg/kg/day have not been studied.

Please refer to amoxicillin and clarithromycin prescribing information for Contraindications, Warnings, and dosing in elderly and renally-impaired patients.

Special Populations

Hepatic Insufficiency

In patients with mild to moderate liver impairment (Child Pugh Classes A and B), no dosage adjustment is necessary. For patients with severe liver impairment (Child Pugh Class C), a dose of 20 mg of esomeprazole magnesium delayed-release capsules should not be exceeded [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Directions for use specific to the route and available methods of administration for each of these dosage forms are presented in Table 2.

Table 2: Administration Options
Administration Options (See text following table for additional instructions.) Dosage Form Route Options Delayed-Release Capsules Oral Capsule can be swallowed whole. -or- Capsule can be opened and mixed with applesauce. Delayed-Release Capsules Nasogastric Tube Capsule can be opened and the intact granules emptied into a syringe and delivered through the nasogastric tube.
Esomeprazole Magnesium Delayed-Release Capsules

Esomeprazole magnesium delayed-release capsules should be swallowed whole.

Alternatively, for patients who have difficulty swallowing capsules, one tablespoon of applesauce can be added to an empty bowl and the esomeprazole magnesium delayed-release capsule can be opened, and the granules inside the capsule carefully emptied onto the applesauce. The granules should be mixed with the applesauce and then swallowed immediately: do not store for future use. The applesauce used should not be hot and should be soft enough to be swallowed without chewing. The granules should not be chewed or crushed. If the granules/applesauce mixture is not used in its entirety, the remaining mixture should be discarded immediately.

For patients who have a nasogastric tube in place, esomeprazole magnesium delayed-release capsules can be opened and the intact granules emptied into a 60 mL catheter tipped syringe and mixed with 50 mL of water. It is important to only use a catheter tipped syringe when administering esomeprazole magnesium through a nasogastric tube. Replace the plunger and shake the syringe vigorously for 15 seconds. Hold the syringe with the tip up and check for granules remaining in the tip. Attach the syringe to a nasogastric tube and deliver the contents of the syringe through the nasogastric tube into the stomach. After administering the granules, the nasogastric tube should be flushed with additional water. Do not administer the granules if they have dissolved or disintegrated.

The mixture must be used immediately after preparation.
Omeprazole

Omeprazole

Omeprazole delayed-release capsules should be taken before eating. In the clinical trials, antacids were used concomitantly with omeprazole.

Patients should be informed that the omeprazole delayed-release capsule should be swallowed whole.

For patients unable to swallow an intact capsule, alternative administration options are available [See Dosage and Administration(2.8)].

2.1 Short-Term Treatment of Active Duodenal Ulcer

The recommended adult oral dose of omeprazole delayed-release capsules is 20 mg once daily. Most patients heal within four weeks. Some patients may require an additional four weeks of therapy.

2.2 H. pylori Eradication for the Reduction of the Risk of Duodenal Ulcer Recurrence

Triple Therapy (omeprazole/clarithromycin/amoxicillin) — The recommended adult oral regimen is omeprazole delayed-release capsules 20 mg plus clarithromycin 500 mg plus amoxicillin 1000 mg each given twice daily for 10 days. In patients with an ulcer present at the time of initiation of therapy, an additional 18 days of omeprazole delayed-release capsules 20 mg once daily is recommended for ulcer healing and symptom relief.

Dual Therapy (omeprazole/clarithromycin) — The recommended adult oral regimen is omeprazole delayed-release capsuels 40 mg once daily plus clarithromycin 500 mg three times daily for 14 days. In patients with an ulcer present at the time of initiation of therapy, an additional 14 days of omeprazole delayed-release capsules 20 mg once daily is recommended for ulcer healing and symptom relief.

2.3 Gastric Ulcer

The recommended adult oral dose is 40 mg once daily for 4 to 8 weeks.

2.4 Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease (GERD)

The recommended adult oral dose for the treatment of patients with symptomatic GERD and no esophageal lesions is 20 mg daily for up to 4 weeks. The recommended adult oral dose for the treatment of patients with erosive esophagitis and accompanying symptoms due to GERD is 20 mg daily for 4 to 8 weeks.

2.5 Maintenance of Healing of Erosive Esophagitis

The recommended adult oral dose is 20 mg daily. Controlled studies do not extend beyond 12 months. [SeeClinical Studies(14.4)]

2.6 Pathological Hypersecretory Conditions

The dosage of omeprazole delayed-release capsules in patients with pathological hypersecretory conditions varies with the individual patient. The recommended adult oral starting dose is 60 mg once daily. Doses should be adjusted to individual patient needs and should continue for as long as clinically indicated. Doses up to 120 mg three times daily have been administered. Daily dosages of greater than 80 mg should be administered in divided doses. Some patients with Zollinger-Ellison syndrome have been treated continuously with omeprazole delayed-release capsules for more than 5 years.

2.7 Pediatric Patients

For the treatment of GERD and maintenance of healing of erosive esophagitis, the recommended daily dose for pediatric patients 2 to 16 years of age is as follows:
Patient Weight Omeprazole Daily Dose 10 < 20 kg 10 mg ≥ 20 kg 20 mg
On a per kg basis, the doses of omeprazole required to heal erosive esophagitis in pediatric patients are greater than those for adults.

Alternative administrative options can be used for pediatric patients unable to swallow an intact capsule [See Dosage and Administration (2.8)].

2.8 Alternative Administration Options

Omeprazole is available as a delayed-release capsule.

For patients who have difficulty swallowing capsules, the contents of an omeprazole delayed-release capsule can be added to applesauce. One tablespoon of applesauce should be added to an empty bowl and the capsule should be opened. All of the pellets inside the capsule should be carefully emptied on the applesauce. The pellets should be mixed with the applesauce and then swallowed immediately with a glass of cool water to ensure complete swallowing of the pellets. The applesauce used should not be hot and should be soft enough to be swallowed without chewing. The pellets should not be chewed or crushed. The pellets/applesauce mixture should not be stored for future use.
Hydrocodone Bitartrate ...

Hydrocodone Bitartrate And Acetaminophen

There are two regimens for decitabine for injection administration. With either regimen it is recommended that patients be treated for a minimum of 4 cycles; however, a complete or partial response may take longer than 4 cycles. Complete blood counts and platelet counts should be performed as needed to monitor response and toxicity, but at a minimum, prior to each cycle. Liver chemistries and serum creatinine should be obtained prior to initiation of treatment.

2.1 Treatment Regimen – Option 1

Decitabine for injection is administered at a dose of 15 mg/m2 by continuous intravenous infusion over 3 hours repeated every 8 hours for 3 days. This cycle should be repeated every 6 weeks. Patients may be premedicated with standard anti-emetic therapy.

If hematologic recovery (ANC ≥ 1,000/μL and platelets ≥ 50,000/μL) from a previous decitabine for injection treatment cycle requires more than 6 weeks, then the next cycle of decitabine for injection therapy should be delayed and dosing temporarily reduced by following this algorithm:
Recovery requiring more than 6, but less than 8 weeks − Decitabine for injection dosing to be delayed for up to 2 weeks and the dose temporarily reduced to 11 mg/m2every 8 hours (33 mg/m2/day, 99 mg/m2/cycle) upon restarting therapy. Recovery requiring more than 8, but less than 10 weeks − Patient should be assessed for disease progression (by bone marrow aspirates); in the absence of progression, the decitabine for injection dose should be delayed up to 2 more weeks and the dose reduced to 11 mg/m2 every 8 hours (33 mg/m2/day, 99 mg/m2/cycle) upon restarting therapy, then maintained or increased in subsequent cycles as clinically indicated.
2.2 Treatment Regimen – Option 2

Decitabine for injection is administered at a dose of 20 mg/m2 by continuous intravenous infusion over 1 hour repeated daily for 5 days. This cycle should be repeated every 4 weeks. Patients may be premedicated with standard anti-emetic therapy.

If myelosuppression is present, subsequent treatment cycles of decitabine for injection should be delayed until there is hematologic recovery (ANC ≥ 1,000/μL platelets ≥ 50,000/μL).

2.3 Patients with Non-hematologic Toxicity

Following the first cycle of decitabine for injection treatment, if any of the following non-hematologic toxicities are present, decitabine for injection treatment should not be restarted until the toxicity is resolved: 1) serum creatinine ≥ 2 mg/dL; 2) SGPT, total bilirubin ≥ 2 times ULN; 3) and active or uncontrolled infection.

2.4 Instructions for Intravenous Administration

Decitabine for injection is a cytotoxic drug and caution should be exercised when handling and preparing decitabine for injection. Procedures for proper handling and disposal of antineoplastic drugs should be applied. Several guidances on this subject have been published.1-4 .

Decitabine for injection should be aseptically reconstituted with 10 mL of Sterile Water for Injection (USP); upon reconstitution, each mL contains approximately 5 mg of decitabine at pH 6.7 to 7.3. Immediately after reconstitution, the solution should be further diluted with 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, 5% Dextrose Injection, or Lactated Ringer’s Injection to a final drug concentration of 0.1 to 1 mg/mL. Unless used within 15 minutes of reconstitution, the diluted solution must be prepared using cold (2˚C - 8˚C) infusion fluids and stored at 2˚C - 8˚C (36˚F - 46˚F) for up to a maximum of 7 hours until administration.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. Do not use if there is evidence of particulate matter or discoloration.
Ranitidine

Ranitidine

adults and children 12 years and over: to relieve symptoms, swallow 1 tablet with a glass of water to prevent symptoms, swallow 1 tablet with a glass of water 30 to 60 minutes before eating food or drinking beverages that cause heartburn can be used up to twice daily (do not take more than 2 tablets in 24 hours) children under 12 years: ask a doctor
Donepezil Hydrochloride...

Donepezil Hydrochloride

Donepezil hydrochloride tablets should be taken in the evening, just prior to retiring.

Donepezil hydrochloride tablets can be taken with or without food.

Donepezil hydrochloride 23 mg tablet should not be split, crushed or chewed because this may increase its rate of absorption.

2.1. Mild to Moderate Alzheimer's Disease

The dosages of donepezil hydrochloride tablets shown to be effective in controlled clinical trials are 5 mg and 10 mg administered once per day.

The higher dose of 10 mg did not provide a statistically significantly greater clinical benefit than 5 mg. There is a suggestion, however, based upon order of group mean scores and dose trend analyses of data from these clinical trials, that a daily dose of 10 mg of donepezil hydrochloride tablets might provide additional benefit for some patients. Accordingly, whether or not to employ a dose of 10 mg is a matter of prescriber and patient preference.

2.2. Moderate to Severe Alzheimer’s Disease

Donepezil hydrochloride tablets has been shown to be effective in controlled clinical trials at doses of 10 mg and 23 mg administered once daily. Results of a controlled clinical trial in moderate to severe Alzheimer’s Disease that compared donepezil hydrochloride tablets 23 mg once daily to 10 mg once daily suggest that a 23 mg dose of donepezil hydrochloride tablets provided additional benefit.

2.3. Titration

The recommended starting dose of donepezil hydrochloride tablets is 5 mg once daily. Evidence from the controlled trials in mild to moderate Alzheimer’s disease indicates that the 10 mg dose, with a one week titration, is likely to be associated with a higher incidence of cholinergic adverse events compared to the 5 mg dose. In open-label trials using a 6 week titration, the type and frequency of these same adverse events were similar between the 5 mg and 10 mg dose groups. Therefore, because donepezil hydrochloride steady state is achieved about 15 days after it is started and because the incidence of untoward effects may be influenced by the rate of dose escalation, a dose of 10 mg should not be administered until patients have been on a daily dose of 5 mg for 4 to 6 weeks. A dose of 23 mg once daily can be administered once patients have been on a dose of 10 mg once daily for at least 3 months.
Fexofenadine Hydrochlor...

Fexofenadine Hydrochloride

30 mg
adults and children 12 years of age and over         take two 30 mg tablets with water every 12 hours; do not take more than 4 tablets in 24 hours children 6 to under 12 years of age take one 30 mg tablet with water every 12 hours; do not take more than 2 tablets in 24 hours children under 6 years of age do not use Adults 65 years of age and older ask a doctor consumers with kidney disease ask a doctor
60 mg
adults and children 12 years of age and over         take one 60 mg tablet with water every 12 hours; do not take more than 2 tablets in 24 hours children under 12 years of age do not use Adults 65 years of age and older ask a doctor consumers with kidney disease ask a doctor
180 mg
adults and children 12 years of age and over         take one 180 mg tablet with water once a day; do not take more than 1 tablet in 24 hours children under 12 years of age do not use Adults 65 years of age and older ask a doctor consumers with kidney disease ask a doctor
Acetaminophen Pm

Acetaminophen Pm

The recommended starting dose of memantine hydrochloride is 5 mg once daily. The dose should be increased in 5 mg increments to 10 mg/day (5 mg twice daily), 15 mg/day (5 mg and 10 mg as separate doses), and 20 mg/day (10 mg twice daily). The minimum recommended interval between dose increases is one week. The dosage shown to be effective in controlled clinical trials is 20 mg/day.

Memantine hydrochloride tablets can be taken with or without food. If a patient misses a single dose of memantine hydrochloride, that patient should not double up on the next dose. The next dose should be taken as scheduled. If a patient fails to take memantine hydrochloride for several days, dosing may need to be resumed at lower doses and retitrated as described above.

Special Populations

Renal Impairment

A target dose of 5 mg twice daily is recommended in patients with severe renal impairment (creatinine clearance of 5 to 29 mL/min based on the Cockroft-Gault equation).

Hepatic Impairment

Memantine hydrochloride should be administered with caution to patients with severe hepatic impairment [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Ziprasidone Hydrochlori...

Ziprasidone Hydrochloride

2.1 Schizophrenia

Dose Selection Ziprasidone hydrochloride capsules should be administered at an initial daily dose of 20 mg twice daily with food. In some patients, daily dosage may subsequently be adjusted on the basis of individual clinical status up to 80 mg twice daily. Dosage adjustments, if indicated, should generally occur at intervals of not less than 2 days, as steady-state is achieved within 1 to 3 days. In order to ensure use of the lowest effective dose, patients should ordinarily be observed for improvement for several weeks before upward dosage adjustment.

Efficacy in schizophrenia was demonstrated in a dose range of 20 mg to 100 mg twice daily in short-term, placebo-controlled clinical trials. There were trends toward dose response within the range of 20 mg to 80 mg twice daily, but results were not consistent. An increase to a dose greater than 80 mg twice daily is not generally recommended. The safety of doses above 100 mg twice daily has not been systematically evaluated in clinical trials [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].

Maintenance Treatment While there is no body of evidence available to answer the question of how long a patient treated with ziprasidone should remain on it, a maintenance study in patients who had been symptomatically stable and then randomized to continue ziprasidone or switch to placebo demonstrated a delay in time to relapse for patients receiving ziprasidone hydrochloride capsules [see Clinical Studies (14.1)]. No additional benefit was demonstrated for doses above 20 mg twice daily. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

2.4 Dosing in Special Populations

Oral: Dosage adjustments are generally not required on the basis of age, gender, race, or renal or hepatic impairment. Ziprasidone hydrochloride capsules are not approved for use in children or adolescents.
Valacyclovir Hydrochlor...

Valacyclovir Hydrochloride

2.1 General Dosing Information
Valganciclovir tablets USP should be taken with food [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. The bioavailability of ganciclovir from valganciclovir is significantly higher than from ganciclovir capsules. Therefore, valganciclovir tablets USP cannot be substituted for ganciclovir capsules on a one-to-one basis [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. Adult patients should use valganciclovir tablets, not valganciclovir for oral solution.
2.2 Adult Patients With Normal Renal Function

For dosage recommendations in adult patients with renal impairment [see Dosage and Administration (2.5)].

Treatment of CMV Retinitis: Induction:
The recommended dose is 900 mg (two 450 mg tablets) twice a day for 21 days. Maintenance: Following induction treatment, or in adult patients with inactive CMV retinitis, the recommended dose is 900 mg (two 450 mg tablets) once a day.
Prevention of CMV Disease:
For adult patients who have received a heart or kidney-pancreas transplant, the recommended dose is 900 mg (two 450 mg tablets) once a day starting within 10 days of transplantation until 100 days post-transplantation. For adult patients who have received a kidney transplant, the recommended dose is 900 mg (two 450 mg tablets) once a day starting within 10 days of transplantation until 200 days post-transplantation.
2.3 Pediatric Patients

Prevention of CMV Disease: For pediatric patients 4 months to 16 years of age who have received a kidney or heart transplant, the recommended once daily dose of valganciclovir tablets USP starting within 10 days of transplantation until 100 days post-transplantation is based on body surface area (BSA) and creatinine clearance (CrCl) derived from a modified Schwartz formula, and is calculated using the equation below:

Pediatric Dose (mg) = 7 x BSA x CrCl (calculated using a modified Schwartz formula). If the calculated Schwartz creatinine clearance exceeds 150 mL/min/1.73m2, then a maximum value of 150 mL/min/1.73m2 should be used in the equation.

where k =

0.45 for patients aged 4 months to < 1 year,

0.45 for patients aged 1 to < 2 years (note k value is 0.45 instead of the typical value of 0.55),

0.55 for boys aged 2 to < 13 years and girls aged 2 to 16 years, and

0.7 for boys aged 13 to 16 years.

All calculated doses should be rounded to the nearest 25 mg increment for the actual deliverable dose. If the calculated dose exceeds 900 mg, a maximum dose of 900 mg should be administered. Valganciclovir for oral solution is the preferred formulation since it provides the ability to administer a dose calculated according to the formula above; however, valganciclovir tablets USP may be used if the calculated doses are within 10% of available tablet strength (450 mg). For example, if the calculated dose is between 405 mg and 495 mg, one 450 mg tablet may be taken.

2.5 Renal Impairment

Dosage recommendations for adult patients with reduced renal function are provided in Table 1. For adult patients on hemodialysis (CrCl <10 mL/min), a dose recommendation for valganciclovir tablets cannot be given [see Use in Specific Populations (8.5, 8.6 ), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Table 1 Dosage Recommendations for Adult Patients with Impaired Renal Function
Valganciclovir 450 mg Tablets CrCl*(mL/min) Induction Dose Maintenance/ Prevention Dose ≥ 60 900 mg twice daily 900 mg once daily 40 to 59 450 mg twice daily 450 mg once daily 25 to 39 450 mg once daily 450 mg every 2 days 10 to 24 450 mg every 2 days 450 mg twice weekly < 10 (on hemodialysis) not recommended not recommended
*An estimated creatinine clearance is calculated from serum creatinine by the following formulas:

For males=  (140 – age [years]) x (body weight [kg])

                     _______________________________

                        (72) x (serum creatinine [mg/dL])

For females= 0.85 x male value

Dosing in pediatric patients with renal impairment can be done using the recommended equations because CrCl is a component in the calculation [see Dosage and Administration (2.3)].

2.6 Handling and Disposal

Caution should be exercised in the handling of valganciclovir tablets USP. Tablets should not be broken or crushed. Because valganciclovir is considered a potential teratogen and carcinogen in humans, caution should be observed in handling broken tablets, [see Warnings and Precautions (5.3, 5.4)]. Avoid direct contact with broken or crushed tablets with skin or mucous membranes. If such contact occurs, wash thoroughly with soap and water, and rinse eyes thoroughly with plain water.

Because ganciclovir shares some of the properties of antitumor agents (i.e., carcinogenicity and mutagenicity), consideration should be given to handling and disposal according to guidelines issued for antineoplastic drugs. Several guidelines on this subject have been published. However, there is no general agreement that all of the procedures recommended in the guidelines are necessary or appropriate [see References (15)].
Levofloxacin

Levofloxacin

2.1       Dosage in Adult Patients with Normal Renal Function

The usual dose of levofloxacin tablets are 250 mg, 500 mg, or 750 mg administered orally every 24 hours, as indicated by infection and described in Table 1.

These recommendations apply to patients with creatinine clearance ≥ 50 mL/min. For patients with creatinine clearance <50 mL/min, adjustments to the dosing regimen are required [see Dosage and Administration (2.3)].

Table 1: Dosage in Adult Patients with Normal Renal Function (creatinine clearance ≥ 50 mL/min)
Type of Infection* Dosed Every 24 hours Duration (days)† Nosocomial Pneumonia 750 mg 7 to 14 Community Acquired Pneumonia ‡ 500 mg 7 to 14 Community Acquired Pneumonia§ 750 mg 5 Acute Bacterial Sinusitis 750 mg 5 500 mg 10 to 14 Acute Bacterial Exacerbation of Chronic Bronchitis 500 mg 7 Complicated Skin and Skin Structure Infections (SSSI) 750 mg 7 to 14 Uncomplicated SSSI 500 mg 7 to 10 Chronic Bacterial Prostatitis 500 mg 28 Complicated Urinary Tract Infection (cUTI) or Acute Pyelonephritis (AP)¶ 750 mg 5 Complicated Urinary Tract Infection (cUTI) or Acute Pyelonephritis (AP)# 250 mg 10 Uncomplicated Urinary Tract Infection 250 mg 3 Inhalational Anthrax (Post-Exposure), adult and pediatric patients > 50 kg Þ,ß Pediatric patients < 50 kg and ≥ 6 months of age Þ,ß 500 mg see Table 2 below (2.2) 60 ß 60 ß Plague, adult and pediatric patients > 50 kgà Pediatric patients < 50 kg and ≥ 6 months of age 500 mgsee Table 2 below (2.2) 10 to 1410 to 14
1* Due to the designated pathogens [see Indications and Usage (1)].

†Sequential therapy (intravenous to oral) may be instituted at the discretion of the physician.

‡ Due to methicillin-susceptible Staphylococcus aureus, Streptococcus pneumoniae (including multi-drug-resistant isolates [MDRSP]), Haemophilus influenzae, Haemophilus parainfluenzae, Klebsiella pneumoniae, Moraxella catarrhalis, Chlamydophila pneumoniae, Legionella pneumophila, or Mycoplasma pneumoniae [see Indications and Usage (1.2)].

§Due to Streptococcus pneumoniae (excluding multi-drug-resistant isolates [MDRSP]), Haemophilus influenzae, Haemophilus parainfluenzae, Mycoplasma pneumoniae, or Chlamydophila pneumoniae [see Indications and Usage (1.3)].

¶This regimen is indicated for cUTI due to Escherichia coli, Klebsiella pneumoniae, Proteus mirabilis and AP due to E. coli, including cases with concurrent bacteremia.

#This regimen is indicated for cUTI due to Enterococcus faecalis, Enterococcus cloacae, Escherichia coli, Klebsiella pneumoniae, Proteus mirabilis, Pseudomonas aeruginosa; and for AP due to E. coli.

ÞDrug administration should begin as soon as possible after suspected or confirmed exposure to aerosolized B. anthracis. This indication is based on a surrogate endpoint. Levofloxacin plasma concentrations achieved in humans are reasonably likely to predict clinical benefit [see Clinical Studies (14.9)].

ßThe safety of levofloxacin in adults for durations of therapy beyond 28 days or in pediatric patients for durations beyond 14 days has not been studied. An increased incidence of musculoskeletal adverse events compared to controls has been observed in pediatric patients [see Warnings and Precautions (5.10), Use in Specific Populations (8.4), and Clinical Studies (14.9)]. Prolonged levofloxacin therapy should only be used when the benefit outweighs the risk.

à    Drug administration should begin as soon as possible after suspected or confirmed exposure to Yersinia pestis. Higher doses of levofloxacin typically used for treatment of pneumonia can be used for treatment of plague, if clinically indicated.

2.2       Dosage in Pediatric Patients

The dosage in pediatric patients ≥ 6 months of age is described below in Table 2.

Table 2: Dosage in Pediatric Patients ≥ 6 months of age
Type of Infection* Dose Freq. Once every Duration† Inhalational Anthrax (post-exposure) ‡,§ Pediatric patients > 50 kg 500 mg 24 hr 60 days§ Pediatric patients < 50 kg and ≥ 6 months of age 8 mg/kg (not to exceed 250 mg per dose) 12 hr 60 days§ Plague¶ Pediatric patients > 50 kg 500 mg 24 hr 10 to 14 days Pediatric patients < 50 kg and ≥ 6 months of age 8 mg/kg (not to exceed 250 mg per dose) 12 hr 10 to 14 days
*Due to Bacillus anthracis [see Indications and Usage (1.13)] and Yersinia pestis [see Indications and Usage (1.14)].

†Sequential therapy (intravenous to oral) may be instituted at the discretion of the physician.

‡Drug administration should begin as soon as possible after suspected or confirmed exposure toaerosolizedB. anthracis. This indication is based on a surrogate endpoint. Levofloxacin plasma concentrationsachieved in humans are reasonably likely to predict clinical benefit [see Clinical Studies (14.9)]

§The safety of levofloxacin in pediatric patients for durations of therapy beyond 14 days has not beenstudied. An increased incidence of musculoskeletal adverse events compared to controls has been observed in pediatric patients [see Warnings and Precautions (5.10), Use in Specific Populations (8.4), and Clinical Studies (14.9)]. Prolonged levofloxacin therapy should only be used when the benefit outweighs the risk.

¶ Drug administration should begin as soon as possible after suspected or confirmed exposure to Yersinia pestis.

2.3       Dosage Adjustment in Adults with Renal Impairment

Administer levofloxacin with caution in the presence of renal insufficiency. Careful clinical observation and appropriate laboratory studies should be performed prior to and during therapy since elimination of levofloxacin may be reduced.

No adjustment is necessary for patients with a creatinine clearance ≥ 50 mL/min.

In patients with impaired renal function (creatinine clearance <50 mL/min), adjustment of the dosage regimen is necessary to avoid the accumulation of levofloxacin due to decreased clearance [seeUse in Specific Populations (8.6)].

Table 3 shows how to adjust dose based on creatinine clearance.

Table 3: Dosage Adjustment in Adult Patients with Renal Impairment (creatinine clearance <50 mL/min)
Dosage in Normal Renal Function Every 24 hours Creatinine Clearance 20 to 49 mL/min Creatinine Clearance 10 to 19 mL/min Hemodialysis or Chronic Ambulatory Peritoneal Dialysis (CAPD) 750 mg 750 mg every 48 hours 750 mg initial dose, then 500 mg every 48 hours 750 mg initial dose, then 500 mg every 48 hours 500 mg 500 mg initial dose, then
250 mg every 24 hours 500 mg initial dose, then
250 mg every 48 hours 500 mg initial dose, then
250 mg every 48 hours 250 mg No dosage adjustment required 250 mg every 48 hours. If treating uncomplicated UTI, then no dosage adjustment is required No information on dosing adjustment is available

2.4       Drug Interaction With Chelation Agents:

Antacids, Sucralfate, Metal Cations, Multivitamins

Levofloxacin tablets should be administered at least two hours before or two hours after antacids containing magnesium, aluminum, as well as sucralfate, metal cations such as iron, and multivitamin preparations with zinc or didanosine chewable/buffered tablets or the pediatric powder for oral solution [seeDrugInteractions (7.1) and Patient Counseling Information (17.2)]

2.5     Administration Instructions

Food and Levofloxacin Tablets

Levofloxacin tablets can be administered without regard to food.

Hydration for Patients Receiving Levofloxacin Tablets

Adequate hydration of patients receiving oral levofloxacin should be maintained to prevent the formation of highly concentrated urine. Crystalluria and cylindruria have been reported with quinolones [seeAdverse Reactions (6.1) and Patient Counseling Information (17.2)].
Clopidogrel Bisulfate

Clopidogrel Bisulfate

2.1 Acute Coronary Syndrome

Clopidogrel tablets can be administered with or without food [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]
For patients with non-ST-elevation ACS (UA/NSTEMI), initiate clopidogrel tablets with a single 300 mg oral loading dose and then continue at 75 mg once daily. Initiate aspirin (75 to 325 mg once daily) and continue in combination with clopidogrel tablets [see Clinical Studies (14.1)]. For patients with STEMI, the recommended dose of clopidogrel tablets is 75 mg once daily orally, administered in combination with aspirin (75 to 325 mg once daily), with or without thrombolytics. Clopidogrel tablets may be initiated with or without a loading dose [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].
2.2 Recent MI, Recent Stroke, or Established Peripheral Arterial Disease

The recommended daily dose of clopidogrel tablets is 75 mg once daily orally, with or without food [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.3 CYP2C19 Poor Metabolizers

CYP2C19 poor metabolizer status is associated with diminished antiplatelet response to clopidogrel. Although a higher dose regimen in poor metabolizers increases antiplatelet response [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.5)], an appropriate dose regimen for this patient population has not been established.

2.4 Use with Proton Pump Inhibitors (PPI)

Avoid using omeprazole or esomeprazole with clopidogrel tablets. Omeprazole and esomeprazole significantly reduce the antiplatelet activity of clopidogrel tablets. When concomitant administration of a PPI is required, consider using another acid-reducing agent with minimal or no CYP2C19 inhibitory effect on the formation of clopidogrel active metabolite [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1), Drug Interactions (7.1) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Risperidone

Risperidone

Table 1: Recommended Daily Dosage by Indication
Initial Dose Titration(Increments) Target Dose Effective Dose Range Schizophrenia : adults (2.1) 2 mg 1 to 2 mg 4 to 8 mg 4 to 16 mg Schizophrenia: adolescents (2.1) 0.5 mg 0.5 to 1 mg 3 mg 1 to 6 mg Bipolar mania:adults (2.2) 2 to 3 mg 1 mg 1 to 6 mg 1 to 6 mg Bipolar mania : in children and adolescents (2.2) 0.5 mg 0.5 to 1 mg 1 to 2.5 mg 1 to 6 mg Irritability in autistic disorder (2.3) 0.25 mg Can increase to 0.5 mg by Day 4: (body weight less than 20 kg) 0.5 mgCan increase to 1 mg by Day 4: (body weight greater than or equal to 20 kg) After Day 4, at intervals of > 2 weeks:0.25 mg(body weight less than 20 kg) 0.5 mg(body weight greater than or equal to 20 kg) 0.5 mg:(body weight less than 20 kg) 1 mg:(body weight greater than or equal to 20 kg) 0.5 to 3 mg
Severe Renal and Hepatic Impairment in Adults: use a lower starting dose of 0.5 mg twice daily. May increase to dosages above 1.5 mg twice daily at intervals of at one week or longer.

2.1 Schizophrenia

Adults

Usual Initial Dose

Risperidone orally disintegrating tablets can be administered once or twice daily. Initial dosing is 2 mg per day. May increase the dose at intervals of 24 hours or greater, in increments of 1 to 2 mg per day, as tolerated, to a recommended dose of 4 to 8 mg per day. In some patients, slower titration may be appropriate. Efficacy has been demonstrated in a range of 4 mg to 16 mg per day. However, doses above 6 mg per day for twice daily dosing were not demonstrated to be more efficacious than lower doses, were associated with more extrapyramidal symptoms and other adverse effects, and are generally not recommended. In a single study supporting once-daily dosing, the efficacy results were generally stronger for 8 mg than for 4 mg. The safety of doses above 16 mg per day has not been evaluated in clinical trials [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].

Adolescents

The initial dose is 0.5 mg once daily, administered as a single-daily dose in the morning or evening. The dose may be adjusted at intervals of 24 hours or greater, in increments of 0.5 mg or 1 mg per day, as tolerated, to a recommended dose of 3 mg per day. Although efficacy has been demonstrated in studies of adolescent patients with schizophrenia at doses between 1mg to 6 mg per day, no additional benefit was observed above 3 mg per day, and higher doses were associated with more adverse events. Doses higher than 6 mg per day have not been studied.

Patients experiencing persistent somnolence may benefit from administering half the daily dose twice daily.

Maintenance Therapy

While it is unknown how long a patient with schizophrenia should remain on risperidone orally disintegrating tablets, the effectiveness of risperidone orally disintegrating tablets 2 mg per day to 8 mg per day at delaying relapse was demonstrated in a controlled trial in adult patients who had been clinically stable for at least 4 weeks and were then followed for a period of 1 to 2 years [see Clinical Studies (14.1)]. Both adult and adolescent patients who respond acutely should generally be maintained on their effective dose beyond the acute episode. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

Reinitiation of Treatment in Patients Previously Discontinued

Although there are no data to specifically address reinitiation of treatment, it is recommended that after an interval off risperidone orally disintegrating tablets, the initial titration schedule should be followed.

Switching From Other Antipsychotics

There are no systematically collected data to specifically address switching schizophrenic patients from other antipsychotics to risperidone orally disintegrating tablets, or treating patients with concomitant antipsychotics.

2.2 Bipolar Mania

Usual Dose Adults

The initial dose range is 2 mg to 3 mg per day. The dose may be adjusted at intervals of 24 hours or greater, in increments of 1 mg per day. The effective dose range is 1 mg to 6 mg per day, as studied in the short-term, placebo-controlled trials. In these trials, short-term (3 week) anti-manic efficacy was demonstrated in a flexible dosage range of 1 mg to 6 mg per day [see Clinical Studies (14.2, 14.3)]. Risperidone orally disintegrating tablets doses higher than 6 mg per day were not studied.

Pediatrics The initial dose is 0.5 mg once daily, administered as a single-daily dose in the morning or evening. The dose may be adjusted at intervals of 24 hours or greater, in increments of 0.5 mg or 1 mg per day, as tolerated, to the recommended target dose of 1mg to 2.5 mg per day. Although efficacy has been demonstrated in studies of pediatric patients with bipolar mania at doses between 0.5 mg and 6 mg per day, no additional benefit was observed above 2.5 mg per day, and higher doses were associated with more adverse events. Doses higher than 6 mg per day have not been studied.

Patients experiencing persistent somnolence may benefit from administering half the daily dose twice daily.

Maintenance Therapy

There is no body of evidence available from controlled trials to guide a clinician in the longer-term management of a patient who improves during treatment of an acute manic episode with risperidone orally disintegrating tablets. While it is generally agreed that pharmacological treatment beyond an acute response in mania is desirable, both for maintenance of the initial response and for prevention of new manic episodes, there are no systematically obtained data to support the use of risperidone orally disintegrating tablets in such longer-term treatment (i.e., beyond 3 weeks). The physician who elects to use risperidone orally disintegrating tablets for extended periods should periodically re-evaluate the long-term risks and benefits of the drug for the individual patient.

2.3 Irritability Associated with Autistic Disorder – Pediatrics (Children and Adolescents)

The dosage of risperidone orally disintegrating tablets should be individualized according to the response and tolerability of the patient. The total daily dose of risperidone orally disintegrating tablets can be administered once daily, or half the total daily dose can be administered twice daily.

For patients with body weight less than 20 kg, initiate dosing at 0.25 mg per day. For patients with body weight greater than or equal to 20 kg, initiate dosing at 0.5 mg per day. After a minimum of four days, the dose may be increased to the recommended dose of 0.5 mg per day for patients less than 20 kg and 1 mg per day for patients greater than or equal to 20 kg. Maintain this dose for a minimum of 14 days. In patients not achieving sufficient clinicalresponse, the dose may be increased at intervals of 2 weeks or greater, in increments of 0.25 mg per day for patients less than 20 kg, or increments of 0.5 mg per day for patients greater than or equal to 20 kg. The effective dose range is 0.5 mg to 3 mg per day. No dosing data are available for children who weigh less than 15 kg.

Once sufficient clinical response has been achieved and maintained, consider gradually lowering the dose to achieve the optimal balance of efficacy and safety. The physician who elects to use risperidone orally disintegrating tabletsfor extended periods should periodically re-evaluate the long-term risks and benefits of the drug for the individual patient.

Patients experiencing persistent somnolence may benefit from a once-daily dose administered at bedtime or administering half the daily dose twice daily, or a reduction of the dose.

2.4 Dosing in Patients with Severe Renal or Hepatic Impairment

For patients with severe renal impairment (CLcr < 30 mL/min) or hepatic impairment (10 to 15 points on Child Pugh System), the initial starting dose is 0.5 mg twice daily. The dose may be increased in increments of 0.5 mg or less, administered twice daily. For doses above 1.5 mg twice daily, increase in intervals of one week or greater [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6 and 8.7)].

2.5 Dose Adjustments fpr Specific Drug Interactions

When risperidone orally disintegrating tablets is co-administered with enzyme inducers (e.g., carbamazepine), the dose of risperidone orally disintegrating tablets should be increased up to double the patient’s usual dose. It may be necessary to decrease the risperidone orally disintegrating tablets dose when enzyme inducers such as carbamazepine are discontinued [see Drug Interactions (7.1)]. Similar effect may be expected with co-administration of risperidone orally disintegrating tablets with other enzyme inducers (e.g., phenytoin, rifampin, and phenobarbital).

When fluoxetine or paroxetine is co-administered with risperidone orally disintegrating tablets, the dose of risperidone orally disintegrating tablets should be reduced. The risperidone orally disintegrating tablets dose should not exceed 8 mg per day in adults when co-administered with these drugs. When initiating therapy, risperidone orally disintegrating tablets should be titrated slowly. It may be necessary to increase the risperidone orally disintegrating tablets dose when enzyme inhibitors such as fluoxetine or paroxetine are discontinued [see Drug Interactions(7.1)].

2.7 Directions for Use of Risperidone Orally Disintegrating Tablets

Tablet Accessing

Risperidone orally disintegrating tablets are supplied in blister packs of 30 (3 x 10) and 100 (10 x 10).

Do not open the blister until ready to administer. For single tablet removal, separate one of the four blister units by tearing apart at the perforations. Bend the corner where indicated. Peel back foil to expose the tablet. DO NOT push the tablet through the foil because this could damage the tablet.

Tablet Administration

Using dry hands, remove the tablet from the blister unit and immediately place the entire risperidone orally disintegrating tablet on the tongue. The risperidone orally disintegrating tablet should be consumed immediately, as the tablet cannot be stored once removed from the blister unit. Risperidone orally disintegrating tablets disintegrate in the mouth within seconds and can be swallowed subsequently with or without liquid. Patients should not attempt to split or to chew the tablet.
Olanzapine

Olanzapine

2.1 Schizophrenia

Adults

Dose Selection— Oral olanzapine should be administered on a once-a-day schedule without regard to meals, generally beginning with 5 to 10 mg initially, with a target dose of 10 mg/day within several days. Further dosage adjustments, if indicated, should 4 generally occur at intervals of not less than 1 week, since steady state for olanzapine would not be achieved for approximately 1 week in the typical patient. When dosage adjustments are necessary, dose increments/decrements of 5 mg QD are recommended.

Efficacy in schizophrenia was demonstrated in a dose range of 10 to 15 mg/day in clinical trials. However, doses above 10 mg/day were not demonstrated to be more efficacious than the 10 mg/day dose. An increase to a dose greater than the target dose of 10 mg/day (i.e., to a dose of 15 mg/day or greater) is recommended only after clinical assessment. Olanzapine is not indicated for use in doses above 20 mg/day.

Dosing in Special Populations — The recommended starting dose is 5 mg in patients who are debilitated, who have a predisposition to hypotensive reactions, who otherwise exhibit a combination of factors that may result in slower metabolism of olanzapine (e.g., nonsmoking female patients ≥65 years of age), or who may be more pharmacodynamically sensitive to olanzapine [see Warnings and Precautions (5.12), Drug Interactions (7), and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. When indicated, dose escalation should be performed with caution in these patients.

Maintenance Treatment —The effectiveness of oral olanzapine, 10 mg/day to 20 mg/day, in maintaining treatment response in schizophrenic patients who had been stable on olanzapine for approximately 8 weeks and were then followed for relapse has been demonstrated in a placebo-controlled trial [see Clinical Studies (14.1)]. The physician who elects to use olanzapine for extended periods should periodically reevaluate the long-term usefulness of the drug for the individual patient.

Adolescents

Dose Selection — Oral olanzapine should be administered on a once-a-day schedule without regard to meals with a recommended starting dose of 2.5 or 5 mg, with a target dose of 10 mg/day. Efficacy in adolescents with schizophrenia was demonstrated based on a flexible dose range of 2.5 to 20 mg/day in clinical trials, with a mean modal dose of 12.5 mg/day (mean dose of 11.1 mg/day). When dosage adjustments are necessary, dose increments/decrements of 2.5 or 5 mg are recommended.

The safety and effectiveness of doses above 20 mg/day have not been evaluated in clinical trials [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].

Maintenance Treatment — The efficacy of olanzapine for the maintenance treatment of schizophrenia in the adolescent population has not been systematically evaluated; however, maintenance efficacy can be extrapolated from adult data along with comparisons of olanzapine pharmacokinetic parameters in adult and adolescent patients. Thus, it is generally recommended that responding patients be continued beyond the acute response, but at the lowest dose needed to maintain remission. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

2.2 Bipolar I Disorder (Manic or Mixed Episodes)

Adults

Dose Selection for Monotherapy — Oral olanzapine should be administered on a once-a-day schedule without regard to meals, generally beginning with 10 or 15 mg. Dosage adjustments, if indicated, should generally occur at intervals of not less than 24 hours, reflecting the procedures in the placebo-controlled trials. When dosage adjustments are necessary, dose increments/decrements of 5 mg QD are recommended.

Short-term (3 to 4 weeks) antimanic efficacy was demonstrated in a dose range of 5 mg to 20 mg/day in clinical trials. The safety of doses above 20 mg/day has not been evaluated in clinical trials [see Clinical Studies (14.2)].

Maintenance Monotherapy — The benefit of maintaining bipolar I patients on monotherapy with oral olanzapine at a dose of 5 to 20 mg/day, after achieving a responder status for an average duration of 2 weeks, was demonstrated in a controlled trial [see Clinical Studies (14.2)]. The physician who elects to use olanzapine for extended periods should periodically reevaluate the long-term usefulness of the drug for the individual patient.

Dose Selection for Adjunctive Treatment — When administered as adjunctive treatment to lithium or valproate, oral olanzapine dosing should generally begin with 10 mg once-a-day without regard to meals.

Antimanic efficacy was demonstrated in a dose range of 5 mg to 20 mg/day in clinical trials [see Clinical Studies (14.2)]. The safety of doses above 20 mg/day has not been evaluated in clinical trials.

Adolescents

Dose Selection— Oral olanzapine should be administered on a once-a-day schedule without regard to meals with a recommended starting dose of 2.5 or 5 mg, with a target dose of 10 mg/day. Efficacy in adolescents with bipolar I disorder (manic or mixed episodes) was demonstrated based on a flexible dose range of 2.5 to 20 mg/day in clinical trials, with a mean modal dose of 10.7 mg/day (mean dose of 8.9 mg/day). When dosage adjustments are necessary, dose increments/decrements of 2.5 or 5 mg are recommended.

The safety and effectiveness of doses above 20 mg/day have not been evaluated in clinical trials [see Clinical Studies (14.2)].

Maintenance Treatment— The efficacy of olanzapine for the maintenance treatment of bipolar I disorder in the adolescent population has not been evaluated; however, maintenance efficacy can be extrapolated from adult data along with comparisons of olanzapine pharmacokinetic parameters in adult and adolescent patients. Thus, it is generally recommended that responding patients be continued beyond the acute response, but at the lowest dose needed to maintain remission. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

2.3 Administration of Olanzapine Orally Disintegrating Tablets

After opening sachet, peel back foil on blister. Do not push tablet through foil. Immediately upon opening the blister, using dry hands, remove tablet and place entire olanzapine orally disintegrating tabletin the mouth. Tablet disintegration occurs rapidly in saliva so it can be easily swallowed with or without liquid.

2.5 Olanzapine and Fluoxetine in Combination: Depressive Episodes Associated with Bipolar I Disorder

When using olanzapine and fluoxetine in combination, also refer to the Clinical Studies section of the package insert for Symbyax.

Adults

Oral olanzapine should be administered in combination with fluoxetine once daily in the evening, without regard to meals, generally beginning with 5 mg of oral olanzapine and 20 mg of fluoxetine. Dosage adjustments, if indicated, can be made according to efficacy and tolerability within dose ranges of oral olanzapine 5 to 12.5 mg and fluoxetine 20 to 50 mg. Antidepressant efficacy was demonstrated with olanzapine and fluoxetine in combination in adult patients with a dose range of olanzapine 6 to 12 mg and fluoxetine 25 to 50 mg. Safety of co-administration of doses above 18 mg olanzapine with 75 mg fluoxetine has not been evaluated in clinical studies.

Children and Adolescents (10 to 17 years of age)

Dosage and Administration information for pediatric patients (10 to 17 years) is approved for Eli Lilly and Company’s olanzapine orally disintegrating tablets. However, due to Eli Lilly and Company’s marketing exclusivity rights, this drug product is not labeled with that pediatric information.

Safety and efficacy of olanzapine and fluoxetine in combination was determined in clinical trials supporting approval of Symbyax (fixed dose combination of olanzapine and fluoxetine). Symbyax is dosed between 3 mg/25 mg (olanzapine/fluoxetine) per day and 12 mg/50 mg (olanzapine/fluoxetine) per day. The following table demonstrates the appropriate individual component doses of olanzapine and fluoxetine versus Symbyax. Dosage adjustments, if indicated, should be made with the individual components according to efficacy and tolerability.

Table 1: Approximate Dose Correspondence Between Symbyaxa and the Combination of Olanzapine and Fluoxetine

Use in Combination For Symbyax(mg/day) Olanzapine (mg/day) Fluoxetine(mg/day) 3 mg olanzapine/25 mg fluoxetine 2.5 20 6 mg olanzapine/25 mg fluoxetine 5 20 12 mg olanzapine/25 mg fluoxetine 10+2.5 20 6 mg olanzapine/50 mg fluoxetine 5 40+10 12 mg olanzapine/50 mg fluoxetine 10+2.5 40+10
a Symbyax (olanzapine/fluoxetine HCl) is a fixed-dose combination of olanzapine and fluoxetine.

While there is no body of evidence to answer the question of how long a patient treated with olanzapine and fluoxetine in combination should remain on it, it is generally accepted that bipolar I disorder, including the depressive episodes associated with bipolar I disorder, is a chronic illness requiring chronic treatment. The physician should periodically reexamine the need for continued pharmacotherapy.

Olanzapine monotherapy is not indicated for the treatment of depressive episodes associated with bipolar I disorder.

2.7 Olanzapine and Fluoxetine in Combination: Dosing in Special Populations

The starting dose of oral olanzapine 2.5 to 5 mg with fluoxetine 20 mg should be used for patients with a predisposition to hypotensive reactions, patients with hepatic impairment, or patients who exhibit a combination of factors that may slow the metabolism of olanzapine or fluoxetine in combination (female gender, geriatric age, nonsmoking status), or those patients who may be pharmacodynamically sensitive to olanzapine. Dosing modification may be necessary in patients who exhibit a combination of factors that may slow metabolism. When indicated, dose escalation should be performed with caution in these patients. Olanzapine and fluoxetine in combination have not been systematically studied in patients over 65 years of age or in patients under < 10 years of age [see Warnings and Precautions (5.12), Drug Interactions (7), and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Desloratadine

Desloratadine

Desloratadine orally disintegrating tablets may be taken without regard to meals. Place desloratadine orally disintegrating tablets on the tongue and allow to disintegrate before swallowing. Tablet disintegration occurs rapidly. Administer with or without water. Take tablet immediately after opening the blister.

2.1 Adults and adolescents 12 years of age and over

The recommended dose of desloratadine orally disintegrating tablets is one 5 mg tablet once daily.

2.2 Children 6 to 11 years of age

The recommended dose of desloratadine orally disintegrating tablet is one 2.5 mg tablet once daily.

NOTE: Desloratadine orally disintegrating tablets are not recommended for use in pediatric patients under 6 years of age as desloratadine syrup is better suited for these patients.

2.5 Adults with Hepatic or Renal Impairment

In adult patients with liver or renal impairment, a starting dose of one 5 mg tablet every other day is recommended based on pharmacokinetic data. Dosing recommendation for children with liver or renal impairment cannot be made due to lack of data [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Glimepiride

Glimepiride

2.1 Recommended Dosing

Glimepiride tablets should be administered with breakfast or the first main meal of the day.

The recommended starting dose of glimepiride tablets are 1 mg or 2 mg once daily. Patients at increased risk for hypoglycemia (e.g., the elderly or patients with renal impairment) should be started on 1 mg once daily [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1) and Use in Specific Populations (8.5, 8.6)].

After reaching a daily dose of 2 mg, further dose increases can be made in increments of 1 mg or 2 mg based upon the patient’s glycemic response. Uptitration should not occur more frequently than every 1 to 2 weeks. A conservative titration scheme is recommended for patients at increased risk for hypoglycemia [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1) and Use in Specific Populations (8.5, 8.6)].

The maximum recommended dose is 8 mg once daily.

Patients being transferred to glimepiride tablets from longer half-life sulfonylureas (e.g., chlorpropamide) may have overlapping drug effect for 1 to 2 weeks and should be appropriately monitored for hypoglycemia.

When colesevelam is coadministered with glimepiride, maximum plasma concentration and total exposure to glimepiride is reduced. Therefore, glimepiride tablets should be administered at least 4 hours prior to colesevelam.
Quetiapine Fumarate

Quetiapine Fumarate

2.1 Important Administration Instructions

Quetiapine fumarate tablets can be taken with or without food

2.2 Recommended Dosing

The recommended initial dose, titration, dose range and maximum quetiapine fumarate tablets dose for each approved indication is displayed in Table 1. After initial dosing, adjustments can be made upwards or downwards, if necessary, depending upon the clinical response and tolerability of the patient [see Clinical Studies (14.1 and 14.2)].

Table 1: Recommended Dosing for Quetiapine Fumarate Tablets
Indication Initial Dose and Titration Recommended Dose Maximum Dose Schizophrenia-Adults Day 1: 25 mg twice daily. Increase in increments of 25 mg to 50 mg divided two or three times on Days 2 and 3 to range of 300 to 400 mg by Day 4. Further adjustments can be made in increments of 25 to 50 mg twice a day, in intervals of not less than 2 days. 150 to 750 mg/day 750 mg/day Schizophrenia- Adolescents (13 to 17 years) Day 1: 25 mg twice daily. Day 2: Twice daily dosing totaling 100 mg. Day 3: Twice daily dosing totaling 200 mg.Day 4: Twice daily dosing totaling 300 mg.Day 5: Twice daily dosing totaling 400 mg.Further adjustments should be in increments no greater than 100 mg/day within the recommended dose range of 400 to 800 mg/day. Based on response and tolerability, may be administered three times daily. 400 to 800 mg/day 800 mg/day Schizophrenia-Maintenance N/A1 400 to 800 mg/day 800 mg/day Bipolar Mania- Adults Monotherapy or as an adjunct to lithium or divalproex Day 1: Twice daily dosing totaling 100 mg. Day 2: Twice daily dosing totaling 200 mg. Day 3: Twice daily dosing totaling 300 mg.Day 4: Twice daily dosing totaling 400 mg.Further dosage adjustments up to 800 mg/day by Day 6 should be in increments of no greater than 200 mg/day. 400 to 800 mg/day 800 mg/day Bipolar Mania- Children and Adolescents (10 to 17 years), Monotherapy Day 1: 25 mg twice daily.Day 2: Twice daily dosing totaling 100 mg. Day 3: Twice daily dosing totaling 200 mg.Day 4: Twice daily dosing totaling 300 mg.Day 5: Twice daily dosing totaling 400 mg.Further adjustments should be in increments no greater than 100 mg/day within the recommended dose range of 400 to 600 mg/day. Based on response and tolerability, may be administered three times daily. 400 to 600 mg/day 600 mg/day Bipolar Depression- Adults Administer once daily at bedtime. Day 1: 50 mg Day 2: 100 mg Day 3: 200 mg Day 4: 300 mg 300 mg/day 300 mg/day Bipolar I Disorder Maintenance Therapy- Adults Administer twice daily totaling 400-800 mg/day as adjunct to lithium or divalproex. Generally, in the maintenance phase, patients continued on the same dose on which they were stabilized. 400 to 800 mg/day 800 mg/day
1 N/A Not applicable

Maintenance Treatment for Schizophrenia and Bipolar I Disorder

Maintenance Treatment—Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need formaintenance treatment and the appropriate dose for such treatment [see Clinical Studies (14.2)].

2.3 Dose Modifications in Elderly Patients

Consideration should be given to a slower rate of dose titration and a lower target dose in the elderly and in patients who are debilitated or who have a predisposition to hypotensive reactions [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. When indicated, dose escalation should be performed with caution in these patients.

Elderly patients should be started on quetiapine fumarate tablets 50 mg/day and the dose can be increased in increments of 50 mg/day depending on the clinical response and tolerability of the individual patient.

2.4 Dose Modifications in Hepatically Impaired Patients

Quetiapine fumarate tablets dose should be reduced to one sixth of original dose when co-medicated with a potent CYP3A4 inhibitor (e.g. ketoconazole, itraconazole, indinavir, ritonavir, nefazodone, etc.). When the CYP3A4 inhibitor is discontinued, the dose of quetiapine fumarate tablets should be increased by 6 fold [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3) and Drug Interactions(7.1)].

2.5 Dose Modifications when used with CYP3A4 Inhibitors

Quetiapine fumarate tablets dose should be reduced to one sixth of original dose when co-medicated with a potent CYP3A4 inhibitor (e.g., ketoconazole, itraconazole, indinavir, ritonavir, nefazodone, etc.). When the CYP3A4 inhibitor is discontinued, the dose of quetiapine fumarate tablets should be increased by 6 fold [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3) and Drug Interactions (7.1)].

2.6 Dose Modifications when used with CYP3A4 Inducers

Quetiapine fumarate tablets dose should be increased up to 5 fold of the original dose when used in combination with a chronic treatment (e.g., greater than 7 to 14 days) of a potent CYP3A4 inducer (e.g., phenytoin, carbamazepine, rifampin, avasimibe, St. John’s wort etc.). The dose should be titrated based on the clinical response and tolerability of the individual patient. When the CYP3A4 inducer is discontinued, the dose of quetiapine fumarate tablets should be reduced to the original level within 7 to 14 days [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3) and Drug Interactions (7.1)].

2.7 Reinitiation of Treatment in Patients Previously Discontinued

Although there are no data to specifically address re-initiation of treatment, it is recommended that when restarting therapy of patients who have been off quetiapine fumarate tablets for more than one week, the initial dosing schedule should be followed. When restarting patients who have been off quetiapine fumarate tablets for less than one week, gradual dose escalation may not be required and the maintenance dose may be reinitiated.

2.8 Switching from Antipsychotics

There are no systematically collected data to specifically address switching patients with schizophrenia from antipsychotics to quetiapine fumarate tablets, or concerning concomitant administration with antipsychotics. While immediate discontinuation of the previous antipsychotic treatment may be acceptable for some patients with schizophrenia, more gradual discontinuation may be most appropriate for others. In all cases, the period of overlapping antipsychotic administration should be minimized. When switching patients with schizophrenia from depot antipsychotics, if medically appropriate, initiate quetiapine fumarate tablets therapy in place of the next scheduled injection. The need for continuing existing EPS medication should be re-evaluated periodically.
Pantoprazole

Pantoprazole

2.1 Recommended Dosing Schedule

Pantoprazole sodium is supplied as delayed-release tablets. The recommended dosages are outlined in Table 1.

Table 1: Recommended Dosing Schedule for Pantoprazole Sodium Delayed-Release Tablets USP
Indication Dose Frequency Short-Term Treatment of Erosive Esophagitis Associated With GERD Adults 40 mg Once daily for up to 8 weeks* Children (5 years and older) ≥ 15 kg to < 40 kg 20 mg Once daily for up to 8 wks ≥ 40 kg 40 mg Maintenance of Healing of Erosive Esophagitis Adults 40 mg Once Daily*** Pathological Hypersecretory Conditions Including Zollinger-Ellison Syndrome Adults 40 mg Twice Daily**
* For adult patients who have not healed after 8 weeks of treatment, an additional 8-week course of pantoprazole sodium delayed-release tablets USP may be considered.

** Dosage regimens should be adjusted to individual patient needs and should continue for as long as clinically indicated. Doses up to 240 mg daily have been administered.

*** Controlled studies did not extend beyond 12 months

2.2 Administration Instructions

Directions for method of administration for each dosage form are presented in Table 2.

Table 2: Administration Instructions
Formulation Route Instructions* Delayed-Release Tablets Oral Swallowed whole, with or without food
* Patients should be cautioned that pantoprazole sodium delayed-release tablets USP should not be split, chewed, or crushed.

Pantoprazole Sodium Delayed-Release Tablets USP

Pantoprazole sodium delayed-release tablets USP should be swallowed whole, with or without food in the stomach. If patients are unable to swallow a 40 mg tablet, two 20 mg tablets may be taken. Concomitant administration of antacids does not affect the absorption of pantoprazole sodium delayed-release tablets USP.
Olanzapine

Olanzapine

2.1 Schizophrenia

Adults

Dose Selection— Oral olanzapine should be administered on a once-a-day schedule without regard to meals, generally beginning with 5 to 10 mg initially, with a target dose of 10 mg/day within several days. Further dosage adjustments, if indicated, should 4 generally occur at intervals of not less than 1 week, since steady state for olanzapine would not be achieved for approximately 1 week in the typical patient. When dosage adjustments are necessary, dose increments/decrements of 5 mg QD are recommended.

Efficacy in schizophrenia was demonstrated in a dose range of 10 to 15 mg/day in clinical trials. However, doses above 10 mg/day were not demonstrated to be more efficacious than the 10 mg/day dose. An increase to a dose greater than the target dose of 10 mg/day (i.e., to a dose of 15 mg/day or greater) is recommended only after clinical assessment. Olanzapine is not indicated for use in doses above 20 mg/day.

Dosing in Special Populations — The recommended starting dose is 5 mg in patients who are debilitated, who have a predisposition to hypotensive reactions, who otherwise exhibit a combination of factors that may result in slower metabolism of olanzapine (e.g., nonsmoking female patients ≥65 years of age), or who may be more pharmacodynamically sensitive to olanzapine [see Warnings and Precautions (5.12), Drug Interactions (7), and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. When indicated, dose escalation should be performed with caution in these patients.

Maintenance Treatment —The effectiveness of oral olanzapine, 10 mg/day to 20 mg/day, in maintaining treatment response in schizophrenic patients who had been stable on olanzapine for approximately 8 weeks and were then followed for relapse has been demonstrated in a placebo-controlled trial [see Clinical Studies (14.1)]. The physician who elects to use olanzapine for extended periods should periodically reevaluate the long-term usefulness of the drug for the individual patient.

Adolescents

Dose Selection — Oral olanzapine should be administered on a once-a-day schedule without regard to meals with a recommended starting dose of 2.5 or 5 mg, with a target dose of 10 mg/day. Efficacy in adolescents with schizophrenia was demonstrated based on a flexible dose range of 2.5 to 20 mg/day in clinical trials, with a mean modal dose of 12.5 mg/day (mean dose of 11.1 mg/day). When dosage adjustments are necessary, dose increments/decrements of 2.5 or 5 mg are recommended.

The safety and effectiveness of doses above 20 mg/day have not been evaluated in clinical trials [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].

Maintenance Treatment — The efficacy of olanzapine for the maintenance treatment of schizophrenia in the adolescent population has not been systematically evaluated; however, maintenance efficacy can be extrapolated from adult data along with comparisons of olanzapine pharmacokinetic parameters in adult and adolescent patients. Thus, it is generally recommended that responding patients be continued beyond the acute response, but at the lowest dose needed to maintain remission. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

2.2 Bipolar I Disorder (Manic or Mixed Episodes)

Adults

Dose Selection for Monotherapy — Oral olanzapine should be administered on a once-a-day schedule without regard to meals, generally beginning with 10 or 15 mg. Dosage adjustments, if indicated, should generally occur at intervals of not less than 24 hours, reflecting the procedures in the placebo-controlled trials. When dosage adjustments are necessary, dose increments/decrements of 5 mg QD are recommended.

Short-term (3 to 4 weeks) antimanic efficacy was demonstrated in a dose range of 5 mg to 20 mg/day in clinical trials. The safety of doses above 20 mg/day has not been evaluated in clinical trials [see Clinical Studies (14.2)].

Maintenance Monotherapy — The benefit of maintaining bipolar I patients on monotherapy with oral olanzapine at a dose of 5 to 20 mg/day, after achieving a responder status for an average duration of 2 weeks, was demonstrated in a controlled trial [see Clinical Studies (14.2)]. The physician who elects to use olanzapine for extended periods should periodically reevaluate the long-term usefulness of the drug for the individual patient.

Dose Selection for Adjunctive Treatment — When administered as adjunctive treatment to lithium or valproate, oral olanzapine dosing should generally begin with 10 mg once-a-day without regard to meals.

Antimanic efficacy was demonstrated in a dose range of 5 mg to 20 mg/day in clinical trials [see Clinical Studies (14.2)]. The safety of doses above 20 mg/day has not been evaluated in clinical trials.

Adolescents

Dose Selection— Oral olanzapine should be administered on a once-a-day schedule without regard to meals with a recommended starting dose of 2.5 or 5 mg, with a target dose of 10 mg/day. Efficacy in adolescents with bipolar I disorder (manic or mixed episodes) was demonstrated based on a flexible dose range of 2.5 to 20 mg/day in clinical trials, with a mean modal dose of 10.7 mg/day (mean dose of 8.9 mg/day). When dosage adjustments are necessary, dose increments/decrements of 2.5 or 5 mg are recommended.

The safety and effectiveness of doses above 20 mg/day have not been evaluated in clinical trials [see Clinical Studies (14.2)].

Maintenance Treatment— The efficacy of olanzapine for the maintenance treatment of bipolar I disorder in the adolescent population has not been evaluated; however, maintenance efficacy can be extrapolated from adult data along with comparisons of olanzapine pharmacokinetic parameters in adult and adolescent patients. Thus, it is generally recommended that responding patients be continued beyond the acute response, but at the lowest dose needed to maintain remission. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

2.5 Olanzapine and Fluoxetine in Combination: Depressive Episodes Associated with Bipolar I Disorder

When using olanzapine and fluoxetine in combination, also refer to the Clinical Studies section of the package insert for Symbyax.

Adults

Oral olanzapine should be administered in combination with fluoxetine once daily in the evening, without regard to meals, generally beginning with 5 mg of oral olanzapine and 20 mg of fluoxetine. Dosage adjustments, if indicated, can be made according to efficacy and tolerability within dose ranges of oral olanzapine 5 to 12.5 mg and fluoxetine 20 to 50 mg. Antidepressant efficacy was demonstrated with olanzapine and fluoxetine in combination in adult patients with a dose range of olanzapine 6 to 12 mg and fluoxetine 25 to 50 mg. Safety of co-administration of doses above 18 mg olanzapine with 75 mg fluoxetine has not been evaluated in clinical studies.

Children and Adolescents (10 to 17 years of age)

Dosage and Administration information for pediatric patients (10 to 17 years) is approved for Eli Lilly and Company’s olanzapine tablets. However, due to Eli Lilly and Company’s marketing exclusivity rights, this drug product is not labeled with that pediatric information.

Safety and efficacy of olanzapine and fluoxetine in combination was determined in clinical trials supporting approval of Symbyax (fixed dose combination of olanzapine and fluoxetine). Symbyax is dosed between 3 mg/25 mg (olanzapine/fluoxetine) per day and 12 mg/50 mg (olanzapine/fluoxetine) per day. The following table demonstrates the appropriate individual component doses of olanzapine and fluoxetine versus Symbyax. Dosage adjustments, if indicated, should be made with the individual components according to efficacy and tolerability.

Table 1: Approximate Dose Correspondence Between Symbyaxa and the Combination of Olanzapine and Fluoxetine
Use in Combination For Symbyax(mg/day) Olanzapine (mg/day) Fluoxetine(mg/day) 3 mg olanzapine/25 mg fluoxetine 2.5 20 6 mg olanzapine/25 mg fluoxetine 5 20 12 mg olanzapine/25 mg fluoxetine 10+2.5 20 6 mg olanzapine/50 mg fluoxetine 5 40+10 12 mg olanzapine/50 mg fluoxetine 10+2.5 40+10
a Symbyax (olanzapine/fluoxetine HCl) is a fixed-dose combination of olanzapine and fluoxetine.

While there is no body of evidence to answer the question of how long a patient treated with olanzapine and fluoxetine in combination should remain on it, it is generally accepted that bipolar I disorder, including the depressive episodes associated with bipolar I disorder, is a chronic illness requiring chronic treatment. The physician should periodically reexamine the need for continued pharmacotherapy.

Olanzapine monotherapy is not indicated for the treatment of depressive episodes associated with bipolar I disorder.

2.7 Olanzapine and Fluoxetine in Combination: Dosing in Special Populations

The starting dose of oral olanzapine 2.5 to 5 mg with fluoxetine 20 mg should be used for patients with a predisposition to hypotensive reactions, patients with hepatic impairment, or patients who exhibit a combination of factors that may slow the metabolism of olanzapine or fluoxetine in combination (female gender, geriatric age, nonsmoking status), or those patients who may be pharmacodynamically sensitive to olanzapine. Dosing modification may be necessary in patients who exhibit a combination of factors that may slow metabolism. When indicated, dose escalation should be performed with caution in these patients. Olanzapine and fluoxetine in combination have not been systematically studied in patients over 65 years of age or in patients under < 10 years of age. [see Warnings and Precautions (5.12), Drug Interactions (7), and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Montelukast Sodium

Montelukast Sodium

2.1 Asthma

Montelukast sodium should be taken once daily in the evening. The following doses are recommended:

For adults and adolescents 15 years of age and older: one 10 mg tablet.

For pediatric patients 6 to 14 years of age: one 5 mg chewable tablet.

For pediatric patients 2 to 5 years of age: one 4 mg chewable tablet

Safety and effectiveness in pediatric patients less than 12 months of age with asthma have not been established.

There have been no clinical trials in patients with asthma to evaluate the relative efficacy of morning versus evening dosing. The pharmacokinetics of montelukast are similar whether dosed in the morning or evening. Efficacy has been demonstrated for asthma when montelukast was administered in the evening without regard to time of food ingestion.

2.2 Exercise-Induced Bronchoconstriction (EIB)

For prevention of EIB, a single dose of montelukast sodium should be taken at least 2 hours before exercise.

The following doses are recommended:

For adults and adolescents 15 years of age and older: one 10 mg tablet

For pediatric patients 6 to 14 years of age: one 5 mg chewable tablet

An additional dose of montelukast sodium should not be taken within 24 hours of a previous dose. Patients already taking montelukast sodium daily for another indication (including chronic asthma) should not take an additional dose to prevent EIB. All patients should have available for rescue a short-acting β-agonist. Safety and efficacy in patients younger than 6 years of age have not been established. Daily administration of montelukast sodium for the chronic treatment of asthma has not been established to prevent acute episodes of EIB.

2.3 Allergic Rhinitis

For allergic rhinitis, montelukast sodium should be taken once daily. Efficacy was demonstrated for seasonal allergic rhinitis when montelukast was administered in the morning or the evening without regard to time of food ingestion. The time of administration may be individualized to suit patient needs.

The following doses for the treatment of symptoms of seasonal allergic rhinitis are recommended:

For adults and adolescents 15 years of age and older: one 10 mg tablet.

For pediatric patients 6 to 14 years of age: one 5 mg chewable tablet.

For pediatric patients 2 to 5 years of age: one 4 mg chewable tablet .

Safety and effectiveness in pediatric patients younger than 2 years of age with seasonal allergic rhinitis have not been established.

The following doses for the treatment of symptoms of perennial allergic rhinitis are recommended:

For adults and adolescents 15 years of age and older: one 10 mg tablet.

For pediatric patients 6 to 14 years of age: one 5 mg chewable tablet.

For pediatric patients 2 to 5 years of age: one 4 mg chewable tablet .

Safety and effectiveness in pediatric patients younger than 6 months of age with perennial allergic rhinitis have not been established.

2.4 Asthma and Allergic Rhinitis

Patients with both asthma and allergic rhinitis should take only one montelukast sodium dose daily in the evening.
Montelukast Sodium Gran...

Montelukast Sodium Granule

2.1 Asthma

Montelukast sodium should be taken once daily in the evening. The following doses are recommended:

For pediatric patients 2 to 5 years of age: one packet of 4 mg oral granules.

For pediatric patients 12 to 23 months of age: one packet of 4 mg oral granules.

Safety and effectiveness in pediatric patients less than 12 months of age with asthma have not been established.

There have been no clinical trials in patients with asthma to evaluate the relative efficacy of morning versus evening dosing. The pharmacokinetics of montelukast are similar whether dosed in the morning or evening. Efficacy has been demonstrated for asthma when montelukast was administered in the evening without regard to time of food ingestion.

2.3 Allergic Rhinitis

For allergic rhinitis, montelukast sodium should be taken once daily. Efficacy was demonstrated for seasonal allergic rhinitis when montelukast was administered in the morning or the evening without regard to time of food ingestion. The time of administration may be individualized to suit patient needs.

The following doses for the treatment of symptoms of seasonal allergic rhinitis are recommended:

For pediatric patients 2 to 5 years of age: one packet of 4 mg oral granules.

Safety and effectiveness in pediatric patients younger than 2 years of age with seasonal allergic rhinitis have not been established.

The following doses for the treatment of symptoms of perennial allergic rhinitis are recommended:

For pediatric patients 2 to 5 years of age: one packet of 4 mg oral granules.

For pediatric patients 6 to 23 months of age: one packet of 4 mg oral granules.

Safety and effectiveness in pediatric patients younger than 6 months of age with perennial allergic rhinitis have not been established.

2.4 Asthma and Allergic Rhinitis

Patients with both asthma and allergic rhinitis should take only one montelukast sodium dose daily in the evening.

2.5 Instructions for Administration of Oral Granules

Montelukast sodium 4 mg (montelukast) oral granules can be administered either directly in the mouth, dissolved in 1 teaspoonful (5 mL) of cold or room temperature baby formula or breast milk, or mixed with a spoonful of cold or room temperature soft foods; based on stability studies, only applesauce, carrots, rice, or ice cream should be used. The packet should not be opened until ready to use. After opening the packet, the full dose (with or without mixing with baby formula, breast milk, or food) must be administered within 15 minutes. If mixed with baby formula, breast milk, or food, montelukast sodium oral granules must not be stored for future use. Discard any unused portion. Montelukast sodium oral granules are not intended to be dissolved in any liquid other than baby formula or breast milk for administration. However, liquids may be taken subsequent to administration. Montelukast sodium oral granules can be administered without regard to the time of meals.
Moxifloxacin

Moxifloxacin

2.1 Dosage in Adult Patients

The dose of moxifloxacin hydrochloride tablet is 400 mg (orally) once every 24 hours. The duration of therapy depends on the type of infection as described in Table 1.

Table 1: Dosage and Duration of Therapy in Adult Patients
Type of Infectiona Dose Every 24 hours Durationb (days) Acute Bacterial Sinusitis (1.1) 400 mg 10 Acute Bacterial Exacerbation of Chronic Bronchitis (1.2) 400 mg 5 Community Acquired Pneumonia 400 mg 7 to 14 Uncomplicated Skin and Skin Structure Infections (SSSI ) (1.4) 400 mg 7 Complicated SSSI (1.5) 400 mg 7 to 21 Complicated Intra-Abdominal Infections (1.6) 400 mg 5 to 14
a Due to the designated pathogens [see Indications and Usage (1)

b Sequential therapy (intravenous to oral) may be instituted at the discretion of the physician

Intravenous formulation is indicated when it offers a route of administration advantageous to the patient (for example, patient cannot tolerate an oral dosage form). When switching from intravenous to oral formulation, no dosage adjustment is necessary. Patients whose therapy is started with moxifloxacin hydrochloride IV may be switched to moxifloxacin hydrochloride tablets when clinically indicated at the discretion of the physician.

2.2 Drug interactions with Multivalent Cations

Oral doses of moxifloxacin hydrochloride tablets should be administered at least 4 hours before or 8 hours after products containing magnesium, aluminum, iron or zinc, including antacids, sucralfate, multivitamins and VIDEX® (didanosine) chewable/buffered tablets or the pediatric powder for oral solution [see Drug Interactions (7.1 ) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.3 Administration Instructions

Moxifloxacin Hydrochloride Film-Coated Tablets

Moxifloxacin hydrochloride tablets can be taken with or without food, drink fluids liberally.
Ibu

Ibu

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of IBU tabletsand other treatment options before deciding to use IBU tablets. Usethe lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent withindividual patient treatment goals (see WARNINGS).

After observing the response to initial therapy with IBU tablets, thedose and frequency should be adjusted to suit an individual patient’sneeds.Do not exceed 3200 mg total daily dose. If gastrointestinal complaintsoccur, administer IBU tablets with meals or milk.

Rheumatoid arthritis and osteoarthritis, including flare-ups ofchronic disease:

Suggested Dosage: 1200 mg-3200 mg daily (400 mg, 600 mg or800 mg tid or qid). Individual patients may show a better responseto 3200 mg daily, as compared with 2400 mg, although in well-controlledclinical trials patients on 3200 mg did not show a better meanresponse in terms of efficacy. Therefore, when treating patients with3200 mg/day, the physician should observe sufficient increased clinicalbenefits to offset potential increased risk.The dose should be tailored to each patient, and may be loweredor raised depending on the severity of symptoms either at time of initiatingdrug therapy or as the patient responds or fails to respond.In general, patients with rheumatoid arthritis seem to require higherdoses of IBU tablets than do patients with osteoarthritis.

The smallest dose of IBU tablets that yields acceptable controlshould be employed. A linear blood level dose-response relationshipexists with single doses up to 800 mg (See CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGYfor effects of food on rate of absorption).

The availability of three tablet strengths facilitates dosage adjustment.In chronic conditions, a therapeutic response to therapy with IBU tablets is sometimes seen in a few days to a week but most often isobserved by two weeks. After a satisfactory response has beenachieved, the patient’s dose should be reviewed and adjusted asrequired.

Mild to moderate pain:

400 mg every 4 to 6 hours as necessaryfor relief of pain.In controlled analgesic clinical trials, doses of Ibuprofen tabletsgreater than 400 mg were no more effective than the 400 mg dose.

Dysmenorrhea:

For the treatment of dysmenorrhea, beginningwith the earliest onset of such pain, IBU tablets should be given in adose of 400 mg every 4 hours as necessary for the relief of pain.
Fenofibrate

Fenofibrate

2.1 General Considerations

Patients should be placed on an appropriate lipid-lowering diet before receiving fenofibrate capsules, and should continue this diet during treatment with fenofibrate capsules. Fenofibrate capsules can be given without regard to meals.

Patients should be advised to swallow fenofibrate capsules whole. Do not open, crush, dissolve or chew capsules.

The initial treatment for dyslipidemia is dietary therapy specific for the type of lipoprotein abnormality. Excess body weight and excess alcoholic intake may be important factors in hypertriglyceridemia and should be addressed prior to any drug therapy. Physical exercise can be an important ancillary measure. Diseases contributory to hyperlipidemia, such as hypothyroidism or diabetes mellitus should be looked for and adequately treated. Estrogen therapy, thiazide diuretics and beta-blockers are sometimes associated with massive rises in plasma triglycerides, especially in subjects with familial hypertriglyceridemia. In such cases, discontinuation of the specific etiologic agent may obviate the need for specific drug therapy of hypertriglyceridemia.

Lipid levels should be monitored periodically and consideration should be given to reducing the dosage of fenofibrate if lipid levels fall significantly below the targeted range.

Therapy should be withdrawn in patients who do not have an adequate response after two months of treatment with the maximum recommended dose of 130 mg once daily.

2.2 Hypercholesterolemia and Mixed Dyslipidemia

The initial dose of fenofibrate capsules is 130 mg per day.

2.3 Severe Hypertriglyceridemia

The initial dose is 43 to 130 mg per day. Dosage should be individualized according to patient response, and should be adjusted if necessary following repeat lipid determinations at 4 to 8 week intervals. The maximum dose is 130 mg per day.

2.4 Impaired Renal Function

Treatment with fenofibrate capsules should be initiated at a dose of 43 mg per day in patients having mild to moderately impaired renal function, and increased only after evaluation of the effects on renal function and lipid levels at this dose. The use of fenofibrate capsules should be avoided in patients with severe renal impairment [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.5 Geriatric Patients

Dose selection for the elderly should be made on the basis of renal function [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Sulindac

Sulindac

• if you are under 18 years of age, ask a doctor before use • before using this product, read the enclosed self-help guide for complete directions and other information • begin using the patch on your quit day • if you smoke more than 10 cigarettes per day, use the following schedule below:
STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

Use one 21 mg patch/day

Use one 14 mg patch/day

Use one 7 mg patch/day

Weeks 1-4

Weeks 5-6

Weeks 7-8
• if you smoke 10 or less cigarettes per day, start with Step 2 for 6 weeks, then Step 3 for 2 weeks • apply one new patch every 24 hours on skin that is dry, clean and hairless • remove backing from patch and immediately press onto skin. Hold for 10 seconds. • wash hands after applying or removing patch. Save pouch to use for patch disposal. Dispose of the used patches by folding sticky ends together and putting in pouch. • the used patch should be removed and a new one applied to a different skin site at the same time each day • if you have vivid dreams, you may remove the patch at bedtime and apply a new one in the morning • do not wear more than one patch at a time • do not cut patch in half or into smaller pieces • do not leave patch on for more than 24 hours because it may irritate your skin and loses strength after 24 hours • to avoid possible burns, remove patch before undergoing any MRI (magnetic resonance imaging) procedures • It is important to complete treatment. If you feel you need to use the patch for a longer period to keep from smoking, talk to your health care provider.
Mesnex

Mesnex

2.1 Dosing Information

Tizanidine tablets may be prescribed with or without food. Once the formulation has been selected and the decision to take with or without food has been made, this regimen should not be altered.

Food has complex effects on tizanidine pharmacokinetics, which differ with the different formulations. Tizanidine capsules and tizanidine tablets are bioequivalent to each other under fasting conditions (more than 3 hours after a meal), but not under fed conditions (within 30 minutes of a meal). These pharmacokinetic differences may result in clinically significant differences when switching administration of tablet and capsules and when switching administration between the fed or fasted state. These changes may result in increased adverse events, or delayed or more rapid onset of activity, depending upon the nature of the switch. For this reason, the prescriber should be thoroughly familiar with the changes in kinetics associated with these different conditions [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

The recommended starting dose is 2 mg. Because the effect of tizanidine tablets peaks at approximately 1 to 2 hours post-dose and dissipates between 3 to 6 hours post-dose, treatment can be repeated at 6 to 8 hour intervals, as needed, to a maximum of three doses in 24 hours.

Dosage can be gradually increased by 2 mg to 4 mg at each dose, with 1 to 4 days between dosage increases, until a satisfactory reduction of muscle tone is achieved. The total daily dose should not exceed 36 mg. Single doses greater than 16 mg have not been studied.

2.2 Dosing in Patients with Renal Impairment

Tizanidine tablets should be used with caution in patients with renal insufficiency (creatinine clearance < 25 mL/min), as clearance is reduced by more than 50%. In these, patients, during titration, the individual doses should be reduced. If higher doses are required, individual doses rather than dosing frequency should be increased [see Warnings and Precautions (5.7)].

2.3 Dosing in Patients with Hepatic Impairment

Tizanidine tablets should be used with caution in patients with any hepatic impairment. In these patients, during titration, the individual doses should be reduced. If higher doses are required, individual doses rather than dosing frequency should be increased. Monitoring of aminotransferase levels is recommended for baseline and 1 month after maximum dose is achieved, or if hepatic injury is suspected. [see Use in Specific Populations (8.7)]

2.4 Drug Discontinuation

If therapy needs to be discontinued, particularly in patients who have been receiving high doses (20 mg to 36 mg daily) for long periods (9 weeks or more) or who may be on concomitant treatment with narcotics, the dose should be decreased slowly (2 mg to 4 mg per day) to minimize the risk of withdrawal and rebound hypertension, tachycardia, and hypertonia [see Drug Abuse and Dependence (9.3)].
Zoledronic Acid

Zoledronic Acid

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

2.1 Hypercalcemia of Malignancy

The maximum recommended dose of zoledronic acid injection in hypercalcemia of malignancy (albumin-corrected serum calcium greater than or equal to 12 mg/dL [3 mmol/L]) is 4 mg. The 4 mg dose must be given as a single-dose intravenous infusion over no less than 15 minutes. Patients who receive zoledronic acid injection should have serum creatinine assessed prior to each treatment.

Dose adjustments of zoledronic acid injection are not necessary in treating patients for hypercalcemia of malignancy presenting with mild-to-moderate renal impairment prior to initiation of therapy (serum creatinine less than 400 µmol/L or less than 4.5 mg/dL).

Patients should be adequately rehydrated prior to administration of zoledronic acid injection [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)].

Consideration should be given to the severity of, as well as the symptoms of, tumor-induced hypercalcemia when considering use of zoledronic acid injection. Vigorous saline hydration, an integral part of hypercalcemia therapy, should be initiated promptly and an attempt should be made to restore the urine output to about 2 L/day throughout treatment. Mild or asymptomatic hypercalcemia may be treated with conservative measures (i.e., saline hydration, with or without loop diuretics). Patients should be hydrated adequately throughout the treatment, but overhydration, especially in those patients who have cardiac failure, must be avoided. Diuretic therapy should not be employed prior to correction of hypovolemia.

Retreatment with zoledronic acid injection 4 mg, may be considered if serum calcium does not return to normal or remain normal after initial treatment. It is recommended that a minimum of 7 days elapse before retreatment, to allow for full response to the initial dose. Renal function must be carefully monitored in all patients receiving zoledronic acid injection and serum creatinine must be assessed prior to retreatment with zoledronic acid injection [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)].

2.2. Multiple Myeloma and Metastatic Bone Lesions of Solid Tumors

The recommended dose of zoledronic acid injection in patients with multiple myeloma and metastatic bone lesions from solid tumors for patients with creatinine clearance (CrCl) greater than 60 mL/min is 4 mg infused over no less than15 minutes every 3 to 4 weeks. The optimal duration of therapy is not known.

Upon treatment initiation, the recommended zoledronic acid injection doses for patients with reduced renal function (mild and moderate renal impairment) are listed in Table 1. These doses are calculated to achieve the same area under the curve (AUC) as that achieved in patients with creatinine clearance of 75 mL/min. CrCl is calculated using the Cockcroft-Gault formula [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)].
Table 1: Reduced Doses for Patients with Baseline CrCl Less than or Equal to 60 mL/min Baseline Creatinine Clearance (mL/min) Zoledronic Acid Injection Recommended Dose* greater than 60 4 mg 50 to 60 3.5 mg 40 to 49 3.3 mg 30 to 39 3 mg *Doses calculated assuming target AUC of 0.66(mg•hr/L) (CrCl = 75 mL/min)
During treatment, serum creatinine should be measured before each zoledronic acid injection dose and treatment should be withheld for renal deterioration. In the clinical studies, renal deterioration was defined as follows:

For patients with normal baseline creatinine, increase of 0.5 mg/dL

For patients with abnormal baseline creatinine, increase of 1 mg/dL

In the clinical studies, zoledronic acid injection treatment was resumed only when the creatinine returned to within 10% of the baseline value. Zoledronic acid injection should be re-initiated at the same dose as that prior to treatment interruption.

Patients should also be administered an oral calcium supplement of 500 mg and a multiple vitamin containing 400 international units of Vitamin D daily.

2.3. Preparation of Solution

Zoledronic acid injection must not be mixed with calcium or other divalent cation-containing infusion solutions, such as Lactated Ringer’s solution, and should be administered as a single intravenous solution in a line separate from all other drugs.

4 mg /5 mL Single-Use Vial

Vials of zoledronic acid injection concentrate for infusion contain overfill allowing for the withdrawal of 5 mL of concentrate (equivalent to 4 mg zoledronic acid). This concentrate should immediately be diluted in 100 mL of sterile 0.9% Sodium Chloride, USP, or 5% Dextrose Injection, USP, following proper aseptic technique, and administered to the patient by infusion. Do not store undiluted concentrate in a syringe, to avoid inadvertent injection.

To prepare reduced doses for patients with baseline CrCl less than or equal to 60 mL/min, withdraw the specified volume of the zoledronic acid injection concentrate from the vial for the dose required (see Table 2).
Table 2: Preparation of Reduced Doses Zoledronic Acid Injection Concentrate Remove and Use Zoledronic Acid Injection Volume (mL) Dose (mg) 4.4 3.5 4.1 3.3 3.8 3
The withdrawn concentrate must be diluted in 100 mL of sterile 0.9% Sodium Chloride, USP, or 5% Dextrose Injection, USP.

If not used immediately after dilution with infusion media, for microbiological integrity, the solution should be refrigerated at 2°C-8°C (36°F-46°F). The refrigerated solution should then be equilibrated to room temperature prior to administration. The total time between dilution, storage in the refrigerator, and end of administration must not exceed 24 hours.

2.4. Method of Administration

Due to the risk of clinically significant deterioration in renal function, which may progress to renal failure, single doses of zoledronic acid injection should not exceed 4 mg and the duration of infusion should be no less than 15 minutes [seeWarnings and Precautions (5.3)]. In the trials and in postmarketing experience, renal deterioration, progression to renal failure and dialysis, have occurred in patients, including those treated with the approved dose of 4 mg infused over 15 minutes. There have been instances of this occurring after the initial zoledronic acid injection dose.
Oxycodone Hydrochloride...

Oxycodone Hydrochloride

2.1 Hyperlipidemia (Heterozygous Familial and Nonfamilial) and Mixed Dyslipidemia (Fredrickson Types IIa and IIb)

The recommended starting dose of atorvastatin calcium tablets is 10 or 20 mg once daily. Patients who require a large reduction in LDL-C (more than 45%) may be started at 40 mg once daily. The dosage range of atorvastatin calcium tablets is 10 to 80 mg once daily. Atorvastatin calcium tablets can be administered as a single dose at any time of the day, with or without food. The starting dose and maintenance doses of atorvastatin calcium tablets should be individualized according to patient characteristics such as goal of therapy and response (see current NCEP Guidelines). After initiation and/or upon titration of atorvastatin calcium tablets, lipid levels should be analyzed within 2 to 4 weeks and dosage adjusted accordingly.

2.2 Heterozygous Familial Hypercholesterolemia in Pediatric Patients (10 to 17 years of age)

The recommended starting dose of atorvastatin calcium tablets is 10 mg/day; the maximum recommended dose is 20 mg/day (doses greater than 20 mg have not been studied in this patient population). Doses should be individualized according to the recommended goal of therapy [see current NCEP Pediatric Panel Guidelines, Clinical Pharmacology (12), and Indications and Usage (1.2)]. Adjustments should be made at intervals of 4 weeks or more.

2.3 Homozygous Familial Hypercholesterolemia

The dosage of atorvastatin calcium tablets in patients with homozygous FH is 10 to 80 mg daily. Atorvastatin calcium tablets should be used as an adjunct to other lipid-lowering treatments (e.g., LDL apheresis) in these patients or if such treatments are unavailable.

2.4 Concomitant Lipid-Lowering Therapy

Atorvastatin calcium tablets may be used with bile acid resins. The combination of HMG-CoA reductase inhibitors (statins) and fibrates should generally be used with caution [see Warnings and Precautions, Skeletal Muscle (5.1), Drug Interactions (7)].

2.5 Dosage in Patients with Renal Impairment

Renal disease does not affect the plasma concentrations nor LDL-C reduction of atorvastatin calcium tablets; thus, dosage adjustment in patients with renal dysfunction is not necessary [see Warnings and Precautions, Skeletal Muscle (5.1), Clinical Pharmacology, Pharmacokinetics (12.3)].

2.6 Dosage in Patients Taking Cyclosporine, Clarithromycin, Itraconazole, or Certain Protease Inhibitors

In patients taking cyclosporine or the HIV protease inhibitors (tipranavir plus ritonavir) or the hepatitis C protease inhibitor (telaprevir), therapy with atorvastatin calcium tablets should be avoided. In patients with HIV taking lopinavir plus ritonavir, caution should be used when prescribing atorvastatin calcium tablets and the lowest dose necessary employed. In patients taking clarithromycin, itraconazole, or in patients with HIV taking a combination of saquinavir plus ritonavir, darunavir plus ritonavir, fosamprenavir, or fosamprenavir plus ritonavir, therapy with atorvastatin calcium tablets should be limited to 20 mg, and appropriate clinical assessment is recommended to ensure that the lowest dose necessary of atorvastatin calcium is employed. In patients taking the HIV protease inhibitor nelfinavir or the hepatitis C protease inhibitor boceprevir, therapy with atorvastatin calcium tablets should be limited to 40 mg, and appropriate clinical assessment is recommended to ensure that the lowest dose necessary of atorvastatin calcium tablets is employed [see Warnings and Precautions, Skeletal Muscle (5.1), Drug Interactions (7)].
Gemcitabine

Gemcitabine

Gemcitabine for injection is for intravenous use only. Gemcitabine for injection may be administered on an outpatient basis.

2.1 Ovarian Cancer

Recommended Dose and Schedule

The recommended dose of gemcitabine for injection is 1000 mg/m2 as an intravenous infusion over 30 minutes on Days 1 and 8 of each 21-day cycle, in combination with carboplatin AUC 4 intravenously after gemcitabine for injection administration on Day 1 of each 21-day cycle. Refer to carboplatin prescribing information for additional information.

Dose Modifications

Recommended gemcitabine for injection dose modifications for myelosuppression are described Table 1 and Table 2 [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)]. Refer to Dosage and Administration (2.5) for recommendations for non-hematologic adverse reactions.

Table 1: Dosage Reduction Guidelines for Gemcitabine For Injection for Myelosuppression on Day of Treatment in Ovarian Cancer
Treatment Day Absolute granulocyte count (x 106/L) Platelet count (x 106/L) % of full dose Day 1 ≥1500 and ≥100,000 100% <1500 or <100,000 Delay Treatment Cycle Day 8 ≥1500 and ≥100,000 100 1000 to 1499 or 75,000 to 99,999 50 <1000 or <75,000 Hold
Table 2: Gemcitabine For Injection Dose Modification for Myelosuppression in Previous Cycle In Ovarian Cancer
Occurrence Myelosuppression During Treatment Cycle Dose Modification Initial Occurrence Absolute granulocyte count less than 500 x 106/L for more than 5 days Absolute granulocyte count less than 100 x 106/L for more than 3 days Febrile neutropenia Platelets less than 25,000x106/L Cycle delay of more than one week due to toxicity Permanently reduce gemcitabine for injection to 800 mg/m2 on Days 1 and 8 Subsequent Occurrence If any of the above toxicities occur after the initial dose reduction Permanently reduce gemcitabine for injection dose to 800 mg/m2on Day 1 only
2.2 Breast Cancer

Recommended Dose and Schedule

The recommended dose of gemcitabine for injection is 1250 mg/m2 intravenously over 30 minutes on Days 1 and 8 of each 21-day cycle that includes paclitaxel. Paclitaxel should be administered at 175 mg/m2 on Day 1 as a 3 hour intravenous infusion before gemcitabine for injection administration.

Dose Modifications Recommended dose modifications for gemcitabine for injection for myelosuppression are described in Table 3 [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)]. Refer to Dosage and Administration (2.5) for recommendations for non-hematologic adverse reactions.

Table 3: Recommended Dose Reductions for Gemcitabine For Injection for Myelosuppression on Day of Treatment in Breast Cancer
Treatment Day Absolute granulocyte count (x 106/L) Platelet count(x 106/L) % of full dose Day 1 ≥1500 and ≥ 100,000 100% less than1500 or less than 100,000 Hold Day 8 ≥ 1200 and > 75,000 100% 1000 to 1199 or 50,000 to 75,000 75% 700 to 999 and ≥ 50,000 50% < 700 or < 50,000 Hold
2.3 Non-Small Cell Lung Cancer

Recommended Dose and Schedule

Every 4-week schedule The recommended dose of gemcitabine for injection is 1000 mg/m2 intravenously over 30 minutes on Days 1, 8, and 15 in combination with cisplatin therapy. Administer cisplatin intravenously at 100 mg/m2 on Day 1 after the infusion of gemcitabine for injection.

Every 3-week schedule

The recommended dose of gemcitabine for injection is 1250 mg/m2 intravenously over 30 minutes on Days 1 and 8 in combination with cisplatin therapy. Administer cisplatin intravenously at 100 mg/m2 on Day 1 after the infusion of gemcitabine for injection.

Dose Modifications

Recommended dose modifications for gemcitabine for injection myelosuppression are described in Table 4 [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)]. Refer to Dosage and Administration (2.5) for gemcitabine for injection recommendations for non-hematologic adverse reactions.

2.4 Pancreatic Cancer

Recommended Dose and Schedule

The recommended dose of gemcitabine for injection is 1000 mg/m2 over 30 minutes intravenously. The recommended treatment schedule

• Weeks 1 to 8: weekly dosing for the first 7 weeks followed by one week rest.

• After week 8: weekly dosing on Days 1, 8, and 15 of 28-day cycles.

Dose Modifications

Recommended dose modifications for gemcitabine for injection for myelosuppression are described in Table 4 [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)]. Refer to Dosage and Administration (2.5) for recommendations for non-hematologic adverse reactions.

Patients receiving gemcitabine for injection should be monitored prior to each dose with a complete blood count (CBC), including differential and platelet count. If marrow suppression is detected, therapy should be modified or suspended according to the guidelines in Table 4.

Table 4: Recommended Dose Reductions for Gemcitabine For Injection for Myelosuppression in Pancreatic Cancer and Non-Small Cell Lung Cancer
Absolute granulocyte count (x 106/L) Platelet count(x 106/L) % of full dose ≥1000 And ≥100,000 100 500 to 999 Or 50,000 to 99,999 75 <500 Or <50,000 Hold

2.5 Dose Modifications for Non-Hematologic Adverse Reactions

Permanently discontinue gemcitabine for injection for any of the following
Unexplained dyspnea or other evidence of severe pulmonary toxicity Severe hepatic toxicity Hemolytic-Uremic Syndrome Capillary Leak Syndrome Posterior reversible encephalopathy syndrome
Withhold gemcitabine for injection or reduce dose by 50% for other severe (Grade 3 or 4) non-hematological toxicity until resolved. No dose modifications are recommended for alopecia, nausea, or vomiting.

2.6 Preparation and Administration Precautions

Exercise caution and wear gloves when preparing gemcitabine for injection solutions. Immediately wash the skin thoroughly or rinse the mucosa with copious amounts of water if gemcitabine for injection contacts the skin or mucus membranes. Death has occurred in animal studies due to dermal absorption. For further guidance on handling gemcitabine for injection go to “OSHA Hazardous Drugs” (refer to antineoplastic weblinks including OSHA Technical Manual) at OSHA. http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/hazardousdrugs/index.html

2.7 Preparation for Intravenous Infusion Administration

Reconstitute the vials with 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection without preservatives. Add 5 mL to the 200 mg vial or 25 mL to the 1 g vial. These dilutions each yield a gemcitabine for injection concentration of 38 mg/mL. Complete withdrawal of the vial contents will provide 200 mg or 1 g of gemcitabine for injection. Prior to administration the appropriate amount of drug must be diluted with 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection. Final concentrations may be as low as 0.1 mg/mL.

Reconstituted gemcitabine for injection is a clear, colorless to light straw-colored solution. Inspect visually prior to administration and discard for particulate matter or discoloration. Gemcitabine for injection solutions are stable for 24 hours at controlled room temperature of 20° to 25°C (68° to 77°F). Do not refrigerate as crystallization can occur.

No incompatibilities have been observed with infusion bottles or polyvinyl chloride bags and administration sets.
Eszopiclone

Eszopiclone

Use the lowest effective dose for the patient.

2.1 Dosage in Adults

The recommended starting dose is 1 mg. Dosing can be raised to 2 mg or 3 mg if clinically indicated. In some patients, the higher morning blood levels of eszopiclone tablets following use of the 2 mg or 3 mg dose increase the risk of next day impairment of driving and other activities that require full alertness [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1)]. The total dose of eszopiclone tablets should not exceed 3 mg, once daily immediately before bedtime [see Warnings and Precautions (5.6)].

2.2 Geriatric or Debilitated Patients

The total dose of eszopiclone tablets should not exceed 2 mg in elderly or debilitated patients.

2.3 Patients with Severe Hepatic Impairment, or Taking Potent CYP3A4 Inhibitors

In patients with severe hepatic impairment, or in patients coadministered eszopiclone tablets with potent CYP3A4 inhibitors, the total dose of eszopiclone tablets should not exceed 2 mg [see Warnings and Precautions (5.7)].

2 4 Use with CNS Depressants

Dosage adjustments may be necessary when eszopiclone tablets are combined with other CNS depressant drugs because of the potentially additive effects [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1)].

2.5 Administration with Food

Taking eszopiclone tablets with or immediately after a heavy, high-fat meal results in slower absorption and would be expected to reduce the effect of eszopiclone tablets on sleep latency [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Razadyne

Razadyne

2.1 Acute Coronary Syndrome

Clopidogrel tablets can be administered with or without food [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]
For patients with non-ST-elevation ACS (UA/NSTEMI), initiate clopidogrel tablets with a single 300 mg oral loading dose and then continue at 75 mg once daily. Initiate aspirin (75 to 325 mg once daily) and continue in combination with clopidogrel tablets [see Clinical Studies (14.1)]. For patients with STEMI, the recommended dose of clopidogrel tablets is 75 mg once daily orally, administered in combination with aspirin (75 to 325 mg once daily), with or without thrombolytics. Clopidogrel tablets may be initiated with or without a loading dose [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].
2.2 Recent MI, Recent Stroke, or Established Peripheral Arterial Disease

The recommended daily dose of clopidogrel tablets is 75 mg once daily orally, with or without food [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.3 CYP2C19 Poor Metabolizers

CYP2C19 poor metabolizer status is associated with diminished antiplatelet response to clopidogrel. Although a higher dose regimen in poor metabolizers increases antiplatelet response [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.5)], an appropriate dose regimen for this patient population has not been established.

2.4 Use with Proton Pump Inhibitors (PPI)

Avoid using omeprazole or esomeprazole with clopidogrel tablets. Omeprazole and esomeprazole significantly reduce the antiplatelet activity of clopidogrel tablets. When concomitant administration of a PPI is required, consider using another acid-reducing agent with minimal or no CYP2C19 inhibitory effect on the formation of clopidogrel active metabolite [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1), Drug Interactions (7.1) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Fluconazole

Fluconazole

Dosage and Administration in Adults

Single Dose

Vaginal candidiasis: The recommended dosage of fluconazole for vaginal candidiasis is 150 mg as a single oral dose.

Multiple Dose

SINCE ORAL ABSORPTION IS RAPID AND ALMOST COMPLETE, THE DAILY DOSE OF FLUCONAZOLE IS THE SAME FOR ORAL AND INTRAVENOUS ADMINISTRATION. In general, a loading dose of twice the daily dose is recommended on the first day of therapy to result in plasma concentrations close to steady-state by the second day of therapy.

The daily dose of fluconazole for the treatment of infections other than vaginal candidiasis should be based on the infecting organism and the patient’s response to therapy. Treatment should be continued until clinical parameters or laboratory tests indicate that active fungal infection has subsided. An inadequate period of treatment may lead to recurrence of active infection. Patients with AIDS and cryptococcal meningitis or recurrent oropharyngeal candidiasis usually require maintenance therapy to prevent relapse.

Oropharyngeal candidiasis: The recommended dosage of fluconazole for oropharyngeal candidiasis is 200 mg on the first day, followed by 100 mg once daily. Clinical evidence of oropharyngeal candidiasis generally resolves within several days, but treatment should be continued for at least 2 weeks to decrease the likelihood of relapse.

Esophageal candidiasis: The recommended dosage of fluconazole for esophageal candidiasis is 200 mg on the first day, followed by 100 mg once daily. Doses up to 400 mg/day may be used, based on medical judgment of the patient’s response to therapy. Patients with esophageal candidiasis should be treated for a minimum of three weeks and for at least two weeks following resolution of symptoms.

Systemic Candida infections: For systemic Candida infections including candidemia, disseminated candidiasis, and pneumonia, optimal therapeutic dosage and duration of therapy have not been established. In open, noncomparative studies of small numbers of patients, doses of up to 400 mg daily have been used.

Urinary tract infections and peritonitis: For the treatment of Candida urinary tract infections and peritonitis, daily doses of 50 to 200 mg have been used in open, noncomparative studies of small numbers of patients.

Cryptococcal meningitis: The recommended dosage for treatment of acute cryptococcal meningitis is 400 mg on the first day, followed by 200 mg once daily. A dosage of 400 mg once daily may be used, based on medical judgment of the patient’s response to therapy. The recommended duration of treatment for initial therapy of cryptococcal meningitis is 10 to 12 weeks after the cerebrospinal fluid becomes culture negative. The recommended dosage of fluconazole for suppression of relapse of cryptococcal meningitis in patients with AIDS is 200 mg once daily.

Prophylaxis in patients undergoing bone marrow transplantation: The recommended fluconazole daily dosage for the prevention of candidiasis in patients undergoing bone marrow transplantation is 400 mg, once daily. Patients who are anticipated to have severe granulocytopenia (less than 500 neutrophils per cu mm) should start fluconazole prophylaxis several days before the anticipated onset of neutropenia, and continue for 7 days after the neutrophil count rises above 1000 cells per cu mm.

Dosage and Administration in Children

The following dose equivalency scheme should generally provide equivalent exposure in pediatric and adult patients:
Pediatric Patients Adults * Some older children may have clearances similar to that of adults. Absolute doses exceeding 600 mg/day are not recommended. 3 mg/kg 100 mg 6 mg/kg 200 mg 12* mg/kg 400 mg
Experience with fluconazole in neonates is limited to pharmacokinetic studies in premature newborns. (See CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY.) Based on the prolonged half-life seen in premature newborns (gestational age 26 to 29 weeks), these children, in the first two weeks of life, should receive the same dosage (mg/kg) as in older children, but administered every 72 hours. After the first two weeks, these children should be dosed once daily. No information regarding fluconazole pharmacokinetics in full-term newborns is available.

Dosage in Patients With Impaired Renal Function

Fluconazole is cleared primarily by renal excretion as unchanged drug. There is no need to adjust single dose therapy for vaginal candidiasis because of impaired renal function. In patients with impaired renal function who will receive multiple doses of fluconazole, an initial loading dose of 50 to 400 mg should be given. After the loading dose, the daily dose (according to indication) should be based on the following table:
Creatinine Clearance (mL/min) Percent of Recommended Dose > 50 100% ≤ 50 (no dialysis) 50% Regular dialysis 100% after each dialysis
These are suggested dose adjustments based on pharmacokinetics following administration of multiple doses. Further adjustment may be needed depending upon clinical condition.

When serum creatinine is the only measure of renal function available, the following formula (based on sex, weight, and age of the patient) should be used to estimate the creatinine clearance in adults:

Males: Weight (kg) × (140-age) 72 × serum creatinine (mg/100 mL)

Females: 0.85 × above value

Although the pharmacokinetics of fluconazole has not been studied in children with renal insufficiency, dosage reduction in children with renal insufficiency should parallel that recommended for adults. The following formula may be used to estimate creatinine clearance in children:

K × linear length or height (cm) serum creatinine (mg/100 mL)(Where K=0.55 for children older than 1 year and 0.45 for infants.)

Administration

Fluconazole tablets are administered orally. Fluconazole tablets can be taken with or without food.
Paricalcitol

Paricalcitol

2.1 Chronic Kidney Disease Stages 3 and 4

Paricalcitol capsules may be administered daily or three times a week. When dosing three times weekly, the dose should be administered not more frequently than every other day. The total weekly doses for both daily and three times a week dosage regimens are similar [see Clinical Studies ( 14.1 )].

Paricalcitol capsules may be taken without regard to food. No dosing adjustment is required in patients with mild and moderate hepatic impairment.

Initial Dose

The initial dose of paricalcitol capsules for CKD Stages 3 and 4 patients is based on baseline intact parathyroid hormone (iPTH) levels.
Baseline iPTH Level Daily Dose Three Times a Week Dose* ≤ 500 pg/mL 1 mcg 2 mcg > 500 pg/mL 2 mcg 4 mcg * To be administered not more often than every other day
Dose Titration

Dosing must be individualized and based on serum or plasma iPTH levels, with monitoring of serum calcium and serum phosphorus. The following is a suggested approach to dose titration.
Dose Adjustment at 2 to 4 Week Intervals iPTH Level Relative to Baseline Paricalcitol Capsule Dose Daily Dosage Three Times a Week Dosage* The same, increased or decreased by < 30% Increase dose by 1 mcg 2 mcg Decreased by ≥ 30% and ≤ 60% Maintain dose - - Decreased by > 60% oriPTH < 60 pg/mL Decrease dose by 1 mcg 2 mcg * To be administered not more often than every other day
If a patient is taking the lowest dose, 1 mcg, on the daily regimen and a dose reduction is needed, the dose can be decreased to 1 mcg three times a week. If a further dose reduction is required, the drug should be withheld as needed and restarted at a lower dosing frequency. If a patient is on a calcium-based phosphate binder, the phosphate-binder dose may be decreased or withheld, or the patient may be switched to a non-calcium-based phosphate binder. If hypercalcemia is observed, the dose of paricalcitol should be reduced or withheld until these parameters are normalized.

Serum calcium and phosphorus levels should be closely monitored after initiation of paricalcitol capsules, during dose titration periods and during co-administration with strong CYP3A inhibitors [see Warnings and Precautions (5.3), Drug Interactions (7) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Lamotrigine

Lamotrigine

Lamotrigine extended-release tablets are taken once daily, with or without food. Tablets must be swallowed whole and must not be chewed, crushed, or divided.

2.1 General Dosing Considerations

Rash: There are suggestions, yet to be proven, that the risk of severe, potentially life-threatening rash may be increased by (1) coadministration of lamotrigine extended-release tablets with valproate, (2) exceeding the recommended initial dose of lamotrigine extended-release tablets, or (3) exceeding the recommended dose escalation for lamotrigine extended-release tablets. However, cases have occurred in the absence of these factors [see BoxedWarning]. Therefore, it is important that the dosing recommendations be followed closely.

The risk of nonserious rash may be increased when the recommended initial dose and/or the rate of dose escalation for lamotrigine extended-release tablets are exceeded and in patients with a history of allergy or rash to other AEDs.

It is recommended that lamotrigine extended-release tablets not be restarted in patients who discontinued due to rash associated with prior treatment with lamotrigine, unless the potential benefits clearly outweigh the risks. If the decision is made to restart a patient who has discontinued lamotrigine extended-release tablets, the need to restart with the initial dosing recommendations should be assessed. The greater the interval of time since the previous dose, the greater consideration should be given to restarting with the initial dosing recommendations. If a patient has discontinued lamotrigine for a period of more than 5 half-lives, it is recommended that initial dosing recommendations and guidelines be followed. The half-life of lamotrigine is affected by other concomitant medications [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Lamotrigine Extended-Release Tablets Added to Drugs Known to Induce or Inhibit Glucuronidation: Because lamotrigine is metabolized predominantly by glucuronic acid conjugation, drugs that are known to induce or inhibit glucuronidation may affect the apparent clearance of lamotrigine. Drugs that induce glucuronidation include carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone, rifampin, estrogen-containing oral contraceptives, and the protease inhibitors lopinavir/ritonavir and atazanavir/ritonavir. Valproate inhibits glucuronidation. For dosing considerations for lamotrigine extended-release tablets in patients on estrogen-containing contraceptives and atazanavir/ritonavir, see below and Table 5. For dosing considerations for lamotrigine extended-release tablets in patients on other drugs known to induce or inhibit glucuronidation, see Table 1 and Table 5.

Target Plasma Levels: A therapeutic plasma concentration range has not been established for lamotrigine. Dosing of lamotrigine extended-release tablets should be based on therapeutic response [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Women Taking Estrogen-Containing Oral Contraceptives: Starting Lamotrigine Extended-Release Tablets in Women Taking Estrogen-Containing Oral Contraceptives: Although estrogen-containing oral contraceptives have been shown to increase the clearance of lamotrigine [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)], no adjustments to the recommended dose-escalation guidelines for lamotrigine extended-release tablets should be necessary solely based on the use of estrogen-containing oral contraceptives. Therefore, dose escalation should follow the recommended guidelines for initiating adjunctive therapy with lamotrigine extended-release tablets based on the concomitant AED or other concomitant medications (see Table 1). See below for adjustments to maintenance doses of lamotrigine extended-release tablets in women taking estrogen-containing oral contraceptives.

Adjustments to the Maintenance Dose of Lamotrigine Extended-Release Tablets in Women Taking Estrogen-Containing Oral Contraceptives:

(1) Taking Estrogen-Containing Oral Contraceptives: In women not taking carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone, or other drugs such as rifampin and the protease inhibitors lopinavir/ritonavir and atazanavir/ritonavir  that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)] the maintenance dose of lamotrigine extended-release tablets will in most cases need to be increased by as much as 2-fold over the recommended target maintenance dose to maintain a consistent lamotrigine plasma level.

(2) Starting Estrogen-Containing Oral Contraceptives: In women taking a stable dose of lamotrigine extended-release tablets and not taking carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone, or other drugs such as rifampin and the protease inhibitors lopinavir/ritonavir and atazanavir/ritonavir that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)], the maintenance dose will in most cases need to be increased by as much as 2-fold to maintain a consistent lamotrigine plasma level. The dose increases should begin at the same time that the oral contraceptive is introduced and continue, based on clinical response, no more rapidly than 50 to 100 mg/day every week. Dose increases should not exceed the recommended rate (see Table 1) unless lamotrigine plasma levels or clinical response support larger increases. Gradual transient increases in lamotrigine plasma levels may occur during the week of inactive hormonal preparation (pill-free week), and these increases will be greater if dose increases are made in the days before or during the week of inactive hormonal preparation. Increased lamotrigine plasma levels could result in additional adverse reactions, such as dizziness, ataxia, and diplopia. If adverse reactions attributable to lamotrigine extended-release tablets consistently occur during the pill-free week, dose adjustments to the overall maintenance dose may be necessary. Dose adjustments limited to the pill-free week are not recommended. For women taking lamotrigine extended-release tablets in addition to carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone, or other drugs such as rifampin and the protease inhibitors lopinavir/ritonavir and atazanavir/ritonavir that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)], no adjustment to the dose of lamotrigine extended-release tablets should be necessary.

(3) Stopping Estrogen-Containing Oral Contraceptives: In women not taking carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone, or other drugs such as rifampin and the protease inhibitors lopinavir/ritonavir and atazanavir/ritonavir that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)], the maintenance dose of lamotrigine extended-release tablets will in most cases need to be decreased by as much as 50% in order to maintain a consistent lamotrigine plasma level. The decrease in dose of lamotrigine extended-release tablets should not exceed 25% of the total daily dose per week over a 2-week period, unless clinical response or lamotrigine plasma levels indicate otherwise [see ClinicalPharmacology (12.3)].In women taking lamotrigine extended-release tablets in addition to carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone, or other drugs such as rifampin and the protease inhibitors lopinavir/ritonavir and atazanavir/ritonavir that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)], no adjustment to the dose of lamotrigine extended-release tablets should be necessary.

Women and Other Hormonal Contraceptive Preparations or Hormone Replacement Therapy: The effect of other hormonal contraceptive preparations or hormone replacement therapy on the pharmacokinetics of lamotrigine has not been systematically evaluated. It has been reported that ethinylestradiol, not progestogens, increased the clearance of lamotrigine up to 2-fold, and the progestin-only pills had no effect on lamotrigine plasma levels. Therefore, adjustments to the dosage of lamotrigine extended-release tablets in the presence of progestogens alone will likely not be needed.

Patients Taking Atazanavir/Ritonavir: While atazanavir/ritonavir does reduce the lamotrigine plasma concentration, no adjustments to the recommended dose-escalation guidelines for lamotrigine extended-release tablets should be necessary solely based on the use of atazanavir/ritonavir. Dose escalation should follow the recommended guidelines for initiating adjunctive therapy with lamotrigine extended-release tablets based on concomitant AED or other concomitant medications (see Tables 1 and 5). In patients already taking maintenance doses of lamotrigine extended-release tablets and not taking glucuronidation inducers, the dose of lamotrigine extended-release tablets may need to be increased if atazanavir/ritonavir is added, or decreased if atazanavir/ritonavir is discontinued [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Patients With Hepatic Impairment: Experience in patients with hepatic impairment is limited. Based on a clinical pharmacology study in 24 subjects with mild, moderate, and severe liver impairment [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)], the following general recommendations can be made. No dosage adjustment is needed in patients with mild liver impairment. Initial, escalation, and maintenance doses should generally be reduced by approximately 25% in patients with moderate and severe liver impairment without ascites and 50% in patients with severe liver impairment with ascites. Escalation and maintenance doses may be adjusted according to clinical response.

Patients With Renal Impairment: Initial doses of lamotrigine extended-release tablets should be based on patients’ concomitant medications (see Table 1); reduced maintenance doses may be effective for patients with significant renal impairment [see Use in Specific Populations (8.7), ClinicalPharmacology (12.3)]. Few patients with severe renal impairment have been evaluated during chronic treatment with immediate-release lamotrigine. Because there is inadequate experience in this population, lamotrigine extended-release tablets should be used with caution in these patients.

Discontinuation Strategy: For patients receiving lamotrigine extended-release tablets in combination with other AEDs, a re-evaluation of all AEDs in the regimen should be considered if a change in seizure control or an appearance or worsening of adverse reactions is observed.

If a decision is made to discontinue therapy with lamotrigine extended-release tablets, a step-wise reduction of dose over at least 2 weeks (approximately 50% per week) is recommended unless safety concerns require a more rapid withdrawal [see Warnings and Precautions (5.8)].

Discontinuing carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone, or other drugs such as rifampin and the protease inhibitors lopinavir/ritonavir and atazanavir/ritonavir that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation should prolong the half-life of lamotrigine; discontinuing valproate should shorten the half-life of lamotrigine.

2.2 Adjunctive Therapy for Primary Generalized Tonic-Clonic and Partial-Onset Seizures

This section provides specific dosing recommendations for patients aged 13 years and older. Specific dosing recommendations are provided depending upon concomitant AEDs or other concomitant medications.

Table 1. Escalation Regimen for Lamotrigine Extended-Release Tablets in Patients Aged 13 Years and Older
For Patients TAKING Valproatea For PatientsNOT TAKING Carbamazepine, Phenytoin,Phenobarbital, Primidone,b or Valproatea For Patients TAKING Carbamazepine, Phenytoin,Phenobarbital, or Primidoneb and NOT TAKING Valproatea Weeks 1 and 2 25 mg every other day 25 mg every day 50 mg every day Weeks 3 and 4 25 mg every day 50 mg every day 100 mg every day Week 5 50 mg every day 100 mg every day 200 mg every day Week 6 100 mg every day 150 mg every day 300 mg every day Week 7 150 mg every day 200 mg every day 400 mg every day Maintenance range (week 8 and onward) 200 to 250 mg everydayc 300 to 400 mg every dayc 400 to 600 mg every dayc
a Valproate has been shown to inhibit glucuronidation and decrease the apparent clearance of lamotrigine [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

b Drugs that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation and increase clearance, other than the specified antiepileptic drugs, include estrogen-containing oral contraceptives, rifampin, and the protease inhibitors lopinavir/ritonavir and atazanavir/ritonavir. Dosing recommendations for oral contraceptives and the protease inhibitor atazanavir/ritonavir can be found in General Dosing Considerations [see Dosage and Administration (2.1)]. Patients on rifampin and the protease inhibitor lopinavir/ritonavir should follow the same dosing titration/maintenance regimen used with antiepileptic drugs that induce glucuronidation and increase clearance [see Dosage and Administration (2.1), Drug Interactions (7), and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

c Dose increases at week 8 or later should not exceed 100 mg daily at weekly intervals.

2.3 Conversion From Adjunctive Therapy to Monotherapy

The goal of the transition regimen is to attempt to maintain seizure control while mitigating the risk of serious rash associated with the rapid titration of lamotrigine extended-release tablets.

To avoid an increased risk of rash, the recommended maintenance dosage range of lamotrigine extended-release tablets as monotherapy is 250 to 300 mg given once daily.

The recommended initial dose and subsequent dose escalations for lamotrigine extended-release tablets should not be exceeded [see Boxed Warning].

Conversion From Adjunctive Therapy With Carbamazepine, Phenytoin, Phenobarbital, or Primidone to Monotherapy With Lamotrigine Extended-Release Tablets:

After achieving a dose of 500 mg/day of lamotrigine extended-release tablets using the guidelines in Table 1, the concomitant enzyme-inducing AED should be withdrawn by 20% decrements each week over a 4-week period. Two weeks after completion of withdrawal of the enzyme-inducing AED, the dosage of lamotrigine extended-release tablets may be decreased no faster than 100 mg/day each week to achieve the monotherapy maintenance dosage range of 250 to 300 mg/day.

The regimen for the withdrawal of the concomitant AED is based on experience gained in the controlled monotherapy clinical trial using immediate-release lamotrigine.

Conversion From Adjunctive Therapy With Valproate to Monotherapy With Lamotrigine Extended-Release Tablets:

The conversion regimen involves the 4 steps outlined in Table 2.

Table 2. Conversion From Adjunctive Therapy With Valproate to Monotherapy With Lamotrigine Extended-Release Tablets in Patients Aged 13 Years and Older With Epilepsy
Lamotrigine Extended-Release Tablets Valproate Step 1 Achieve a dose of 150 mg/day according to guidelines in Table 1. Maintain established stable dose. Step 2 Maintain at 150 mg/day. Decrease dose by decrements no greater than 500 mg/day/week to 500 mg/day and then maintain for 1 week. Step 3 Increase to 200 mg/day. Simultaneously decrease to 250 mg/day and maintain for 1 week. Step 4 Increase to 250 or 300 mg/day. Discontinue.
Conversion From Adjunctive Therapy With Antiepileptic Drugs Other Than Carbamazepine, Phenytoin, Phenobarbital, Primidone, or Valproate to Monotherapy With Lamotrigine Extended-Release Tablets:

After achieving a dosage of 250 to 300 mg/day of lamotrigine extended-release tablets using the guidelines in Table 1, the concomitant AED should be withdrawn by 20% decrements each week over a 4-week period. No adjustment to the monotherapy dose of lamotrigine extended-release tablets is needed.

2.4 Conversion From Immediate-Release Lamotrigine Tablets to Lamotrigine Extended-Release Tablets

Patients may be converted directly from immediate-release lamotrigine to lamotrigine extended-release tablets. The initial dose of lamotrigine extended-release tablets should match the total daily dose of immediate-release lamotrigine. However, some subjects on concomitant enzyme inducing agents may have lower plasma levels of lamotrigine on conversion and should be monitored [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Following conversion to lamotrigine extended-release tablets, all patients (but especially those on drugs that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation) should be closely monitored for seizure control [see Drug Interactions (7)]. Depending on the therapeutic response after conversion, the total daily dose may need to be adjusted within the recommended dosing instructions (Table 1).
Fluoxetine Hydrochlorid...

Fluoxetine Hydrochloride

2.1 Major Depressive Disorder

Initial Treatment

Adult — Initiate fluoxetine delayed-release capsules 20 mg/day orally in the morning. Consider a dose increase after several weeks if insufficient clinical improvement is observed. Administer doses above 20 mg/day once daily in the morning or twice daily (i.e., morning and noon).The maximum fluoxetine dose should not exceed 80 mg/day.

In controlled trials used to support the efficacy of fluoxetine, patients were administered morning doses ranging from 20 to 80 mg/day. Studies comparing fluoxetine 20, 40, and 60 mg/day to placebo indicate that 20 mg/day is sufficient to obtain a satisfactory response in Major Depressive Disorder in most cases [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].

Pediatric (children and adolescents) — Initiate fluoxetine delayed-release capsules, 10 or 20 mg/day. After 1 week at 10 mg/day, increase the dose to 20 mg/day. However, due to higher plasma levels in lower weight children, the starting and target dose in this group may be 10 mg/day. Consider a dose increase to 20 mg/day after several weeks if insufficient clinical improvement is observed. In the short-term (8 to 9 week) controlled clinical trials of fluoxetine supporting its effectiveness in the treatment of Major Depressive Disorder, patients were administered fluoxetine doses of 10 to 20 mg/day [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].

All patients — As with other drugs effective in the treatment of Major Depressive Disorder, the full effect may be delayed until 4 weeks of treatment or longer.

Periodically reassess to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

Weekly Dosing — Initiate fluoxetine delayed-release capsules (once-weekly) 7 days after the last daily dose of fluoxetine 20 mg [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

If satisfactory response is not maintained with fluoxetine delayed-release capsules once-weekly, consider reestablishing a daily dosing regimen [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].

Switching Patients to a Tricyclic Antidepressant (TCA) — Dosage of a TCA may need to be reduced, and plasma TCA concentrations may need to be monitored temporarily when fluoxetine is coadministered or has been recently discontinued [see Warnings and Precautions(5.2) and Drug Interactions (7.7) ].

2.7 Dosing in Specific Populations

Treatment of Pregnant Women — When treating pregnant women with fluoxetine, the physician should carefully consider the potential risks and potential benefits of treatment. Neonates exposed to SSRIs or SNRIs late in the third trimester have developed complications requiring prolonged hospitalization, respiratory support, and tube feeding [see Use in Specific Populations (8.1)].

Geriatric — Consider a lower less frequent dosage for the elderly [see Use in Specific Populations (8.5)]

Hepatic Impairment — As with many other medications, use a lower or less frequent dosage in patients with hepatic impairment [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.4) and Use in Specific Populations (8.6)].

Concomitant Illness — Patients with concurrent disease or on multiple concomitant medications may require dosage adjustments [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.4) and Warnings and Precautions (5.12)].

2.8 Discontinuation of Treatment

Symptoms associated with discontinuation of fluoxetine, SNRIs, and SSRIs, have been reported [see Warnings and Precautions (5.15)]

2.9 Switching a Patient To or From a Monoamine Oxidase Inhibitor (MAOI) Intended to Treat Psychiatric Disorders

At least 14 days should elapse between discontinuation of an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders and initiation of therapy with fluoxetine. Conversely, at least 5 weeks should be allowed after stopping fluoxetine before starting an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders [see Contraindications (4.1)].

2.10 Use of Fluoxetine with Other MAOIs such as Linezolid or Methylene Blue

Do not start fluoxetine in a patient who is being treated with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue because there is an increased risk of serotonin syndrome. In a patient who requires more urgent treatment of a psychiatric condition, other interventions, including hospitalization, should be considered [see Contraindications (4.1)].

In some cases, a patient already receiving fluoxetine therapy may require urgent treatment with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue. If acceptable alternatives to linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are not available and the potential benefits of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are judged to outweigh the risks of serotonin syndrome in a particular patient, fluoxetine should be stopped promptly, and linezolid or intravenous methylene blue can be administered. The patient should be monitored for symptoms of serotonin syndrome for five weeks or until 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue, whichever comes first. Therapy with fluoxetine may be resumed 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)].

The risk of administering methylene blue by non-intravenous routes (such as oral tablets or by local injection) or in intravenous doses much lower than 1 mg/kg with fluoxetine is unclear. The clinician should, nevertheless, be aware of the possibility of emergent symptoms of serotonin syndrome with such use [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)].
Dyna-max 505

Dyna-max 505

do not divide, crush, chew or dissolve the tablet; swallow tablet whole
adults and children 12 years of age and over take 1 tablet with a glass of water every 12 hours on an empty stomach; do not take more than 2 tablets in 24 hours children under 12 years of age do not use Adults 65 years of age and older ask a doctor consumers with kidney disease ask a doctor
Metoprolol Succinate

Metoprolol Succinate

Zenatane should be administered with a meal (see PRECAUTIONS: Informationfor Patients).

The recommended dosage range for Zenatane is 0.5 to 1.0 mg/kg/day given in two divided doses with food for 15 to 20 weeks. In studies comparing 0.1, 0.5, and 1.0 mg/kg/day,8 it was found that all dosages provided initial clearing of disease, but there was a greater need for retreatment with the lower dosages. During treatment, the dose may be adjusted according to response of the disease and/or the appearance of clinical side effects — some of which may be dose related. Adult patients whose disease is very severe with scarring or is primarily manifested on the trunk may require dose adjustments up to 2.0 mg/kg/day, as tolerated. Failure to take Zenatane with food will significantly decrease absorption. Before upward dose adjustments are made, the patients should be questioned about their compliance with food instructions.

The safety of once daily dosing with Zenatane has not been established. Once daily dosing is not recommended.

If the total nodule count has been reduced by more than 70% prior to completing 15 to 20 weeks of treatment, the drug may be discontinued. After a period of 2 months or more off therapy, and if warranted by persistent or recurring severe nodular acne, a second course of therapy may be initiated. The optimal interval before retreatment has not been defined for patients who have not completed skeletal growth. Long-term use of Zenatane, even in low doses, has not been studied, and is not recommended. It is important that Zenatane be given at the recommended doses for no longer than the recommended duration. The effect of long-term use of Zenatane on bone loss is unknown (see WARNINGS: Skeletal: BoneMineral Density, Hyperostosis, and Premature Epiphyseal Closure).

Contraceptive measures must be followed for any subsequent course of therapy (see PRECAUTIONS).

Table 4 Zenatane Dosing by Body Weight (Based on Administration With Food)
Body Weight Total mg/day kilograms pounds 0.5 mg/kg 1 mg/kg 2 mg/kg* 40 88 20 40 80 50 110 25 50 100 60 132 30 60 120 70 154 35 70 140 80 176 40 80 160 90 198 45 90 180 100 220 50 100 200
*See DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION: the recommended dosage range is 0.5 to 1 mg/kg/day.
INFORMATION FOR PHARMACISTS Access the iPLEDGE system via the internet (www.ipledgeprogram.com) or telephone (1-866495-0654) to obtain an authorization and the “do not dispense to patient after” date. Zenatane must only be dispensed in no more than a 30-day supply. REFILLS REQUIRE A NEW PRESCRIPTION AND A NEW AUTHORIZATION FROM THE iPLEDGE SYSTEM. A ZenataneTM Medication Guide must be given to the patient each time ZenataneTM is dispensed, as required by law. This Zenatane medication guide is an important part of the risk management program for the patient.
Duloxetine

Duloxetine

Duloxetine delayed-release capsules should be swallowed whole and should not be chewed or crushed, nor should the capsule be opened and its contents sprinkled on food or mixed with liquids. All of these might affect the enteric coating. Duloxetine delayed-release capsules should be given without regard to meals.

2.1 Initial Treatment

Major Depressive Disorder - Duloxetine delayed-release capsules should be administered at a total dose of 40 mg/day (given as 20 mg twice daily) to 60 mg/day (given either once daily or as 30 mg twice daily). For some patients, it may be desirable to start at 30 mg once daily for 1 week, to allow patients to adjust to the medication before increasing to 60 mg once daily. While a 120 mg/day dose was shown to be effective, there is no evidence that doses greater than 60 mg/day confer any additional benefits. The safety of doses above 120 mg/day has not been adequately evaluated [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].

Generalized Anxiety Disorder - For most patients, the recommended starting dose for duloxetine delayed-release capsules are 60 mg administered once daily. For some patients, it may be desirable to start at 30 mg once daily for 1 week, to allow patients to adjust to the medication before increasing to 60 mg once daily. While a 120 mg once daily dose was shown to be effective, there is no evidence that doses greater than 60 mg/day confer additional benefit. Nevertheless, if a decision is made to increase the dose beyond 60 mg once daily, dose increases should be in increments of 30 mg once daily. The safety of doses above 120 mg once daily has not been adequately evaluated [see Clinical Studies (14.2)]

Diabetic Peripheral Neuropathic Pain - The recommended dose for duloxetine delayed-release capsules is 60 mg administered once daily. There is no evidence that doses higher than 60 mg confer additional significant benefit and the higher dose is clearly less well tolerated [see Clinical Studies (14.3)]. For patients for whom tolerability is a concern, a lower starting dose may be considered.

Since diabetes is frequently complicated by renal disease, a lower starting dose and gradual increase in dose should be considered for patients with renal impairment [seeDosage and Administration (2.3), Use In Specific Population (8.10), and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Chronic Musculoskeletal Pain — The recommended dose for duloxetine delayed-release capsules is 60 mg once daily. Dosing may be started at 30 mg for one week, to allow patients to adjust to the medication before increasing to 60 mg once daily. There is no evidence that higher doses confer additional benefit, even in patients who do not respond to a 60 mg dose, and higher doses are associated with a higher rate of adverse reactions [see Clinical Studies (14.5)].

2.2 Maintenance/Continuation/Extended Treatment

Major Depressive Disorder — It is generally agreed that acute episodes of major depression require several months or longer of sustained pharmacologic therapy. Maintenance of efficacy in MDD was demonstrated with duloxetine delayed-release capsules as monotherapy. Duloxetine delayed-release capsules should be administered at a total dose of 60 mg once daily. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment and the appropriate dose for such treatment [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].

Generalized Anxiety Disorder — It is generally agreed that episodes of generalized anxiety disorder require several months or longer of sustained pharmacological therapy. Maintenance of efficacy in GAD was demonstrated with duloxetine as monotherapy. Duloxetine delayed-release capsules should be administered in a dose range of 60 to 120 mg once daily. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the continued need for maintenance treatment and the appropriate dose for such treatment [see Clinical Studies (14.2)].

Diabetic Peripheral Neuropathic Pain — As the progression of diabetic peripheral neuropathy is highly variable and management of pain is empirical, the effectiveness of duloxetine delayed-release capsules must be assessed individually. Efficacy beyond 12 weeks has not been systematically studied in placebo-controlled trials.

Chronic Musculoskeletal Pain — The efficacy of duloxetine delayed-release capsules has not been established in placebo-controlled studies beyond 13 weeks.

2.3 Dosing in Special Populations

Hepatic Insufficiency —It is recommended that duloxetine delayed-release capsules should ordinarily not be administered to patients with any hepatic insufficiency [see Warnings and Precautions (5.14) and Use In Specific Populations (8.9)].

Severe Renal Impairment — Duloxetine delayed-release capsules are not recommended for patients with end-stage renal disease or severe renal impairment (estimated creatinine clearance <30 mL/min) [see Warnings and Precautions (5.14) and Use In Specific Populations (8.10)].

Elderly Patients — No dose adjustment is recommended for elderly patients on the basis of age. As with any drug, caution should be exercised in treating the elderly. When individualizing the dosage in elderly patients, extra care should be taken when increasing the dose [see Use In Specific Populations (8.5)].

Pregnant Women — There are no adequate and well-controlled studies in pregnant women; therefore, duloxetine delayed-release capsules should be used during pregnancy only if the potential benefit justifies the potential risk to the fetus [see Use In Specific Populations (8.1)].

Nursing Mothers — Because the safety of duloxetine in infants is not known, nursing while on duloxetine delayed-release capsules are not recommended [see Use In Specific Populations (8.3)].

2.4 Discontinuing Duloxetine

Symptoms associated with discontinuation of duloxetine delayed-release capsules and other SSRIs and SNRIs have been reported. A gradual reduction in the dose rather than abrupt cessation is recommended whenever possible [see WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5.7)].

2.5 Switching a Patient To or From a Monoamine Oxidase Inhibitor (MAOI) Intended to Treat Psychiatric Disorders

At least 14 days should elapse between discontinuation of an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders and initiation of therapy with duloxetine delayed-release capsules. Conversely, at least 5 days should be allowed after stopping duloxetine delayed-release capsules before starting an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders [see CONTRAINDICATIONS (4.1)].

2.6 Use of Duloxetine with Other MAOIs such as Linezolid or Methylene Blue

Do not start duloxetine in a patient who is being treated with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue because there is an increased risk of serotonin syndrome. In a patient who requires more urgent treatment of a psychiatric condition, other interventions, including hospitalization, should be considered [see CONTRAINDICATIONS (4.1)].

In some cases, a patient already receiving duloxetine therapy may require urgent treatment with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue. If acceptable alternatives to linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are not available and the potential benefits of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are judged to outweigh the risks of serotonin syndrome in a particular patient, duloxetine should be stopped promptly, and linezolid or intravenous methylene blue can be administered. The patient should be monitored for symptoms of serotonin syndrome for 5 days or until 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue, whichever comes first. Therapy with duloxetine may be resumed 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue [see WARNINGS AND PRECAUSTIONS (5.4)].

The risk of administering methylene blue by non-intravenous routes (such as oral tablets or by local injection) or in intravenous doses much lower than 1 mg/kg with duloxetine is unclear. The clinician should, nevertheless, be aware of the possibility of emergent symptoms of serotonin syndrome with such use [see WARNINGS AND PRECAUSTIONS (5.4)].
Fondaparinux Sodium

Fondaparinux Sodium

Do not mix other medications or solutions with fondaparinux sodium injection. Administer fondaparinux sodium injection only subcutaneously.

2.1 Deep Vein Thrombosis Prophylaxis Following Hip Fracture, Hip Replacement, and Knee Replacement Surgery

In patients undergoing hip fracture, hip replacement, or knee replacement surgery, the recommended dose of fondaparinux sodium injection is 2.5 mg administered by subcutaneous injection once daily after hemostasis has been established. Administer the initial dose no earlier than 6 to 8 hours after surgery. Administration of fondaparinux sodium injection earlier than 6 hours after surgery increases the risk of major bleeding. The usual duration of therapy is 5 to 9 days; up to 11 days of therapy was administered in clinical trials.

In patients undergoing hip fracture surgery, an extended prophylaxis course of up to 24 additional days is recommended. In patients undergoing hip fracture surgery, a total of 32 days (peri-operative and extended prophylaxis) was administered in clinical trials. [See Warnings and Precautions (5.6), Adverse Reactions (6), and Clinical Studies (14)].

2.2 Deep Vein Thrombosis Prophylaxis Following Abdominal Surgery

In patients undergoing abdominal surgery, the recommended dose of fondaparinux sodium injection is 2.5 mg administered by subcutaneous injection once daily after hemostasis has been established. Administer the initial dose no earlier than 6 to 8 hours after surgery. Administration of fondaparinux sodium injection earlier than 6 hours after surgery increases the risk of major bleeding. The usual duration of administration is 5 to 9 days, and up to 10 days of fondaparinux sodium injection was administered in clinical trials.

2.3 Deep Vein Thrombosis and Pulmonary Embolism Treatment

In patients with acute symptomatic DVT and in patients with acute symptomatic PE, the recommended dose of fondaparinux sodium injection is 5 mg (body weight <50 kg), 7.5 mg (body weight 50 to 100 kg), or 10 mg (body weight >100 kg) by subcutaneous injection once daily (fondaparinux sodium treatment regimen). Initiate concomitant treatment with warfarin sodium as soon as possible, usually within 72 hours. Continue treatment with fondaparinux sodium injection for at least 5 days and until a therapeutic oral anticoagulant effect is established (INR 2 to 3). The usual duration of administration of fondaparinux sodium injection is 5 to 9 days; up to 26 days of fondaparinux sodium injection was administered in clinical trials. [See Warnings and Precautions (5.6), Adverse Reactions (6), and Clinical Studies (14)].

2.4 Hepatic Impairment

No dose adjustment is recommended in patients with mild to moderate hepatic impairment, based upon single-dose pharmacokinetic data. Pharmacokinetic data are not available for patients with severe hepatic impairment. Patients with hepatic impairment may be particularly vulnerable to bleeding during fondaparinux sodium therapy. Observe these patients closely for signs and symptoms of bleeding. [See Clinical Pharmacology (12.4).]

2.5 Instructions for Use

Fondaparinux sodium injection is provided in a single-dose, prefilled syringe affixed with an active needle protection system. Fondaparinux sodium is administered by subcutaneous injection. It must not be administered by intramuscular injection. Fondaparinux sodium injection is intended for use under a physician’s guidance. Patients may self-inject only if their physician determines that it is appropriate and the patients are trained in subcutaneous injection techniques. Prior to administration, visually inspect fondaparinux sodium injection to ensure the solution is clear and free of particulate matter. The following instructions are specific to the Preventis TM injection system and may differ from the directions for other injection systems.

To avoid the loss of drug when using the prefilled syringe, do not expel the air bubble from the syringe before the injection. Administration should be made in the fatty tissue, alternating injection sites (e.g., between the left and right anterolateral or the left and right posterolateral abdominal wall).

To administer fondaparinux sodium:

STEP 1:
Wipe the surface of the injection site with an alcohol swab. Remove the needle shield by pulling it straight off the syringe (Figure 1). Discard the needle shield.

STEP 2:
Do not try to remove the air bubbles from the syringe before giving the injection. Pinch a fold of skin at the injection site between your thumb and forefinger and hold it throughout the injection time. Hold the syringe with your thumb on the top pad of the plunger and keep your index and middle fingers on the finger-grips of the syringe barrel. Pay attention to avoid pricking yourself with the exposed needle. Insert the full length of the syringe needle perpendicularly into the skin fold held between the thumb and forefinger (Figure 2). Push the plunger to the bottom of the syringe. This will ensure you have injected all the contents of the syringe.

STEP 3:
Remove the syringe from the injection site keeping your finger on the plunger (Figure 3).

STEP 4:
Orient the needle away from you and others, and activate the safety shield by firmly pushing the plunger. The protective sleeve will automatically cover the needle and an audible "click" will be heard to confirm shield activation (Figure 4).

STEP 5:
Immediately discard the syringe into the sharps container (Figure 5).

Dr. Reddy's Laboratories Limited

Manufacturer Details

Share This Page

Dr. Reddy's Laboratories Limited Drugs